Home

SDMS User`s Guide Version 3_5

1. il PR RTOTEST PRJ 25 TR RTO SR AC PR 4 ID HWY 136 a IT GEO440 Du SN 76428 Ts NM PROJECT 89 123 TE 28 Ka EE Oe OB K ADAMS SE RE K ADAMS 12 DT 06 14 1999 T3 WE CLEAR 14 IRENE T5 Chal 16 PF EY UA D 18 ID 21 19 eS aE 20 VR SDMS Collector 3 4 0 2a AC 0S 22 BNE ZIS Zoe E 24 E 25 po vl eee 26 XGA TS MR 27 PD CTRL MON 28 EEGI 29 AC BS 30 PN 216 Sch PD CTRL MON SE DEER 3S YC 2244 08 34 ACA POL SE HZ 0 36 EE SCH EE 38 AC EC 29 INS SF 40 PD TBM 41 ECTS 42 ZC 448 39 43 HZ 5 4530 44 VT 89 2244 45 DS 838 54 46 EE 47 PN 1000 48 PD 24 MAPLE 49 FESTR 50 HZ 16 374 51 vee AE 52 E 53 TOREA 54 AC SS 53 PN 1001 56 PD SAN MH 57 EES SME 58 Has 03924 59 VARCA y Sk 60 DS 436 472 61 AC UE 62 PN 1002 63 ID wie 64 PELOS 83 HRS LOSS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 35 D Q SS ZOOS ISE COR BLDG BU Sab UQE ERES y MAA 122 8035 265 934 Hoo ou SS N 1004 PD NE COR BLDG EEs BU FG 1 HO IO ZAG VT 88 2942 ISO Osa SEG AC UE P1005 PD NE COR BLDG PD ROOF LEA 1B Wie Gil ASS H yola aa O tea tea dae tng Q N EE BUILDING FRONT Appendix Computed Radial Topography Example Saved As A Control CTL File OIM ele AC PR NM JOB RTOTEST ID STATE HWY 136 CM CONTROL FILE DT 03 26 2000 HD NAD 83 1996 VD NAVD 88 ZN4802 BEI AEROS BNE ZIS VER LOZI SSA Ke ZC 439
2. CBA iets CUE is BRE URS Te EE Ending PI 12 53 Appendix Sample Horizontal Alignment File ALI with Spirals and Equations PI Definition in Report Format dls AC PR Des PR STH67 ALIGNMENT DT 03 26 1998 ZN 4802 RE GENO ae ACEO SBS LL E 4 INC EO EQ 2 De AGO ro ET ER EE EEN s1230 000900 S2 Us ACEROS Gg Kee SLeSO 00000W 52 8 INC BOIS SREE CRA XC 594 Aa OO S36 cs AOS SEL EVANS SEET LOs AO SS EA MOS RA 480 000000 als ACIOS Sisal YGS R1 300 000000 Ws ACIOS EE O Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 on me REE 30 000000 50 000000 435 000000 R2 400 000000 NM STATE HWY A HWY B CM DESIGN HORIZONTAL UL M3 VD NGVD 29 HD NAD 83 DT 03 26 1998 RE GENO TY PI 836 ST 11 400 000 ST 12 140 000 CSG MASAS ENEE ACE VID 15 7000 AOS IAS KOS TISIIA SI SARO RA 435 000000 ANS 8 0 OW 2x Cao Siler TO TADO RA 592 379000 ARIZONA OO ESTIS CESIL 582 126000 YC 207594 266000 LOMAS OMS EXC EH 208076 928466 XC 759174 304456 3 150 000000 208605 886025 XC 759457 507387 12 54 Sample Vertical Alignment File PRO PI Definition AC PR BRISSTACUSBRO DT 03 26 1998 RE GENO UL M3 AC 0S SAL ewe Ie 10 ST 10 974 000 ial ZC 299 024000 LZ L1 0 000000 seks L2 0 000000 14 AC 0S JS SILVET JS sT 11 240 000 a ZC 307 998840 ley EZ 25 AO 000 00 ES L2 225 000000 20 AC 0S Alls Sus WAP IL 225 SE re 237 ZC 284 000640 24 L1 125 000000
3. HY 15 0 Highway HZ 10 1 Horizontal Angle 0 20 0 Information 0 E 20 0 LA Lora ron ty 12 20 Omen Eet bett Ay 3 20 0 Information 3 42070 Information ed 5 Z0 O min rormata O EZONE EN bere 15 a 20 01 erotica Ye 8 20 0 Information 8 20 0 orma tiOn D 25 0 Project Identification H 6 1 Instrument Height Tf 25 0 Instrument Type GEODIMETER See Docs for Model s LEICA See Docs for Model s MANUAL data entered by hand NIKON_DTM See Docs for Model s I PENTAX PTSTIISPES TET SOKKIA LIETZ See Docs for Model s TOPCON_COARSE See Docs for Model s TOPCON_FINE See Docs for Model s TRIMBLE_TTS See Docs for Model s WILDT2000 See Docs for Model s WILDT1010 See Docs for Model s ZEISS4D See Docs for Model s L1 12 0 Loc 1 CTL File Name Length Curve 1 L2 12 0 Loc 2 CTL File Name Length Curve 2 LE O O onei enezo LG 13 0 Longitude LN 6 0 Length LO 8 1 Length Offset LS 10 0 Length of Spiral LT 12 0 Latitude MO 10 1 Mid Ordinate Distance Circular Curve NM 25 0 Name NS 2 1 Number of Shots OB 15 0 Observer OD 7 3 001 Origin Destination Point Number OP 6 II EE 00 6 1 Offset Computed OS 7 3 001 Occupied Station Point Number OW 25 0 Owner PC 10 1 Prism Correction PD 25 0 Point Description PH 4 0 Physical Attribute Ph sy 0 opine Eelere PM 4 0 PPM Factor PN 7 3 001 Point Number Max 32576 PO 6 1 Prism Offset PR 25 0 Project Name R1 8 1 Rod R
4. PN CM FE CD FG CH PL FE TY OS BS PN FE CD FG AD PL CM Default Data Tags N FE PD IH SH N FE PD HZ VT DS N FE PD HZ VT DS N FE PD ZC HZ VT DS N FE PD HZ N FE HZ VT DS PD UO Ul uly ty ul PN CM Default Data Tags PN PD ZC 12 19 Activity AC TX Activity AC 0S AC BS AC FS Appendix Default Data Tags PN CM Photo Control Task PHO Default Data Tags PN FE PD IH PN SH FE PD HZ VT DS SH FE PD HZ VT DS AC SS AC EC PN PN PN SH FE PD HZ VT DS SH FE PD ZC HZ VT DS AC CC AC SR AC SI AC UE AC TS AC PR AC CK AC TX Terrain Model Task TMO Activity AC OS AC BS AC FS AC SS AC EC AC CC AC SR AC SI AC UE AC TS AC PR AC CK SH FE PD YC XC ZC HZ VT DS SH FE PD HZ VT DS YC XC ZC FE PD HZ FE PD RR HZ VT DS FE PD FE PD JH CM Default Data Tags PN PN PN PN PN PN PN PN PN PN FE PD IH SH FE PD HZ VT DS SH FE PD HZ VT DS SH FE PD HZ VT DS SH FE PD ZC HZ VT DS SH FE PD YC XC ZC HZ VT DS SH FE PD HZ VT DS YC XC ZC FE PD HZ FE PD RR HZ VT DS FE PD AC TX Level Run Task LEV Activity AC OS AC BS AC FS AC EC AC CC Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 PN Default Data Tags FE PD ZC PN RR P
5. PN FE HZ VT DS PD Radial Topography Task RTO Activity ault Data Tags AC OS AC BS AC SS AC EC AC CC AC SR AC SI AC UE AC ST AC PR AC CK AC TX AC CH AC FG AC TA BS PN FE CD FG AD PL CM Combined Task COM Activity Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Def PN PN PN SH FE PD HZ VT DS PN PN PN PN PN TH FE PD SH FE PD HZ VT DS SH FE PD HZ VT DS SH FE PD ZC HZ VT DS SH FE PD YC XC ZC HZ VT DS FE PD HZ CM IH FE PD SH FE PD HZ VT DS SH FE PD ZC HZ VT DS SH FE PD YC XC ZC HZ VT DS SH FE PD HZ VT DS YC XC ZC FE PD HZ SH FE PD RR ST PN FE FE CM CD FG CH PL TY OS Default Data Tags 12 18 AC OS AC BS AC FS AC SS AC EC AC CC AC SR AC SI AC UE AC TS AC ST AC PR AC CK AC TX AC CH AC FG AC TA Control Network Task CON Activity AC OS AC BS AC FS AC EC AC SI AC TS AC PR AC CK AC TX Profile Task PRO Activity AC OS AC BS AC FS AC SS AC EC AC CC AC UE AC TP AC PR AC CK Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix PN IH FE PD PN SH FE PD HZ VT DS PN SH FE PD HZ VT DS PN SH FE PD HZ VT DS PN SH FE PD ZC HZ VT DS PN SH FE PD YC XC ZC HZ VT DS PN SH FE PD HZ VT DS YC XC ZC PN FE PD HZ PN SH FE PD RR PN HZ VT DS FE PD ST
6. Displayed AC FS Close or Suspend Type a C to close the project Choose a SDMS Collector returns to the main menu Command The Level Run Example Project PRJ File 00 JO UG Ai QNDAVUPA PA PAPNVUPHY lag Key 39 ISI es TOP bel or AAA DAI AAA Examples Instructions and Comments continuing the known closing elevation must be entered Back up to the A in AC and type ZC but do not press lt ENTER gt yet Type 839 123 Press lt Esc gt to leave data collection LEVEXAM PRI LEV 0S SCH USES 31D 1987 289 OON TBS E SU SE BS SE SIS SE EE Siia LIS FITT ES IAS DIS Wale E The Computed Level Run Saved As A Control CTL File COR oa D Sa E ER D AS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 109 Sh EE USES SiD ES SIS 8 e IE USES E 11 16 Examples Three Wire Level Example Three Wire Level TK 3WR is a vertical differential leveling task PN 1 PN 2 PD USGS 3005A ZC 1016 723 PD USGS 3002B ZC 1015 986 AC TP ZC 1018 536 Displayed Instructions and Comments Choose a From the main menu press lt F1 gt Project to open a Command project Type the project name 3WREXAM lt ENTER gt PRJ New Project Type 3WR and press lt ENTER gt to select the traverse Enter Task TK task Type 1016 723 and press lt ENTER gt Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested backsight activity ype 2 928 pe 2 815 pe 2 702 pe TP over BS to sele
7. Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 80 Op Til NAs L 14 LS Lo vo Ners LOR AD St Ge 237 CNS 257 26 Appendix FE HOUSE Suso HZ 0 VT 90 3006 DS 180 94 AC TA OSLO Point Number of the point to be used as the occupied station This is the second point in the chain being defined within the taping activity BS 9 Point Number of the point to be used as the back sight This is the first point in the chain being defined within the taping DOLINA PN 100 Beginning Point Number to be used for the points computed within the taping activity FE HOUSE Feature to be used for the new chain FG 5 Figure Code to be used for the chain CD OUR HOUSE Chain Description AD R 34 Right 34 feet use the same elevation as PN 10 ADOS EZ Right 60 feet Add 3 2 feet to the elevation of the preceding point AD L 38 0 Left 38 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point AD R 44 C Right 44 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point Close on the back sight point CP 09 18 1999 18 46 43 The Calculated File with C in the Taping Activity Using C to close the figure the post processing software would display the calculated shot information and describe the chain in the SDMS calculated file CAL as de ACASO Des Peo oF FE BU 4 XX 10085 4876 KG YY 10240 1582 EC GER SES SH 5 0000 8 Har ASS 9 VT 90 3045 LOE DS 254 9300 Maks ARSS I ENSLO
8. User Shot Sequences provides a default NS sequence named NEWPR SEQ This sequence contains the following data items Data tag Description er maipo A er Users can use NEWPR SEQ as provided or modify it to suit their needs The users could also create their own opening sequence or choose not to use an opening sequence at all Building a Sequence File The sequence files can be built by using any text editor as well as the SDMS Collector editor Care should be taken when using an editor other than the SDMS Collector Other editors would not provide the traps to make sure the data tags used are all valid and capitalized New sequence file can be made from existing sequence files by e editing an existing sequence and saving it under a new file name or e appending another sequence to the existing sequence then saving the results under a new file name Inserting a Standard Shot When Building a Sequence Standard shots can be included in a sequence Instead of typing each individual data item place the two hyphens data tag after the sideshot activity tag This directs SDMS Collector to use the data tags defined for the given activity as found in the active TASK TGS file for the task being used This saves keystrokes when the sequence has many standard shots When SDMS Collector encounters it prompts for the standard activity sequence When the standard shot is complete SDMS Collector returns to the user shot seq
9. VO Vertical Offset used in radial topography to record the vertical distance from the point shot to a remote shot directly above or below it VR Version Number used to record the version number of SDMS being used VT Vertical Angle used to record a vertical angle measurement in the DDD MMSS format Vertical angles are measured from the zenith being equal to zero degrees For example a vertical angle of 90 0000 degrees indicates horizontal line of sight This angle is equivalent to a zenith angle VT config Maximum Vertical Stations when used in the TOL CFG file defines the maximum number of occupied stations that can be recorded in a vertical task between two bench marks VV Vertical Angle Computed where multiple observations are made of a point from the same occupied station this data item records the averaged vertical angle WI config Single Wire Level Closure when used in the TOL CFG file defines the single wire leveling closure tolerance W3 config Three Wire Stadia Constant used in leveling to record the Three Wire stadia constant value This value should be consistent with the selected rod type RT This data item is also used in the TOL CFG file WC Write Control File Name a user specified control file used to save point data that has been calculated but not checked for accuracy Once these points have been verified they can be moved to the L1 L2 S1 or S2 files WD Width
10. made lt F6 gt Rec Saves records the entire screen data as displayed to the Record REC file lt F8 gt OR_ Return user to Orientation screen lt Esc gt Backs up one screen The data displayed on the Alignment Control Stakeout screen is as follows PN ST OF FE ZC SH VO LO RO DZ HZ DH Input by user Value from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user Value from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user Value from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user Value from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user Value from Orientation screen or input by user Input by user default 0 This value is added to or subtracted from SH to compute for shot point elevation Computed distance ahead or behind the current shot position to the desired position Computed distance left or right of the current shot position to the desired position The algebraic difference between the known elevation ZC of the desired point and the computed elevation ZZ of the point measured plus the vertical offset VO That is DZ ZC VO ZZ Horizontal angle between the occupied station backsight orientation and the point desired Horizontal distance between the occupied station backsight orientation and the point desired Summary of the HVD Data Entry Screen The functions for the HVD data entry screen is the same as described in section for
11. 0000 90 3006 180 9400 TA 10 9 100 OUR HOUSE R 34 R 60 3 2 ISSO R 44 9 Os 0 HOUSE 0000 0000 10180 9330 99999 10000 0000 0180 9330 498 4164 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 78 LOT 6 SI THS AC PN FE XX SES ZZ SI SH 0000 AC 100 PN assigned to the first taped point by HZ FE XX 10152 9848 ZZ KE Sal SH HZ Valles DS AC 500 FE XX SE ZZ PN SI TH AC PINGS 12438 IA MESA ACB XX 1 SONES ZZ SIS SH ae AC SIDD PN assigned to the next taped point by the EEs XX SES ZZ SI SH T OOOO WES DS NG EN HOUSE XX SES ZZ HZ FE SI EE AC PN FE AA YES ZZ SI Appendix TA Assigned to all taped points in the AC TA by the post processing software 0000 BS 9 HOUSE 10085 4876 10240 1582 ES Dial TA 0000 SS the post processing software HOUSE 100195628 498 4165 TA 0000 90 0000 90 0000 34 0000 OS HOUSE TOOPI SEAS 0152 9848 498 4165 CIA 0000 BS 0 HOUSE 0000 0000 0180 9330 IIS 0000 0000 10180 9330 498 4164 TA 0000 0000 ss post processing software HOUSE 10068 6824 KREE JON EIT TA 0000 86 5650 60 0850 OS 101 10068 6824 10187 1534 501 6167 TA 0000 BS 100 HOUSE 1009628 10152 9848 498 4165 TA Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 79 TUBO S EE EE e JCT 2219 LEAs AS S
12. An elevation control activity AC EC will be done later to update elevations Note If data is entered incorrectly it is not necessary to edit the file to make corrections Any data item within an activity except CM and PD can be corrected by simply reentering the data tag with the corrected information SDMS Collector will use the data from the last entry found for a data tag for computations and assigning attributes backsight activity AC BS number and press lt ENTER gt PD CTRL MON Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point YC Type the Y coordinate value 2244 08 and press press lt ENTER gt HZ Type O to zero the backsight and press VT Type the measured vertical zenith angle ee n press lt ENTER gt SDMS Collector again suggests a backsight activity since it was the last activity used Type EC over BS and press lt ENTER gt to select the elevation control activity Type point number 57 over the suggested point number 100 and press lt ENTER gt Don t forget to delete the leftover 0 PD CTRL MON Type point description TBM over the suggested description CTRL MON Use the lt spacebar gt or lt CTRL3 gt L to clear any previous description not replaced by the new one press lt ENTER gt press lt ENTER gt 89 2244 and press lt ENTER gt press lt ENTER gt lt ENTER gt to select the sideshot activity Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 3 Examples Displayed Instructions
13. Begin the transfer at the destination computer by pressing lt F1 gt Recv To start the transfer press lt F3 gt Send on the host computer When file transfer is complete SDMS Collector returns to the main menu Note The file transfer must begin with the computer receiving the file destination being started first then send the file from the host computer Receiving a File from Another Computer Use these steps to receive a file in SDMS Collector from another computer 1 Ze Hp Get SDMS Collector ready to receive the file Be sure all cables are connected properly and that all devices are powered on Be sure the communication parameters are set correctly in SDMS Collector on the source and destination computers From the main menu press lt F4 gt I O SDMS Collector automatically checks to see that the communication device is present Name the SDMS Collector file to receive the data and press lt ENTER gt Begin the transfer at the other computer When file transfer is complete SDMS Collector returns to the main menu Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 8 6 Customizing SDMS Collector Chapter 9 Customizing SDMS Collector SDMS Collector lets the user control the personality of the data collector Since surveying methods vary by user SDMS Collector is designed to be set up for different work needs SDMS Collector supplies predefined configuration and task activity settings defaults but also gives the us
14. JOB P89123 STATE HWY 136 CONTROL FILE 03 26 2000 AHD Any SDMS compliant data tag AVD may follow the AC PR Bim OS 2 EE eeh SU SE TRAV PT SAMSON BS d 6258 469 4939 307 SI SSS TRAV POINT DAVID ss 100 6004 392 5567 403 VAD SAO I R W MON B 26 ss 101 SUIS IN UDS 6221 SS USAS SI 102 7486 443 Cu AS S 1030 508 OS 5818 088 63276550 8922536 EG 5962 054 DIOS SOMO ss 6046 721 6350 777 90223316 IP SW COR LOT 44 BLK 12 SS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 33 587 PN Som Yes 60 AER EL ACR EC BDE 63 AC 64 PN Ba NES 66 XC ST ACn 68 BDE 69 AC TOR PN Ee MER Vee MOS GES SE 74 EE or AC oe PN Pate MOF or XOS Trz ZER 80 BDS Ss AC EE PN 83 Og 84 XE GE oat 86 RIDES cae AC 88 PN epee Vag 907 XC Sile ASS Ei PDE OS AC 94 PN Sie YEs 96 MOS SITS ZO SL PD SE AC lOO ABN LOL Gs LOA MCA LOS ACS TOA ees 105 CSOOR OF 6795 394 9313 36 09 R W MON B 27 ss 106 5682 589 SS SUIS 902 547 ss 107 5403 144 6315 493 LAS ISS OS 4 6250 000 VID IS 902 030 SS 108 5885 889 7543 480 928 201 NE COR SEC 6 SS 105 6300 797 6795 394 9387609 R W MON B 27 sI 102 7486 443 6117 887 1030 508 WDGY TOWER FS 5 SOS VLS 8552 676 934 701 NGS PT JONES Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix 12 34 Appendix Radial Topography Task TK RTO Project PRJ File
15. JS HES UI 14 XX 10000 0000 LS YY 10180 9330 JS ZZ 498 4164 We SH 5 0000 Ie HZ 0000 FS VT 90 3006 20 DS 180 9400 Balls AC TA Zoe OS 10 OSs BS 39 24 PN 100 29 CD OUR HOUSE 26 AD R 34 GC EIERE 28 ADRI SSO SEI AD R 44 C ao AC 0S Sal s PN 10 B22 FE HOUSE Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 81 SEH 34 Spe 36 Sue Scr SOF 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 SL AE NAGS AGS XX SES 498 4164 TA Assigned to all taped points in the AC TA ZZ SI EE AC PN EB XX ZE ZZ SI SH 0000 AC g LOO PN assigned to the first taped point by HZ FE AAt 10152 9848 ZZ YONG SI GE 90 0000 WAS 234 0000 HZ DS AC EQU TADS XX NES 1 ZZ PN sI RER AC BING FE XG CHA ACS XX 1 TES ZZ SES GES HZ AC gil al PN assigned to the next taped point by the In XX NEVES ZZ SI OHS iE Zips AS DSS AC PING HOUSE XX SC ZZ FE SI EE ABS Appendix 10000 0000 10180 9330 POS 10000 0000 10180 9330 by the post processing software 0000 BS 9 HOUSE 10085 4876 10240 1582 497 P2L1 TA 0000 SS the post processing software HOUSE 10019 3623 498 4165 TA 0000 90 0000 OS HOUSE 10019 3623 0152 9848 498 4165 SIA 0000 BS 0 HOUSE 0000 0000 0180 9330 9 9999 0000 0000 10180 9330 498 4164 TA 0000 0000 ss post processing
16. Note If at any time there is a warning that a measurement is not within set tolerances the user can hit the Esc key and this will terminate the computation From there the user may then edit the project file for a later re calculation Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 25 Computations SDMS Collector computes the angular and linear miss closure for traverse and combination tasks if closing coordinates are recorded The results as shown in Figure 6 20 are displayed as the total number of set ups in the traverse loop the total traverse length the angle closure the angular error per turn the latitude closure error the longitude closure error and the ratio of precision Traverse Computations Loop 1 Number of Setups Total Traverse Length 15716 72144 Angle Closure 7 568012 Secs Error Per Turn 1 5136023 Secs X Closure Error 0 547141 Y Closure Error H 701825 Figure 6 20 First Screen of Traverse Report Pressing lt Enter gt will bring up the next screen as shown in Figure 6 21 that shows the adjusted azimuth closures the latitude closure error the longitude closure error the elevation closure error and the ratio of precision Linear misclosure 0 889900 Ratio of precision 1 17661 Figure 6 21 Second Screen of Traverse Report Report Files The information displayed in the set reduction screens is stored in file SET TMP in the temporary directory specified in the I O configu
17. PN 201 YC 121352 293 KC 538667 375 Figure 208 The Edit Menu Functions available from the edit menu include e Edit the selected file e iz Search to work in search mode lt F3 gt Recall to recall deleted lines lt F4 gt Print to print the file being edited lt F5 gt File to access the various file save functions lt F6 gt Undo to undo the current edit lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt or lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to record a macro lt Esc gt to lose edits and exit The search function Figure 29 is accessed from the edit menu by pressing lt F2 gt Search The search feature is explained in detail in Chapter 7 The Editor RK KC 938667 375 20 199 410 PN 1 AZ 0 0 New Recl _ File Undo Prev Next Figure 2 9 The Search Menu Functions available from the search menu include e Edit the selected file e lt F2 gt New to specify a new search expression e lt F3 gt Recall to recall deleted lines e lt F5 gt File to access the various file save functions lt F6 gt Undo to undo the current edit lt F7 gt Previous for the previous occurrence of the search expression e lt F8 gt Next for the next occurrence of the search expression e lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt or lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to record a macro e lt Esc gt to return to the edit menu Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 18 The File Save Menu The I O Menu SDMS Collector System Basics The file save menu Figure 2 10 is acce
18. REC file lt F8 gt OR_ Returns user to Orientation screen lt Esc gt Backs up one screen The data displayed on the Slope Stake Shot screen is as follows ST Value from the Slope Stakeout screen Catch PN ST OF Value from the Slope Stakeout screen Catch PN OP FE Value from the Slope Stakeout screen Catch PN FE ZC Value from the Slope Stakeout screen Catch PN ZC SH Value from the Orientation screen or input by user VH Value from the Slope Stakeout screen or input by user LO Computed distance ahead or behind the current shot position to the desired position RO Computed distance left or right of the current shot position to the desired position DZ The algebraic difference between the known elevation ZC the computed elevation ZZ plus the vertical offset VO That is ZC VO ZZ HZ Horizontal angle between the occupied station backsight orientation and the point shot or entered manually DH Horizontal distance from occupied station point to the current shot point Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 20 Computations Summary of the HVD Data Entry Screen for Slope Stakeout The functions for the HVD data entry screen are the same as described in section for the Inverse Shot and Alignment Control Stakeout screens and as shown in Figure 6 9 Refer to that Inverse Shot section for details Summary of the HVD Data Screen for Slope
19. The user can also save the computed coordinates from this screen into a control file by pressing lt F5 gt Save SDMS Collector uses the Write Control file as the default If there is no write control file specified in the control configuration SDMS Collector will create a file with the name of the project file and a CTL extension When SDMS Collector saves a point to a control file it first checks the file to see if the same point number is already in the control file If the point number is found SDMS Collector will display the screen shown in Figure 6 6 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 4 Computations PN 100 KX 1004 549 YY 1007 874 27 100 000 Press Esc to return Point Exists Append Menumber Figure 6 6 Append or Renumber the Point to Save If the user chooses Renumber by pressing R they will be prompted for another PN to use and then SDMS Collector will repeat the process of searching the named control file for a conflict If the user chooses Append by pressing A the point will be saved at the bottom of the write control file with the duplicate point number It is then the responsibility of the user to edit the control file to remove any duplicate point numbers The point can also be saved to a control file other than the active write control file by inserting a comma after the PN and adding the control file tag such as PN L1 Note If more than one point in a control file has the same
20. 14 DS 180 94 Sys AC TA LG EE Point Number of the point to be used as the occupied station This is the second point in the chain being defined within the taping activity e BS 9 Point Number of the point to be used as the back sight This LS first point in the chain being defined within the taping activity Ss PN 100 Beginning point number to be used for the points computed within the taping activity JS FE HOUSE Feature to be used for the new chain 20 FG 5 Figure Code to be used for the chain ZS CD OUR HOUSE Chain Description Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 71 22 AO 24 25 let ST CASS 6 AD CBX R 104 Appendix 90 HZ Right 34 feet use the same elevation as PN 10 90 HZ Right 60 feet Add 3 2 feet to the elevation of the preceding point 90 HZ Left 38 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point 90 HZ Right 44 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point 90 HECRIONE 7 feet Subtrack 2 2 feet from the elevation of the preceding point 90 HZ Right 104 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point 09 18 1999 18 46 43 Direction using horizontal angles right HZ The user may need to tape around objects that have angles other than 90 involved This can be done using a horizontal angles right HZ to indicate the direction along each side of the object being measured Using horizontal angles right the precedin
21. A positive length offset LO or no sign indicates the distance actually measured is long and the prism needs to move toward the toward the instrument the distance displayed to reach the desired point LO 0 will display if the measurement distance is equal to the inverse distance to the desired point Prism in back e of point Y LO Point Location e Desired Prism in front of point LO Figure 6 12 Length Offset LO Direction The right angle offset RO shown in Figure 13 indicates whether the prism needs to be moved from the current measured position to get to the desired point position The direction is always based on looking back at the instrument A negative right angle offset RO indicates the distance to the desired point is left of the current position A positive right angle offset RO or no sign indicates the distance to the desired point is right of the current position the distance displayed Point Location Desired Figure 6 13 Right Angle Offset RO Direction The Delta Z DZ indicates the vertical distance the point shot is above DZ or below DZ the elevation of the actual desired It is based on the algebraic difference between the known elevation of the desired point and the elevation of the current point shot Many times the point to be set needs to be offset vertically above or below the desired point elevation This is done in stakeout by typing in a value for the vertical
22. Collector will first look in the project file to see 1f known coordinates exist for Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 2 Computations key points If so SDMS Collector uses these values If needed control coordinates are not found in the project file SDMS Collector will check to see if the user has named any active control files in the CNTL CFG file If so SDMS Collector will search first the L1 and then the L2 control file to find a match for the PN it needs coordinates for If SDMS cannot find the needed coordinates in the project or the active L1 or L2 control files it will then prompt the user to key in the needed coordinates If the user does not know the coordinates to key in SDMS Collector will assign O for the needed values Figure 63 shows the screen that will appear to prompt the user for needed coordinates when they are not found in the project file or active control files Ins Enter Coordinates For Point 102 Figure 6 3 Manual Entry Coordinates Screen Enter the missing values then press lt F1 gt Save to store the coordinates to a control file and continue computations The Save function is explained further in the section on Live Computations below Using Combination Factor CF with Computations The user also needs to understand how SDMS Collector uses the combination factor when performing computations The combination factor is the combination of the state plane coordinate scale fact
23. Dt tay pa We cay e EE EG E e Jet Jet REG fan dae On pla EZRA ECONO lt a y e la cs GS a EE j td EE Y IES SD p X3RIVER2 RTO DR 7200 04 00 SE RE STAGELINE RD ST CROIX CRS TD SURVEY2 gS IWS D HENKEL G GOSNELL SHG LSO PCLOUDY 1 08 14 1995 St 00 Sal SDMS Ver 3 1 CL101493 405 SS SEL AMAS IU TOR 402168 536 1280328 492 Do DS E ABS EE GPS 212 REBAR RED EE E 948 850 SEP aie a 70 EE 480 05 SINC 220152 GPS 212 REBAR RED 948 850 20 T 91 2744 480 09 Zo 376 00 Ge XSE IRAIA 12 2924 as SS 141 43 Baos SS Lada Oe OS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 38 64 DSE 65 AC 66 PN Oils HZ 68 Wire Sor DS KA KES SE AC A PN VS HZ 74 WAS ES OSs Woe AC E DN So BWA Y Elo WAkg 20r DS SE AC EE PN GE HZ 84 WARS EE DSE E AC SEN E 88 AC SE PN 90 HZ SI o VIS 92 DS SE AC 94 PN 95r HZ SE VAS SE D gom AC GC PN t Et E LOA DEE Jg ae 104 BN TOSTE OG Vis LOT SS LOS AMES gt ACS IAN EE E Wee Ss LIS IDSs EE AS PL EN DRESS LET a VAES LL DISS OA OS 120 Site LALO as Lo ENS MR EZS a A LAS DSE TAG 5 INGS L2 o ENR LZE o JEZ LoS VAS ASO Ss SAA Lado ENE MEL ZAS E TS 163 54 ss T296 GE Sen dE 1 SS T297 ARAN SE EE ss 11299 el 92 482 224 77 ss T299 33 4616 92 2604 247 94 sT 376
24. FE XSE oie PD C L ENT 20 OERO Sie RR 5 1 28n AC SS BOF EES Es 40 PD CAL ENT 41 OF 0 42 ARSS 43 AC SS 44 FE XSE 45 PD C L ENT 46 09 15 47 RR 5 4 48 ACESS 49 FE XSE 50s PD CAL ENT Gi EE Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 24 Examples S27 E es AGESS 54 FE XSE SS PD C L ENT GIS OBERTA Dig RR 6 4 ger ENEE 397 AC SS 60 eh SI ORL Bee RR 4 2 So AC SS 64 FE XSE De EE 66 RR 5 0 ST AC SS 68 FE XSE 69 OF 50 70 BRE 6 SE AC BS 122 E Sa SI BL 74 AC SS ior SE We ORTS o See St ING IO US RE SS 80 AC BS Gil 3 RR 6 3 g2 DE SS BS FE XSE 84 OF 100 Soe IRR Ze io 86 SI EL ils AC SS 88 FE XSE 89 ORAS 90 e SD AC SS SE FE XSE SIS OF 50 94 RR 6 4 95 Ae Ss 96 PN 2 So FE BM 28E PDSSPR TN PP EES EE 100 ST OREO DOL O s 62 OZ AC BS 103 RR 6 87 104 ST 11500 105 ACESS 106 FE XSE QA Ok 0 108 AR LOS ACESS TILOS RE BESS Bi Til OSEAS Wig EE ToS Lis INGESS LA PECASE LIS 07500 dikes Ee oO TAS INOS LIS TESASH LAs Er 120 IRSA IAs MOSS TEA FELXSE Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 25 AS 6 124 WA Sc AGA E LEAS c 129 6 LSO Sil ZE 1336 134 LSS Ee LSTo SSP TSO 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 po toh ics Ciya al ge Teal dae te by EU dp dye 9 das 4c3 350 ES GE SSMH SANITARY SEWERE MANHOLE roo PEG oat 200
25. Field Description S 3 The data field length followed by a space maximum value of 25 with a range of 1 to 25 2 Nee value of 3 999 with a range of 0 to 3 999 Ending Station Y N The prompt name followed by a comma EE maximum of 37 characters YES The area between the comma and the carriage return line feed is reserved for the default response to the prompt maximum of 25 characters lt ENTER gt A carriage return line feed must be present at the end of each line Each data tag has its own coding scheme This allows some data tags to accept alphanumeric data while others accept only yes no answers or numeric data The coding scheme is set up like this The Data Type This code Accepts this response lo Data for this tag is alphanumeric data Data for this tag is numeric data Data for this tag must be YES or NO Numeric data for this tag increments each time the data item is used xxx represents the incrementing factor The Data Type Incrementing Factor Currently the data tags Chain Number CH and Point Number PN allow the user to set the incrementing factor desired for the point numbers assigned The three digits to the right of the decimal for codes beginning with a 3 represent the incrementing factor The incrementing factor can be set to any number from 001 to 999 For example Incrementing factor Effect 3 001 Point number increments by one 1 2 3 3 002 Point number increments by two 2
26. IT name NM observer OB recorder RE instrument serial number SN temperature TE time TM weather WE The saved project PRJ file will list the same data tags but will also include many of the configuration parameters listed in the configuration files This includes combination factor CF first location control file L1 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 1 SDMS Tasks and Activities Activity Data Items second location control file L2 rod type RT first staking file S1 second staking file S2 units of angles UA units of length UL units of pressure UP units of temperature UT and the version of data collector software VR The beginning occupied station is a required activity It signals the beginning of computational data All survey shots preceding this activity are ignored during computations The data used in AC OS this activity are YC XC ZC and IH The YC Occupied Station XC and ZC for the first occupied station are needed for computations If not entered SDMS Collector assumes 0 as the default values for Live computations for batch computations SDMS Collector will look for these needed values first in the data file then in an active CTL file and finally prompt the user if not found Station resection activities can also be used to solve the station coordinates ZC is required only for elevation computations If elevations are not required
27. ORE OTE RR 68 AC 69 OBS OR RR yl AC EC OER We RR 74 AC WSs RR We St ER AC SE OF USE RR 80 AC Ee RR E AC oe RR 84 AC SSE OF 86 RR ET SES 88 AC soe OR 30 RR SE ACs SES Ors oon RR 94 AC loys BNE SE BDE Mis RR JBE ST Su OF LOOP a KE RRS LOA INGE LOS Sirs 104 AC LOS g s MOG ARE WOW IGS WO Olds LOS RRE LO ICS ss Ba ag Vig ERs Wis INGE EE Ne Ee EE ISA OS PO Ej LLO AS Ds E 1 St ASAS ES DN 125 PD 126 RR 127 AC 128 PN T29 PD 130 RR L3L AC LIZ PN TSS PD 134 RR 1S6 ZC 136 CP 0 4 2 SS AS So SS 5 0 390 BS Val VBE SS 75 S TR S BS GaS SS AMOO DES EL SS 25 De SS 50 6 4 ES 2 SIP ICN TEMS odes 10 80 SS BS 6 87 sT 11400 SS 0 od SS 43 Tots SS 00 To SS 25 SeA ST 11433 SS 9 6 83 2200 EESO UE 220i 24 VCP NW Pose UE SAWS SSG INC 214 84 S IS T3 DOT 8242 STE 1301242 N08 237 OS ior 43k 3 7 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix 12 48 Appendix Computed Cross Section Example Saved As A Control CTL File E AC PR 2 NM JOB TRAVEXAM 3 ID STATE HWY 1136 4 CM CONTROL FILE ois DT 03 26 1998 6 HD NAD 83 1996 Any SDMS compliant data 7 VD NAVD 88 tags may follow the AC PR oe UL F SE ZN 4802 LOs AC 05S dak PAN Sal JS Se E XE 14 ESRA SS bga PD DOT 8241 Le RESES AS PN 2 Loe YEE TOR XER Zb ADO OS Za EIDA ALIN ER
28. Project file for Creating a Gap In the project file to create the gap between PN 16 and PN 23 shown in Figure 6 3 the shot at PN 16 would contain the line FG 1 G along with the feature code FE EPL This information tells SDMS Processor to break the connection between PN 16 and PN 23 which in this case is the next point with the same figure code Then the figure is to continue once past the break based on the other points listed The project file will have the point information and will indicate how the chain is to be created AC SS PN 10 FE EEL CD LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE FG 1 SHNS 12145 2358 VT 90 3045 OF DS 100 44 LOR ACESS dd PN 14 MAINA BWNE 126 PEEP I dE GRE 14 SO LS EOS OS 16 VT 90 3006 I DS 150 94 ES AC SS 19 st E AW o E EE St Meg dl Ge SH 5 ZST HZ 56 2853 24 VETO 30 016 Zoe DS 180 94 ZO AC SS Zale ENS LO Zor FE BEL oo FG 1 G Place a gap in the chain starting at PN 16 30 Sites and ending at the next point shot Sila PASSY ZASS 327 VT 90 3006 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 66 Appendix SEH DS 195 94 34 AC SS Bion EI Gap ends at the next point shot PN 23 So FE EPL the figure will then continue SES Meg dl SEI SH 5 395 EE 40 VT 89 1642 41 DS 210 24 42 AC SS 43 PN 24 44 FETEPL 45 FG 1 46 VAG Soro Sam 47 VT 90 1432 48 DS 190 28 49 AC SS 50 PN 25 Ss PERSAS SC FG 1 DSc ELAS BO SSL 54 VT 89 1642 Doe DS 180 24 EG
29. Prompting Data Tags During data collection SDMS Collector prompts the user using data tags one after another and lets the user enter responses in the data fields The data tags and the order they will be presented to the user are determined by the prompt sequences For many common surveying tasks and activities SDMS Collector provides a default definition which specifies for each type of task which activities are can be used and for each activity which data tags will be used and in what order This default definition is used by SDMS Collector as the default prompt sequence The default prompt sequence is defined in the TASK TGS file The prompt sequences can be modified or even deleted by the user See Appendix for the default TASK TGS file In addition to the default prompt sequences found in TASK TGS the users can create and use their own prompt sequences called user shot sequences Such shot sequences are discussed in detail in Chapter 5 User Shot Sequences While in a preset prompt sequence the user can also choose to insert any data tag they want by moving the cursor under the next data tag in the default sequence and overwriting the data tag with any other valid data tag For example when SDMS Collector starts a new activity by prompting the activity tag AC and a two character activity identifier the user can overwrite the AC data tag with another one and add the data to the previous activity If the user overwrites the prompt
30. Sequence then press lt ENTER gt SDMS Collector retains the name of the last used sequence file name in the file name prompt so pressing lt ENTER gt automatically selects that sequence for use Calling the Same Sequence While using a sequence do not try to call the same sequence again as a next level sequence Doing so results in the harmless error message file name SEQ Already in Use Try Another Finish the original sequence and then call it in again or try another sequence Deleting Shots or Stations from a Sequence To delete a shot in the sequence enter the DL SH data tag before beginning the next shot This deletes all data back to the most recent AC data tag To delete a station in the sequence enter the DL ST data tag before beginning the next shot This deletes all data back to the most recent AC OS data tag Ending a Sequence with AC CK AC CK allows the user to stop a sequence to make a decision without making an entry to the PRJ file For example the user can create a one activity or shot sequence and end it with AC CK When the user sees this they can decide to call another sequence go back and repeat the previous shot in the sequence using PgUp or exit the sequence by pressing lt Enter gt Sequences and Point Numbering Schemes Developing point numbering schemes requires good management practices Good systems for backing up data files using file naming conventions and planning out projects in advan
31. Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 6 Appendix Data Tag Description often used in inspection surveys CO County used to record the county where the survey took place CP Close Project closes a project and indicates that it is finished Any user response may be given It is used to indicate the user s intent that the project is complete and is not to be continued CR Curvature and Refraction indicates with a Y or N whether the project data should be corrected for the Earth s curvature and atmospheric refraction CS Coordinate System used in a project or control file to indicate the coordinate system used as the basis of the point coordinates found in that file Examples State Plane Coordinate systems County Coordinate systems local coordinate systems D1 config Data Word Length when used in the IO CFG file designates the serial communications word length in bits 7 or 8 DA Deflection Angle used to record deflection angles at PI points for computation of a horizontal alignment The deflection angle is defined by extending the back tangent direction ahead of the PI and measuring the subtended angle and recording this angle in DDD MMSSSS format An angle left is indicated by preceding the angle with a negative sign in front of the DDD MMSSSS An angle right is positive and no sign is required NOTE In the current release of SDMS Collector and SDMS Processor DA is used for informat
32. Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 7 6 The Editor Note The lt F3 gt Save and lt F4 gt Exit file operations functions do not appear if overwrite protection is turned on OP Yes in the system configuration file Overwrite Protection The user cannot overwrite files if the overwrite protection toggle is turned on OP Yes in the system configuration file This means the user cannot save the edited file to the same file name Instead the edited file must be saved to a new file name using a file extension such as EDI OP Yes also prevents the user from editing the current project file during data collection although the wer may view it in the editor This function makes sure the raw project file PRJ remains as collected in the field which may be important for legal reasons Abandoning the Edits Combining Files If the user wants to discard all of the changes to the file press lt Esc gt SDMS Collector prompts OK to Lose Edits Yes No e Typea Y to lose edits SDMS Collector returns to starting point either the main menu or project mode e TypeanN to continue editing Position the cursor on the line below which to insert the new file Press the lt F5 gt File key Next press the lt F1 gt Read key SDMS Collector asks the name of the file to insert Enter the file name press lt ENTER gt 5 SDMS Collector inserts the new file into the edit file Pen Printing a File Within Editing 1 Turn
33. Type OS over FS to select the occupied station activity Press lt ENTER gt to accept point number 35 PD CTRL PT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point description CTRL PT TH 5 45 Change the instrument height to 4 9 SH 4 84 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested staff height 4 84 AC BS SDMS Collector suggests a backsight activity But before taking the backsight the closing Northing coordinate must be entered Back up to the A in AC and type YC to manually select the Northing coordinate data item but don t press lt ENTER gt yet Type the closing Northing coordinate 78484 989 N Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 11 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments AC BS SDMS Collector again suggests a backsight activity But before taking the backsight the closing Easting coordinate must be entered Back up to the A in AC and type XC to manually select the Easting coordinate data item but don t press lt ENTER gt yet Type the closing Easting coordinate 855651 863 AC BS Press lt ENTER gt to accept suggested backsight shot activity PN 103 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point number 103 PD CTRL PT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point description Type 0 to zero the backsight Type 88 4950 Type 1228 112 AC BS Type ES over BS to select the foresight activity PN 36 Press lt ENTER gt to accept incremented point number 36 PD CTRL PT Press
34. Wee Kooy SS lion Onl Se ey IN HBO INES AC SES VCE xe AC SES YOS xe RA PT OS EH 399099 256345 1287570 442257 OS PI EE 1287221 448369 IL TS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 40 Ms LS 14 LS 16 va a FS 20 Bailie Dake 237 24 USE Ao GT 28 29 SO Sim Bc Sse 34 Se EE Sie oer Se 40 41 42 43 44 SE 46 47 48 49 90 Silo 525 SS 54 De S67 STe Doe 59e 60 61 524 GSS 64 63 66 67 AC SEA SI vie XO AC E SI LOS KOS 2864 789000 AC ERE SI SAOR RCI AC ER SI YG ZE AC SES ASIS AES 22819 116600 AC SRE SI MES XC POVAS S TENONO AC SE SI IOS KES AC SI YG xe AC CRE SI OS DA 13729 578000 AC Sale IOS XC 2864 789000 AC SEA SI YGS RE e El AC SEF MES XCe OS 399699 523000 1282267 595000 OS 400968 442332 1280713 148696 OS 401978 547000 1280247 466000 OS 402939 008427 1279804 669808 NAO 310 00 OS Pall 405025 138463 1277994 204798 OS 406667 042806 IO SS SON OS AMES NODOS 1274103 039958 SLI O 12000 OS ADAL 411965 563000 1273294 969000 OS 413853 236303 271498 021412 OS ISO 418302 515668 1270939 849402 OS 421062 045789 1271206 875130 OS EAT 421899 816000 TALES TELON Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix 12 41 Appendix Traverse Task TK TRA E
35. ZC can be omitted from the activity sequence Continue with project data until a point of known elevation can be observed from an occupied station If this point is not the backsight shoot this point with an elevation control activity AC EC to update the missing elevations back to the beginning occupied station The IH initializes the instrument height value for the project This data item is assumed to be 0 if not entered into the PRJ file The first backsight activity is used with the beginning occupied station activity to establish initial station orientation and the initial reference AC BS angle The backsight activity is a required activity Backsight unless station location is to be calculated by station resection The backsight azimuth is determined by entering XC and YC values or AZ XC and YC data items are used to compute the backsight azimuth If both the coordinates and an azimuth are entered SDMS Collector uses only the azimuth The azimuth direction is entered as if sighting from the Occupied Station toward the Backsight If neither coordinates nor an azimuth are entered in the backsight an azimuth of zero is assumed HZ VT and DS data items use numeric values to represent the measurements from the occupied station to the backsight point If the horizontal measurement data is not present a horizontal reference angle of is assumed The SH is the staff height for the backsight point and it initializes t
36. computed measurement data for the current active stakeout screen lt Esc gt Backs up one screen and no displayed data a will be used The data displayed on the HVD Data Entry screen is as follows HZ Input by user VT Input by user DS Input by user Alignment Control Stakeout Screen The Stakeout Alignment Control screen shown in Figure 610 is accessed from the Orientation screen and the Shot Inverse screen by pressing lt F2 gt Stak Based on the occupied station data entered on the Orientation screen and the files named in the project control configuration CNTL CFG the user can use this screen to stake points using the options listed in the Entering Stakeout Data section above Align cntl stakeout AC SS PN vO 0 ST 67 78 580 OF 32 2197 DZ FE ZC 251 4693 HZ 37 1041 SH 5 8 DH 781 4461 Meas NewP YX Data save Rec OR Figure 6 10 The Alignment Control Stakeout Screen Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 12 Computations The data for the point to be staked will normally come from primary or secondary staking control files S1 or S2 The user can use the point number PN station and offset ST and OF or station and feature ST and FE to specify which point in the locate file is to be staked out This data must be stored with the point number in the secondary stakeout control file to use this function The XC and YC values can be displayed for the point by pressing
37. define the project name and task A project file must contain at minimum the following main data items Data ltem Description PR The PR data item is the first data item encountered in the project file It takes its value from the actual project filename REQUIRED TK The TK data item is the second data item encountered in the project file It defines the type of survey project contained in the file This assures that during processing a cross section project will not be confused with a traverse for example REQUIRED Presently ten tasks are supported in the data structure See Section 4 Task and Activity Definitions for details AC PR The AC PR is the first activity within a PRJ file There are an unlimited number of data items related to the project that can be entered within this activity This activity is optional for the user however even f the user does not include this activity manually the data collector will add this activity and certain project settings when the PRJ file is suspended or closed for the first time Project configuration items such as CR CF UL UA UT UP and VR will be added automatically In addition the data tag and names of any active control and alignment files will also be added AC OS For computational purposes survey shots before the first AC OS in the project file are disregarded during processing The AC OS is followed by the data items for the occupied station point number
38. e Reduced coding means fewer errors or omissions in data collection e Less training is required when the user can plan a working schematic of the project ahead of time e The user can use multiple rod persons to complete projects more quickly Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 5 1 User Shot Sequences Sequence Files Shot sequences are kept in individual files with the file name extension SEQ The user may keep as many sequence files in the computer as space allows Sequence files are in the ASCII file format and use the same file structure as SDMS project and control files The user can create and edit sequence files with the SDMS Collector editor Required Data for Sequences In order to process data files correctly SDMS imposes a few rules about constructing a sequence These rules center around which activities and data items must be in a project file and the order in which a few of them must appear The task data tag TK in the project file defines the type of task This tells the post processing software which rules to use to compute the file The activities allowed in the specific task are defined in the TASK TGS file When a user shot sequence is built and used for a specific project only the activities in the specific task can be used The users can change the definitions in the TASK TGS file for their needs Note Although the user can customize the definitions of tasks and activities in TASK TGS file there can be
39. gl B2 5o 54 Se Se Bike 58 597 60 St 62 638 64 GS 66 67 68 D r HOR R HQ 110 po da E Le TO wa ongmggngomsaoobaompgomsagoom bg UGARTE ZAC 10h tal SO OS 3 60 20 Oa GE 4 00 20 E OS 14 45 0 KORTO SSS 5 00 20 SOMON SS 6 00 20 e 18 S IS 3 WWALL USGS 81M 1964 SE BASIS asia leen TOSSUN Examples Computed Profile Example Saved As A Control CTL File Coie s TES E e ME E oE a S D AO SE PererePRPRPRRPRR ONIHDUBWNHEO AC PNG 105 al VCH XC GE RDS AC PN DIN das USGS 81L 1964 ES 2 YE xO USE BIDS AC PN Zo ORONS SER EN PE FS 2 08 ASE AGS FE 233 860 WWALL USGS 81M 1 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 30 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Overview The Appendix gives quick reference to various parts of SDMS Collector e Set up of total stations The SDMS Collector file naming conventions The SDMS Collector program files Tasks Activities Data tags Default task and activity definitions Default help file listings Default of configuration file listings Sample Project Files The file structure of control files The file structure of alignment files The file structure of the superelevation file Defining Connectivity using SDMS General Rules of SDMS Set Up of Total Stations The total station must be correctly set up to communicate with SDMS These communicatio
40. in control configuration CNTL CFG SDMS Collector will verify the information required to perform the stakeout functions is present When SDMS is started the system will e Check for control files named e Read the geometric definition of the horizontal alignment based on the PI definition from an alignment file ALI provided by an external source for Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 5 Computations example information from a CADD system The alignment file supports angle deflection points simple curves compound and reverse curves spirals and station equations e Read the geometric definition of the profile vertical alignment from a profile file PRO provided by an external source The profile file definition supports profiles with symmetrical and asymmetrical vertical curves e Read the superelevation transition specifications from a superelevation file SUP provided by an external source The superelevation file defines the left and right side slopes at each transition station If any of these files are missing SDMS Collector will display an error message stating which file is not found The name of the file is only restricted to DOS naming conventions the extension is what SDMS Collector is looking for If only control point staking is desired the horizontal alignment file name in the control configuration lt F4 gt must be empty SDMS Collector uses the control files horizontal alignment profile
41. included in the chain activity at PN 41 Sixth point generated by the offsets being included in the chain activity at PN 42 Seventh point generated by the offsets being included in the chain activity at PN 31 Eighth point generated by the offsets being included in the chain activity at PN 32 OR 40 41 42 50000 50007 End Chain List CILT L999 MILLSE LE The first chain listed in the calculated file would have been generated from the field shots on the points The second chain would have been generated by the designated offsets New points were also generated to represent the calculated positions The user can edit the chains listed and also create additional chains during the post processing phase This can be done by manually editing an existing chain or by making a new chain list in the project file If edits or new chains are introduced the file must be reprocessed The post processing software would Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 99 Appendix need to review the entire file to check for any edited or added chains The points generated would then be listed in the required format All of the chains created using the parallel chain function will be listed at the end of the calculated file in the AC CH format along with the other chains created in the project file How Points Are Created for a Parallel Chain The points that will need to be computed to create the parallel chain will depend on the configu
42. key and the letter key with which the macro is named If the macro has a pause in it the macro stops at the pause instruction so the user can manually type information before resuming the macro The computer sounds a low pitched tone on each keystroke to indicate that the user is typing during a macro pause When the user finishes typing enter the lt CTRL gt P Pause command again to resume the macro SDMS Collector aborts the macro if it encounters an error An error can be anything from a system error to simply having a keystroke in the macro that does not fit the keys available at that level of the macro Display the Macro Comment Tips on Using Macros 1 The macro comment can be displayed while the user is executing the macro Press lt Alt gt lt gt during a pause instruction to display the comment The user can make SDMS Collector display the comment for any macro by first pressing lt Alt gt and lt gt simultaneously then press the lt macro letter gt For example to display the macro named K simultaneously press lt Alt gt lt gt then press lt K gt Be sure to keep information about the macro such as its intent and at which point in the program it can be called etc 2 The user can get a directory of the macros with the lt F1 gt Directory key Since all macros have the file name extension MAC enter MAC as the file name specification when looking through the directory for macros Suggestions for Using
43. lt F3 gt X_Y_ as shown in Figure 6 11 The F3 menu key will then toggle to StOf The XC and YC will be displayed for points until F3 is pressed again Align cntl stakeout AC SS PN vo 0 YC 582964 1687 LO 0 0532 XC 1920172 449 RO 0 0431 FE DZ 0 256 ZC 251 4693 HZ 37 1041 SH 5 8 DH 781 4461 Meas NewP stof Data Save Re c OR__ Figure 6 11 Alignment Control Stakeout Screen toggled to display XC and YC If there is an active horizontal alignment file the manually entered station ST and offset OF and elevation ZC if known are are used to locate the point If a vertical alignment file is active the elevation ZC will be computed based on that profile alignment If a superelevation file is active the elevation of offset points will be will be based on the superelevation data If there is an active horizontal alignment file and a point number PN is entered from the active stake out control files S1 and S2 in the control configuration the ST and OF displayed with the point will be computed from the coordinates in the control file based on the named horizontal alignment If there is no vertical alignment file named or no elevation ZC is entered no vertical data will be computed for stake out Note Data from the L1 L2 or WC control files can be used by entering a comma after the point number followed by the control file tag into which the point is stored e g 1 L1 or 100 WC Th
44. lt F5 gt Print From project mode press lt F7 gt Function then lt F4 gt I O and finally lt F5 gt Print SDMS Collector prompts the user to name a file to print The user may use lt F1 gt Directory to view a directory before entering a file name The user may also select a file from the displayed directory From edit mode position the cursor at the point in the file where printing is to begin Press lt F4 gt Print SDMS Collector prints the file being edited from the cursor position to the end of the file then returns to the edit mode Always print default and original files before editing Printed copies are useful for documentation or may be used as an editing road map Naming the Print Device User can name any of the following print devices under the PD data tag in the system configuration This name Identifies this port COM1 Serial printer on the COM serial port Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 8 4 Disk Management and Communication This name Identifies this port COM2 Serial printer on the COM2 serial port LPT1 Parallel printer on the first parallel port LPT2 Parallel printer on the second parallel port How to Print from Project Mode 1 From the main menu press lt F4 gt I O and then lt F5 gt Print 2 From project mode press lt F7 gt Functions then lt F4 gt I O then lt F5 gt Print 3 SDMS Collector prompts the user to name a file to print User may use lt F1 gt Di
45. name of a building etc NS Number of Shots can be used by the post processing software to indicate the number of shots that have been taken on a point from the same station NS config New Project Sequence when used in the PROJECT CFG file designates the name of the sequence file to automatically execute when starting a new project OA config Overwrite Append when used in the SYS CFG file O indicates that current data overwrites existing files and A indicates that current data is appended to existing files OB Observer used to record the name or initials of the observer on the survey crew OD Origin Destination Point Number provides a method of defining chain connectivity When shooting points on a chain it defines the identification number of the next point to be connected to in that chain OF Offset used when the target can not be placed directly on the point being measured but is placed to the left or right of the point A perpendicular offset to the left of the point in the line of sight when facing the point from the instrument is entered as a negative value Used in the profile and cross section tasks and in stake out computations to define the distance right of left of the specified alignment a shot represents OO Offset Computed used to record the computed offset of a point relative to an alignment when the point was measured by radial setup OP config Overwrite Protecti
46. tie sequence and project header Task TK PHO The photo control task is used to tie aerial survey control work into ground control work The photo control task uses all of the activities of the combined task The significant difference between the photo control and combined tasks is the functional use of the sideshot The photo control task assumes that any sideshot activity is used only for picture points All other activities are used as defined for the comb ined task The advantage of having a separate Task for this type of survey is that the appropriate measurement and descriptive data elements can be predefined in the task definition file The Terrain Model Task TK TMO The terrain modeling task picks up break lines and surface points for terrain modeling The terrain modeling task can use all of the activities of the combined task Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 7 SDMS Tasks and Activities The significant difference between the terrain modeling and combined tasks is the functional use of the sideshot The terrain modeling task assumes that any sideshot activity is used only for break lines and surface points All other activities are used as defined for the combined task The advantage of having a separate Task for this type of survey is that the appropriate measurement and descriptive data elements can be predefined in the task definition file Vertical Tasks SDMS vertical tasks are differential leveling tasks
47. to select the file or press lt Esc gt to exit file selection The lt F1 gt Directory key may also be used to view a directory from which to pick a file A typical SDMS Collector file name prompt is shown in Figure 2 15 Ins Cop C ASDHSAPRIA iS A SS Es Figure 2 15 The File name Prompt Viewing a Directory To pick a file from a directory press lt F1 gt Directory at the file name prompt Change the path and use wildcards to narrow the list before pressing lt F1 gt Directory When SDMS Collector displays the correct path press lt ENTER gt When SDMS Collector displays a directory Figure 2 16 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 21 SDMS Collector System Basics e Select a file by moving the cursor to the file name and pressing lt ENTER gt Use the lt T gt or lt gt and Page Up or Page Down to move the cursor to a file name or directory entry e View the parent directory by pressing lt ENTER gt or lt DIR gt e View another directory by pressing lt ENTER gt on the directory name e Name a new directory to view by pressing lt F1 gt Directory and entering a new path specification use wildcards in the path specification if desired e Press lt Esc gt to exit without selecting a file C SDMS SEQ lt DIR gt 10 24 96 EN SEU 197 11 22 95 11 20 ROADS SEQ 215 10 06 94 9 24p POB SEQ 84 11 27 95 2 09p NEWPR SEQ 62 11 27 95 1 38p BOBBY SE 88 12 11 95 9 18
48. u cccssssssssscsssssssessssnssssnssnsnssnssesessessssessssessesessssssssssssscsssscsssseesencessnconssconsassnssssosassesaseos 6 1 TROLERANCES IN COMPUTATIONS ee rd NN ENEE Stadia AAN AE AAA AN Res Ll A de USING CONTROL FILES WITH COMPUTATIONS USING COMBINATION FACTOR CF WITH COMPUTATIONS EN 6 3 EVT IS ER KEN CG 6 3 THE 2D AND 3D COMPUTATIONS AND STAKE OUT POUNGCTIONS 6 5 Entering Stakeout Data The Orientation Aecreen Shot Inverse Aecreen Vertical Horizontal Ratio Computations Hierarchy BATCH COMPUTATIONS ccccsccsscsscsscssessessesscessesesceseeseeseeseesesseseesecaecseenaeea Computation Results A OEN The Finished Write Control File Basic Rules of Batch Computations START DD NE NIE EEE E E E 7 1 HOW to Sele O SUBAN NO 7 1 Hontoria Na 7 2 The Edit Sereen EDITING FILES Keys Used in Editing Changing Dateien eegene Eegeregie Ee Husa TURE EER TOSCA BAM ENEE Clearing a Lite Deleting a Lien Inserting Characters e Dele naar iaa Usinge lt F6 gt Eiere eerst eegener Recording the Edit The Recall Buffer The Search Function ENDING EDITING ireren i SEELEN Overwrite Protection ai apa Abandoning the EditS Combining Hilee PRINTING A FILE WITHIN EDITING CHAPTER8 DISK MANAGEMENT AND COMMUNICATION emociones S L DISK MANAGEMENT EE 8 1 The Disk Operations Men E acid 8 1 Selecting Eileen The File Request Prompt Viewing a Director Specifying ET Marking Files In the
49. used to record the width of a surveyed object such as a box culvert WE Weather used to record user defined weather condition description WI Witness Description used to record information about a witness or accessory points XC X Coordinate Known used to record a known X coordinate value for a point XC config Cross Section Closure Tolerance when used in the TOL CFG file defines the profile and cross section closure tolerance value XX X Coordinate Computed used to record a computed X coordinate value for a point in a calculated project file YC Y Coordinate Known used to record a known Y coordinate value for a point YY Y Coordinate Computed used to record a computed Y coordinate for a point in a calculated project file ZC Z Coordinate Known used to record a known elevation for a point ZN Zone used to record the projection or state plane zone for Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 17 Data Tag LLE Appendix Description the project coordinate system Z Coordinate Computed used to record a computed elevation for a point in a calculated project file Tasks Default Prompt Sequences The following tables list the default Activity and Dita Items listed in the TASK TGS file provided with SDMS Collector program Traverse Task TRA Activity AC OS AC BS AC FS AC EC AC CC AC SI AC TS AC PR AC CK PN AC TX Default Data Tags PN PN PN PN PN PN
50. 2 18 Manually select the stationing data tag to input the stationing of the foresight point Back up to the A in AC and type ST but do not press lt ENTER gt ST 10 50 AC FS Manually select the offset data tag to input the offset of the foresight point Back up to the A in AC and type OF but do not press lt ENTER gt OF 50 AC FS AC BS ST 10 80 AC ST FE BM Press lt Ctrl gt lt L gt to clear the line then press lt ENTER gt OF 50 Type in 0 Type 7 1 AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity FE XSE Epa EA AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 22 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments PD Press lt ENTER gt to accept the blank line AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity PD Press lt ENTER gt to accept the blank line AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity PD Press lt ENTER gt to accept the blank line RR gt Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity to pick up a manhole Change the feature to SSMH sanitary sewer manhole and press lt ENTER gt pe o lt ENTER gt PRR Si pee ss ee Manually select the point number data tag Back up to the A in AC and type PN but do not press lt ENTER gt PN 100 Type 200 Manually select the stationing data tag Back up to t
51. 55 VT 87 2649 Do DS 109 090 We ASS ES ISO oF FE EP2 10 HZ 266 1432 d MCK T25 DS 114 870 Sa ACESS 14 PN 14 EES FE EP1 qe USADAS ADS Se VT 87 4540 La DS E929 910 LS AC SS 20 ERR Sch FE EPF2 227 ASIS O16 Sih Zoe VT 87 4154 24 BS E 40 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 91 Appendix 25r ACS OS 26 BANAL adhe FE EP2 207 HZ 254 1241 GEI ME Sor DS 341 690 Sal ACHOS 225 IER BSE FE EP1 34 HZ 250 2943 Soe WARS aoe Sor DS 338 430 Sie ACSS GE PN 23 39 FE EP2 40 BWA Sovran OO 41 VG ae Poy 42 DS 414 940 43 ACASO 44 PN 26 45 FE EP1 46 HZ 249 1628 47 VT 88 0814 48 DS 400 230 49 O 50r CP 04 30 2001 21 13 26 Any number of chains may be in progress simultaneously The points on any one chain must be measured in order but not necessarily in a point number sequence working from one end of the chain to the other Side shots to single point features can be collected also In this case the post processing software has to recognize by the feature code used that the point being measured is not part of a chain This may require some type of lookup table to specify which feature code prefixes designate chains and which are used for individual points For example points with a feature code TREE FE TREE would normally not be connected in a chain The post processing software must finally generate the chain list using the chain activity AC CH to be added at the end
52. 7 SDMS Collector System Basics ZC XXXXXX XXX As above SI PI As above PD CM As above See the Appendix for an example of an alignment file based on the PI definition Defining Compound and Spiral Curves Combinations Compound and Reverse Curves Compound and reverse curves must be stored as a series on simple curves Compound and Reverse Curves Spiral Curves Combinations Compound and reverse curves must be stored as a series of simple curves All cases require the data tags AC SI XC and YC The SI tag must identify the point as a PI SI PI The XC and YC tags define the PI coordinates The additional tags and conditions needed for each combination case are described below Any tags encountered other than those described are ignored for computational purposes SCS curve with an entry spiral and exit spiral SRS an entry spiral and exit spiral with no curve The additional tags needed to define an SCS or SRS combination are S1 and S2 Tags S1 and S2 define the lengths of the entry and exit spirals respectively RA defines the curve radius which is also the ending radius of the entrance spiral and the beginning radius of the exit spiral If the sum of the deflection angles for he two spirals that are computed from the given spiral lengths and radius equal the total PI deflection angle a zero length curve between the spirals is assumed SC curve with an entry spiral only SR an entry spiral by its
53. 837 PD CTRL MON FE CIL AC BS PN 216 YC 2244 080 KOS 13879 SO ZC 439 460 PD CTRL MON BESCHE AGE PN 57 YC 2042 498 AI OS OL ZC 448 391 PD TBM FESCTL AC SS EES KE WSs E e E XC 473633 447 ZC 435 041 PD 24 MAPLE EESIR AC SS PN 1001 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Any SDMS compliant data tags may follow the AC PR 12 36 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Sil 522 SS 54 Doe Dios STs See 597 60 61 o2 O35 64 ca 66 67 68 697 VOF Tike Ve OS EI AC Pipes SSMH PE AC PN YGS RC GE EES KE AC INS AOS E GE DJS PET AC PN iG EC GE DIE ERZ AC ENS ASS 2408 AGS RO prs JEE 5 De 473517 274 429 667 SAN MH UE 1002 SOS ANS O Za 419 367 SAME O SS SS 1003 MOSES 56 472862 622 443 704 SE COR BLDG BU SS 1004 110967935 472889 227 446 421 NE COR BLDG BU UE 1005 MOSSOS 472889 227 IDAS NE COR BLDG ROOF BU Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix 12 37 Appendix Radial Cross Section Example Using The Radial Topography Task TK RTO Project PRJ File COCIDA CIA SINS PPP o tot Ab GAMO ek o On OO OU DD D D D DD DG ss vs vs RE ds BWWWWWWWWWWNNNNDNNNNNDNE LE EE E EE cl EA EL Ab LD SO AO OO ht Oe ANS ODA EE kb O TA LO DA OO O LY OT LA AOS SAS CO Ur D D D Ke UUPHHXK rd gg a e E GaGEqGQQ0ZWHOCO K He TOR eer IK x Q n j N TO
54. AC SS Zale ER GC PESER 297 HZ 249 1628 24 VT 88 0814 Desc DS 400 230 267 SISMO End Left Pavement Edge SE DEROS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 94 2r 298 SUE So E S36 34 397 EE Se 2390F 397 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 SOE Sila BAe S 54 PN EET HZ Kee DSi SI AC PN lays HZ MS DSS AC PINES ngak HZ DS HZ DS SI EE WAES AC BING KE YES 4 EP 266 1432 SSL 14 870 BE Begin Right Pavement Edge SS 5 EP EE 87 4154 95 240 Ss 6 EP 254 1241 So Silo 341 690 SS 17 EP LA ANDO as 414 940 JBE End Right Pavement Edge So TO KEKA 09 18 1999 18 46 43 Appendix Note The point numbers may be left out of the data collection file if the post processing software will assign them during processing This method requires that each chain be completed before another chain using the same feature code is started The points on any one chain must be collected in sequential order but not necessarily in point number sequence working from one end of the chain to the other The post processing software then generates the chain list using the chain activity AC CH and adds the data to the end of the calculated file and or PAC file The PAC File For Connectivity By Feature Code Using Shot Identification To Begin and End A Chain The shot sequence using connectivity by feature code and the shot identification data tag to be
55. ACHSS Ts PN 26 587 FETEPL os eel 60 HZ 41 2017 Oils WARSI Ss AGA 62 IDSs JE Aa 63 AUS 1999 ts The Calculated File for creating a gap The FG 1 G listed with the shot data for PN 16 tells SDMS Processor to place a gap in the chain FG 1 between PN 16 and PN 23 then continue the chain with the points shot having the same figure code The calculated file will have the computed point information and will show the chain created as AC SS PN 10 FE EPL CD LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE FG 1 SHKS HZ 45 2354 VT 90 3045 OF DS 100 44 dE XX FEH ital YY ER LZ tt tt 13 AC SS 14 PN 14 MIAO BWNE Sa Ere dy r Ech Ws SIS Sa HO 5 PALS SO IS WALES S10 SOO S SL SPA St XX FEH GE YY 29k ZZ FHEF 24 ACOS Ee BNEAES 2o HEEB ag inte 1 A O SiS GER HZ 56 2853 SOR VT 90 3006 Sule DS 180 94 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 67 B27 XX Zo Nave 34 ZZ aoe AC SO PN EAR FE 38 BG oon SE 40 HZ 41 IES 42 Si 43 XX 44 Nes 45 ZZ 46 AC 47 PMS 48 FE 49 EG 507 SH Sie HZ 52 WAS De DSE 54 XXe ici Ke SE ZZ Su ACR Dok PN 59 FE Sor EGE Sila HZ 627 WAR Ee DSE 64 XX Son EC 66 ZZ STs AC 68 PN 69 FE OS EGS CA HZ U2 Wire PS DS 74 XX WSs VANES GES ZZ TH AC Wiehe PN YD FE 80 FG ES HZ EECH IES 33 DS 84 XX she Woes 86 ZZ rhs CPs e BG CR AC 20 eo STE EE 2s CDE SE EES 94 EG Slew CER HEEF HEE
56. DS 180 94 Ker AC SS pS ANS 20 FE EPL ay TSE Close the chain created by FG 1 LS SHO on the first point in FG 1 Zh HOZ DS 24 VARS9 098 0 0 6 207 DS 180 94 207 EE The Calculated File for a Closed Chain using Figure Code The FG 1 C listed with the shot data for Point 21 tells the post processing software to close the chain FG 1 on PN 10 which is the first point in the chain The calculated file will have the computed point information and will show the chain created as d AC SS Pe PN 10 oa Jaye EPL 4 CD LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE SES SEL Ge HZ 45 2354 Pe VT 90 3045 8 DS 100 44 So XX Calculated X coordinate LO YY Calculated Y coordinate TIS ZZ Calculated Z coordinate Ws GSS ES PN 14 14 ERES LSe FG 1 de SEO E Be Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 63 18 ER GH St GE 23h 24 DD 26n AN o GEI SE SE sie 227 33 34 Soe Se Se SE SSi 40 41 42 43 ilies DS XX id ZZ AC PN EE HG SH ee oe WARS DSS WOKS Reyes ZZ YONG HZ EE BG AC EG FE CDs Palas EG ROLLA TPL Dee ALS CH Appendix 90 3006 180 94 d d Hada ss 2 EPL ie 5 90 3006 180 94 ESA 9 18 1999 18 46 43 egin Chain List H LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE Lye Y al End Chain List Closed Chains Using OD The OD data item can also be used to close a figure by inserting the point number that is to be closed upon as the response to
57. Figure 2 5 Project Mode Menu at MIOC Functions available from the project mode menu at MIOC include The Functions Menu lt F1 gt Measure 1 or lt F2 gt Measure 2 as defined to take a quick shot see Chapter 3 Data Collection Basics for details on quick shots lt F3 gt Sequence to call a user shot sequence lt F7 gt Functions to access editing batch computations I O and disk operations or configurations lt F8 gt Live computation functions such as inverse and stake out information Change the displayed activity data field to select a new activity Overwrite the AC data tag to add a data item to the last activity lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt or lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to record a macro lt Esc gt to close or suspend the project The functions menu is accessed from project mode at MIOC by pressing lt F7 gt Functions The functions menu Figure 26 provides access to main menu functions in project mode Pick a Function FUNC Figure 2 6 The Functions Menu Functions available from the functions menu include lt F2 gt Edit to edit a data or sequence file lt F3 gt Computations to process a data file in batch mode lt F4 gt I O to access the I O operations menu lt F5 gt Disk to access the disk operations menu lt F7 gt Configurations to access the configurations menu lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt or lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to record a macro lt Esc gt to return to data collection Survey Data Management Sy
58. GM G but the Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 105 Appendix various third party processing software systems may treat this differently and may employ other interpretation rules and responses to define various situations Some processing software actually key the nature of a point off of the FE data field The reason for this is that 95 of the time if the Feature is known it is also known whether the point should be 2D or 3D If the surveyor needs to override this FE related definition of a point he may choose to use the CL data field after the FE data field to override the default for that FE 12 The FE and CL tags can also be used by processing software to define feature and class of other objects being measured and defined such as chains 13 SDMS allows the developer of processing software to assign their own rules for how point identifications are assigned One current processing tool merges the FE and PN data fields to form an alphanumeric point identification Therefore an AC SS with a PN 498 and a FE CULV would become CULV498 in the processing software Currently only numeric point numbers are supported in SDMS Collector These are just a few examples of how SDMS tags can be used to communicate more information to a processing software system Many similar rules can be established but they would need to be defined in the documentation for that tool and then communicated to the surveyor collecting the fiel
59. Get Point key when SDMS Collector prompts for the point number so the user does not have to enter the PN twice Select a Specific Point in the Location Control Files Type over the plus sign with a specific point number to retrieve data for that control point SDMS first looks in the named Ll control file for that point If it does not find the point there SDMS searches the L2 control file If SDMS does not find the desired point in either the L1 or L2 files it will display the message Point Not Found SDMS Collector does not automatically search the other control files for the point SDMS returns to the PN prompt The user can try again by pressing the lt F4 gt Get Point key Select a Specific Point in Other Control Files To have SDMS Collector search in one of the control files other than the first and second locate files use a comma and the corresponding control file data tag after the point number For example to search for point number 352 PN 352 in the write control file type Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 9 Data Collection Get PN 352 WC If SDMS does not find the point in the write control file it will display the message Point Not Found and return to the PN prompt Automatically Select the Next or Previous Point in the File Pressing lt ENTER gt on the plus sign in the Get PN prompt will let SDMS Collector automatically select the next point in the last used control file To use the previ
60. It currently runs on DOS based desktop and laptop computers and many of the DOS based hand held computers The software can communicate with a variety of total station instruments It can also be used as a generic alphanumeric Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 1 1 Introduction data collector when no measuring device is electronically interfaced SDMS Collector is a menu driven system that is easy to learn and easy to use while being flexible and comprehensive at the same time One of the hallmarks of SDMS Collector is that within the confines of the SDMS data structure the software is almost completely user definable A user can configure the system to prompt for a particular set of data items in any order that makes sense and is convenient for them SDMS Collector allows the user to define lists of responses to many of the prompts and displays them as pick lists This reduces the amount of hand entry of data required in the field The SDMS Collector Release 3 4 software also provides 3D stakeout functionality using horizontal and vertical design alignments and control information This makes SDMS Collector truly a field to office to field system A Complete Processing System Field survey data can be collected reviewed and edited in SDMS Collector But the capabilities of the system do not stop there SDMS Collector allows the user to compute coordinates in the field by using live computations SDMS Collector also provides se
61. Macros A macro can do anything that could also be done with manual keystrokes The user may have up to 26 macros one for each letter of the alphabet The following are two examples for using macros in everyday activities e Opening a new project e Copying project files for backup duplicating etc Controlling the Rate of Execution of a Macro The user can control the speed at which SDMS Collector executes the macro Macro speed is controlled by the macro Pause tag MP in the system configuration file See Chapter 9 Customizing SDMS Collector for information on setting this control Examples of Macros A Macro to Open a New Project 1 Begin at the main menu Press lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to begin recording the macro 2 Press the lt F1 gt Project key SDMS Collector displays a prompt to enter the project name The user probably will not use the same project name for each project Therefore a pause instruction could be inserted at the file name prompt with lt CTRL gt P Pause to allow entering a project name 3 Enter a project file name this can be a dummy file name for now When the user finishes use lt CTRL gt P Pause again to resume defining the macro then press lt ENTER gt Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 10 9 5 A Macro to Copy Projec 1 2 3 4 Getting Help and Using Macros Press lt ENTER gt or type a response for each prompt in the opening sequence that will remain constant Ent
62. Offset Direction DP Depth DS Distance Slope DT Date DV Distance Vertical DX Delta K Coordinate Press Esc to return Figure 10 1 Help on data tags The user can start the display further down in the help list by typing one or two characters in the data tag field before pressing lt gt For example if the user types an F in the data tag field and then presses lt gt SDMS Collector will start the display at the first data tag starting with the letter F as shown in Figure 10 2 PN 2 Face Number FE Feature FG Figure GH Geometry GR Group H1 Help Press Esc to return Figure 10 2 Data tags starting from F To begin at the top of the list clear the data tag characters before pressing lt gt SDMS Collector will display the first allowed response in the help file as shown in Figure 10 3 PN 2 Wild Card Insert a Sequence AG Attribute H A1 Attribute 1 A2 Attribute 2 A3 Attribute 3 Press Esc to return Figure 10 3 List of all data tags How to Use Help to Select a Data Tag When the user is not sure which data tag should be used one can be selected from the help list by using the procedure that follows 1 In project or edit mode press lt gt to display the data tag list 2 Use lt l gt and lt T gt to move through the list When the cursor is on the desired data tag press lt ENTER gt 3 To exit without selecting a data tag press lt Esc gt For example if the user
63. PI definition from an alignment file ALD provided by an external source for example information from a CADD system The alignment file supports angle deflection points simple curves compound and reverse curves spirals and station equations e Read the geometric definition of the profile vertical alignment from a profile file PRO provided by an external source The profile file definition supports profiles with symmetrical and asymmetrical vertical curves e Read the superelevation transition specifications from a superelevation file SUP provided by an external source The superelevation file defines the left and right side slopes at each transition station The stakeout functions are explained in detail in Chapter 6 Computations The first screen that appears after pressing lt F8 gt Stak is the orientation screen shown in Figure 2 7 Orientation AC 0S PN 708 AC BS PN ER YC 582341 5453 YC 582286 758 X2C 1919706 2223 2C 1919736 6625 ZG 251 7023 ZC 249 6681 PD SU Figure 2 7 The 2D 3D Stakeout Orientation Screen Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 17 The Edit Menu The Search Menu SDMS Collector System Basics The edit menu Figure 2 8 is accessed from e The main menu by pressing lt F2 gt Edit e Project mode at MIOC by pressing lt F7 gt Functions then lt F2 gt Edit Editing is explained in detail in Chapter 7 The Editor As MARK PRJ PR TEST CC TK RTO AC 0S
64. PRO The profile task is similar to the cross section except that each sideshot in a profile contains a stationing data item The offset is assumed to be zero unless otherwise specified with the offset data item OF The profile task is for picking up elevations along an alignment The required activities in a profile task are occupied station backsight and sideshot The optional activities are foresight turning point control check elevation control utility elevation and project header The sideshot activity is used to compute the elevation of the sideshot point along the alignment Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 14 SDMS Tasks and Activities Special Survey Procedures Station Resections Certain SDMS activities can be used to compute coordinates for specialized activities These include e Station resections e Perpendicular offsets to the right or left of an object Offsets in front of or behind an object Remote elevations Utility elevations Sideshot intersections Control Checks Connectivity using figure numbers chains taping etc When it is impossible to set up on a station point the station resection activity is used to establish coordinates for the occupied station Field procedures are as follows Note Resections are easier to perform if the known coordinates are stored in a control file for entry in the current project file using GET POINT 1 Occupy the station of unknown position in the u
65. Picola lk Ee AC CH RE FG 1002 Figure Code assigned by the post Bo FE FENCE processing software since not given 40 CD 6 CHAIN LINK FENCE 41 Si ANG 42 AG CH 43 FG 1003 Figure Code assigned by the post 44 FE FENCE processing software since not given 45 CD 6 CHAIN LINK FENCE Ae PL 16 17 47 AG RCE 48 FG 1002 Figure Code assigned by the post 49 FE FENCE processing software since not given 50 CD 6 CHAIN LINK FENCE 51 PL 17 23 52 TEREA DoE EG End Chain List 54 EIER SETS E Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 62 Appendix Creating Closed Chains There are three methods available to create a closed chain The first method closes the chain by inserting C after the Figure Code FG C The second method creates a closed chain by using the Origin Destination OD data tag as previously explained The third method creates a closed chain by using Activity Chain AC CH Closed Chains Using FG C When FG C is used within a shot activity the post processing software interprets this to mean that the user wants to connect the current shot to the first shot in the file that contains the same FG This effectively closes the chain that includes all the shots with FG For example AC SS PN 10 FE EPL CD LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE EG SHEO HZ 45 2354 RE OF DS 100 44 Oe 261 eet 0 JO OG GA b RA ZO Peter iy Ls med 14 SIS US EOS ZO D 16 VT 90 3006 Fa
66. S TESS 5 Og zao SS 24 VCP NW EE UE 3202 SS P20 ORC 214 84 SES SS BM DOT 8242 da SOIA OZI HE Examples The Computed Cross Section Example Saved As A Control CTL File Elte E Lotto to bo ton Ab GAMO CO AC PN Er xe ZC PD AC ENS EG XG ACS PD AC PN YACS AG AC PB AC PN XO xe AGs AEE AC PN MCR XC AGk DIS AC PN 608 EIS ACS ROS OS 2 AAA SOS DOT 8241 FS 2 1298 546 SSPK INEP SS 200 1298 586 SANITARY SEWERE MANHOLE UE E 1290 266 24 VCP NW UE 202 1283 746 Sne EE FS 3 1301 242 DOT 8242 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 26 Examples Profile Example The profile task TK PRO is a vertical differential leveling task Foresight Backsight RR 6 27 RR 5 19 Setup 1 PN 2 HI 241 843 PD SPK IN PP ST 12 60 OF 45 ST 8 60 ZC 235 57 RR 1 35 ST 13 60 ST 15 00 ST 10 00 l RR 4 26 de Se RR 6 01 ST ST 12 00 Se RR 2 15 RR 6 90 ST 16 00 ST 11 00 ST 13 00 ST 14 45 RR 5 75 B M RR 7 40 ST 12 20 RR 6 05 RR 6 10 RR 6 9 Occupied Station B M ee TT A l PD USGS 81L 1964 Setup 2 Foresight ZC 236 413 HI 240 763 Ge Back Sight ZC 233 860 RR 5 43 PD USGS 81M 1964 Displayed Instructions and Comments Choose a From the main menu press lt F1 gt Project to open a PRJ Enter Task TK task Type 236 413 AC BS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested backsight
67. Shot Note The AZ and BR displayed on the HVD data screen is based on the inverse from the occupied station to the catch point displayed on the Slope Stakeout screen Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 18 Computations Pressing lt F2 gt Prev will return the user to the Slope Stake Shot screen as shown in Figure 6 18 The computed values for LO RO and DZ will be displayed based on the point actually measured Slope Stake Shot m6 1 00 000 Beki OF 25 RO 0 0281 FE ZC DZ 2 5028 SH HZ 29 5904 VH 0 23999998 DH 103 769 Meas Prev data jRec_ for Figure 6 18 Slope Stake Shot Screen showing values for OO LO RO DZ computed from the shot When the point is staked out the user can use the lt F5 gt Save key to save the coordinate data for that point in the write control file The screen values for all the data items displayed can be saved to the record file REC by pressing lt F6 gt Rec Note VH will only display a value during the measurement process when the computed data will equal the station displayed for the hinge point At times it may not be possible to actually stake the point desired or the point shot may need to be saved for future use Pressing lt F4 gt Updt on the HVD data screen shown in Figure 6 17 will compute the values for the current shot then automatically return to the Stakeout Alignment Control screen and change the values of the data items displayed based on t
68. Sl OERO Bn Se 149 oe AC FS 84 PN 3 Eo PD WWALL USGS 86 PD 81M 1964 Ta RRA 88 EE SE G s 097 25 99 ek Computed Profile Example Saved As A Control CTL File dE AC PR D2 NM JOB TRAVEXAM 36 ID STATE HWY 1136 4 CM CONTROL FILE De DT 03 26 1998 Gi HD NAD 83 1996 Any SDMS compliant data We VD NAVD 88 tags may follow the AC PR ES UL M3 Ge ZN 4802 IO AC OS TS PANTS Al d MES LAS XO 14 EE 15 PD USGS 81L 1964 16 ACES d PNE2 St YE TOS XER o EE Flys ID SSI Tiet En SE AC FS Zee ER 24 YOR Zor xe Zor ZC 233 860 Dales PD WWALL USGS GE PD 81M 1964 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 51 Sample Control File NM Ly as aS 4 CME DR DIS Gs HDE SES VD GE Et OF ZN TOF AC AL PN LA KOR 13 MEg 14 ACE LS FE LS PD TE SKE LOL Bue GES Das 207 AC Alls PN Les SE 2O Kes 24 ZER Lise FE 267 BDH Abe Ore Le OF SE sx SOs SY iy SZ INGE TR PR JOB 001234 STATE HWY 1 HWY 71 CONTROL FILE 03 26 1998 NAD 83 1996 NAVD 88 M3 4802 os ik ANTE 759409 835 282 994 CONTROL 5 8 REBAR 0 005 0 005 0 02 os 2 EEN 759717 549 ST Ee CONTROL REBAR AND CAP 10 00 50 0 008 0 008 SORON Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix Optional but recommended Any SDMS compliant data tags may follow the AC PR Any SDMS descriptive data tags may added but none are required 12 52 Appendix Sample Hor
69. Stak Brings up the Stakeout Alignment Control screen lt F3 gt Slop Brings up the Slope Stakeout screen lt F5 gt Save Saves the data displayed or entered for the BS PN FE XC YC ZC to the Write Control WC file The data will be appended to the bottom of the file Checks for duplicate point numbers will be made lt F6 gt Rec Saves records the entire screen data as displayed to the Record REC file lt F7 gt Func Brings up the Project Function menu lt F8 gt Proj Return user to Project Mode Screen MIOC lt Esc gt Backs up one screen The data displayed on the orientation screen is as follows PN Value from CNTL CFG or input by user YC Value based on PN entered from CNTL CFG or input by user XC Value based on PN entered from CNTL CFG or input by user ZC Value based on PN entered from CNTL CFG or input by user PD Value based on PN entered from CNTL CFG or input by user TH Input by user or default 5 or 1 5 depending on UL F or UL M M2 M3 SH Input by user default 5 or 1 5 depending on UL F or UL M M2 M3 Shot Inverse Screen The Shot Inverse screen shown in Figure 6 8 is used to complete the orientation of the instrument and to compute the horizontal distance and azimuth bearing between the points listed on the Orientation Screen This screen is accessed from the Orientation screen by pressing lt F1 gt Shot This screen will display the azimuth AZ
70. Stakeout The function keys on the HVD Data screen Figure 6 17 perform the following lt F2 gt Prev Returns to the active stakeout screen lt F4 gt Updt Indicates the computed information based on the measurement is to replace the data currently on the active stakeout screen lt F6 gt Rec Saves records the entire screen data as displayed to the Record REC file lt F8 gt OR_ Return user to Orientation screen lt Esc gt Backs up one screen The data displayed on the Slope Stakeout HVD Data screen is as follows AZ Azimuth of the catch point entered on the active stakeout screen BR Bearing of the catch point entered on the active stakeout screen HZ Displays instrument measurement or the input by user on data entry screen VT Displays instrument measurement or the input by user on data entry screen DS Displays instrument measurement or the input by user on data entry screen SS Computed station based on the current shot point OO Computed offset based on the current shot point ZZ Computed elevation of the current shot point DZ The algebraic difference between the known elevation ZC the computed elevation ZZ plus the vertical offset VO That is ZC VO ZZ DH Horizontal distance from occupied station point to the current shot point Summary of Slope Staking Situations If any of the situations that follow occur the prism can be m
71. TE 28 Ka EE HOR OB K ADAMS SE RE K ADAMS 12 EE RE ES WE CLEAR 14 IRENE T5 Chal 16 LOLA S12 EY UA D 18 Ula 19 ESA 20 VR SDMS Collector 3 4 0 Sal AC 0S 22 PN 1 23 BONUS SESSION 24 400 CET 25 AC BS 26 REG 6229 Gel ACTIE 28 EROS 29 AC BS 30 RR 7 94 Sch ACES SE PN 2 3S JEE tee ASERS 34 EE 3o ACS BSS bee 36 CEBO 9 2 OSO 02 20 Computed Level Run Saved As A Control CTL File ye INGS D3 NM JOB LEVEXAM ke ID STATE HWY 1136 4 CM CONTROL FILE SES DT 03 26 1998 6 HD NAD 3 19903 SE VD NAVD 88 oe VIE OF ZN 4802 LOs DEROS TIE PN 1 Des MORO SO LS DUES SCH 1957 14 AC FS JS Ia La AGE 12S TE PD USGS 31E 1957 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Any SDMS compliant data tags may follow the AC PR Appendix 12 45 Appendix Three Wire Level Task TK 3WR Project PRJ File R 3WREXAM K 3WR GIP IR HWY 136 SOKKIA Bl 276428 KEE ELE SS GE EE B K ADAMS E K ADAMS EE RE WE CLEAR Ss HOA ODIAAOBWNHE DI OINHMAWNHEO Y D DOWH Sou PHY H H E E ASES ER LS WEA 207 VR SDMS Collector 3 4 0 SE ACIOS 22 PN 1 DS PD USCGS 3005A 24 ASNO IZ So AC BS BSc UL SZ Cae Coie RZ Ze ope E EE OR ACT SI A Sale R22 E SAE Ee 207 AC BS 34 Bled 222 So RAI OS Sion R3 1 485 Sve AC FS Bic PN 2 SOR PD USCGS 3005B 40 ULB SE 41 RAZON 42 R3 2 425 43 AC OS SSG 44 CP 08 24 95 09 04 23 Co
72. They always begin with an occupied station activity and a backsight activity to establish an elevation at the first instrument set up The tasks then may contain sideshot activities elevation control activities and or control check activities to compute or check elevations on other points visible from the set up To carry elevations forward a shot is taken on a turning point using either the turning point or foresight activity The instrument is moved to a new set up and a backsight is taken on the turning point The Three Wire Level Task TK 3WR The three wire level task is a control differential leveling task It collects three wire rod readings and carries elevation values through the survey The three wire level task performs basically the same function as a level run task but with a higher degree of precision by recording and averaging the top middle and bottom stadia wire readings for each shot The three wire readings used in conjunction with the stadia constant of the leveling instrument also allow the software to compute the distances between the leveling instrument and the backsight foresight or turning point Therefore the summation of the distances between the backsight and foresight distances can be computed and displayed to help the survey crew to keep the summation close to zero or balanced thus eliminating the effects of systematic instrument errors The activities used in the three wire level task are listed in the fol
73. a dE 20 Bie AC PN EES KRS OYES ZZ AC PINGS FEI KAT MACS ZZ AC BNE PFE SERIES Ss 10152 9848 498 4165 TA Assigned to all taped points in the AC TA ab XX YONGE ZZ SI PE SI TE XX MES ZZ SI PD 9 BU 0085 4876 0240 1582 RER ED 0 SU 0000 0000 10180 9330 498 4164 PD 100 PN assigned to the first taped point by the post processing software Ki HOUSE by the post processing software LED ON PN assigned to the next taped point by the post processing software HOUSE 10068 6824 10187 1534 501 6167 TA AC 2102 PN assigned to the next taped point by the PD post processing software HOUSE XXt SE ZZ 10090 3226 AO E 501 6167 TA AC EN PD 103 PN assigned to the next taped point by the post processing software HOUSE 10126 4909 10180 9743 501 6168 TA AC PN PH 104 PN assigned to the next taped point by the Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 76 Appendix post processing software 43 FE HOUSE 44 XX 10085 4884 45 Wave O 2A ORES Oi 46 ZZ 498 4170 47 SI TA 48 AC PD 49 PN 105 PN assigned to the last taped point by the post processing software 50 FE HOUSE Dile XX 9999 9998 527 SE GE ZZ 498 4172 54 BG BEGIN CHAIN LIST S5 AC CH INS FE HOUSE Dia HES DIS 37 oO O 101027 OS EE 597 EG END CHAIN LIST Note The list of points in a Points and Chain PAC file de
74. a point used as a turning point or to the closing point of the level run The turning AC FS point activity achieves the same effect but is not included in the final results when the file is sent to other systems In addition to PN and PD data items the foresight activity contains the RR data item to represent the rod reading when the rod is placed on the foresight point If the foresight is closing on a known elevation the ZC data item is used The sideshot activity is used to compute the offset and elevation of the sideshot point The station of the point is taken from the previous stationing Sideshot activity The sideshot activity contains O F and RR For the data field of the OF data item a positive offset value is entered for a shot to the right of the alignment a negative offset value is entered for shots to the left of the alignment AC SS An AC CC is a control check which would involve the software doing a comparison of the AC CC AC CC g point elevation against the computation of that Control Check point from the current PRJ file This would thus involve the SDMS Collector computations showing the delta Z DZ at this point Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 12 SDMS Tasks and Activities Activity Data Items The AC EC is a way to establish the correct elevation for the current setup Thus while i would do the same computation as the AC CC to AC EC establish the difference in elevation at that
75. activities can be included as well See the Appendix for the default task and activity listing A traverse can be balanced and adjusted in SDMS Collector PN 27 YC 80281 016 PN 27 CTRL PT PN 26 CTRL PT PD CTRL PT XC 853432 237 BEG STA BS ZC 448 2285 PN 26 YC 80101 427 PD CTRL PT XC 853960 738 PN 35 YC 78484 989 PN 101 TRAV PT PD CTRL PT XV 855651 863 OS a PN 36 CTRL PT AZM PN 35 gt PN 36 PD CTRL PT AZ 91 3352 PN 102 TRAV PT OS PN 103 TRAV PT OS PN 35 CTRL PT PN 36 CTRL PT END STA AZM FS Displayed Instructions and Comments Choose a From the main menu press lt F1 gt Project to open a Command project Type the project name TRAEXAM lt ENTER gt PRJ New Project Type TRA and press lt ENTER gt to select the traverse station activity PN 2 Type point number 27 over the suggested point number A aame A oe eseon ponar pe AAA lt ENTER gt Type the instrument height 5 2 and press lt ENTER gt SDMS Collector suggests a backsight activity But before taking the backsight the coordinates of the occupied station must be entered Back up to the A in AC and type YC to manually select the Northing coordinate data item but do not press lt ENTER gt yet YC Type the Northing coordinate 80281 016 and press lt ENTER gt Back up to the A in AC and type XC to manually select the Easting coordinate data item but don t press lt ENTER gt yet XC Type in the Easting coo
76. activity aR Type 5 43 and press lt ENTERS RR yess SSS AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity AC SS ST 8 60 Type 9 00 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the offset of 0 PRR Type 2 15 AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity AC SS RR IA AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity AC SS ST 10 00 Type 11 00 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 27 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments Press lt ENTER gt to accept the offset of O RR Type 7 4 AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity AC SS ST 11 00 Type 12 00 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the offset of 0 RR Type 7 0 AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity AC SS ST 12 00 Type 12 20 RRS Tyg o O PD USGS 81L Type SPK IN PP Use lt CTRL gt L to remove remaining 1964 part of old description IRR Type 6 27 foresight on spike turning point AC FS Manually select the stationing data tag to input the stationing Back up to the A in AC and type ST but don t press lt ENTER gt ST 12 20 Type 12 60 AC FS Manually select the offset data tag to input the offset Back up to the A in AC and type OF but don t press lt ENTER gt RR gt Mp eS el RR Type 6 03 AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity AC SS ST 13 00 Type 13 60 Press lt ENTER
77. any form without written permission of the publisher Printed in the United States of America REINART AT UEL H LAN 1 1 WELCOMETOSD MS id title e What Is Needed to Use SDMS Collector SDMS DOCUMENTATION SDMS USER MANUAL OVERVIEW Chapter ett EE Chapter 2 SDMS Collector System BASICS ranni koe EE KEE EEE NEEE ESEE E EE Eie Chapter 3 SDMS Tasks and Activiti S ocmm Chapter 4 Data Collection Chapter 5 User Shot Sequences Chapter D REI Ea Chapter Tee AA Eelere A aback a Chapter 8 Disk Management and Communication Chapter 9 Customizing SDMS Collector Chapter 10 Getting Help and Using Macros Chapter ALA Example eer CHAD FLD App sacan 1 5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUA Leica 1 6 CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUALE ENEE HOW TO INSTALL SDMS COLLPCTOR nono nocnncnnon non non nonncnnrnn nano HOW TO START AND EXIT SDMS COLLEPCTOR GENERAL RULES OF SDMS TASKS AND ACTIVITIES CHAPTER2 SDMS COLLECTOR SYSTEM BASICS ccssssssssscsssscessssssssssssessssssessssesscessesossesossessssessesessesessoes 2 1 SPMS DATA STRUCTURE EE Projects and Tasks ACHIVELY ici Dita KA 1 P AE A A A EET SDMS COLLECTOR BILE TYPES ei E E EEE E E EEA REES Prol bis Control A aaa SUDELELEVACON ES ic i Configuration Fils A Dionne Hr o oe Temporary Files osc tice Shes as a es acs a EE SE EET 2 13 SDMS FILE NAMING CONVENTION S rraren ro easet iaee seo dos ATES aE KEELE ii 2 13 THE SD
78. as the file extension for alignment files The 3D Stakeout functions REQUIRE the active alignment file to be based on the PI definition and an associated vertical alignment file and superelevation file must also be named The older PC PT defined horizontal alignments are not supported in this latest version of the SDMS Collector software The PI definition for horizontal alignments defines the coordinates for POT s and PIs stationing for the first POT and curvature elements for the key PI points Then SDMS Collector software uses the coordinates of the PI points along with the key curve and or spiral elements for each curve in the alignment for conversions between X Y coordinates and station offset values Note The PI Definition requires the inclusion of TY PI in the header of the alignment file The TY PI must appear after AC PR if present and before the first point or equation activity The first segment in an alignment file is shown in the following table Data Item Description AC PR All data before the first activity other than a project header activity is ignored The project header information is for documentation only However systems that read and write this file may need to know some of the information such as the metadata items for units datum coordinate systems combination factors etc Ultimately such information should be checked against the similar settings in the system reading this data and provide warning
79. as well as AC OS point number and description items The coordinates Occupied Station are needed for computations They can be entered in the field or in the office If not entered into the PRJ file SDMS Collector will first look in the active Locate control file to find a match with the PN value to get the coordinate values it needs If there is no active control file or if the PN value is not found SDMS Collector will prompt the user for the needed coordinate values The ending backsight activity is used to establish the AC BS initial reference angle The ending backsight activity Backsight usually contains SH HZ VT and DS data items from the occupied station to the backsight point in addition to the point number and description items The ending foresight activity establishes the closing azimuth for the traverse The closing foresight may be any known point including the beginning point The ending foresight is required if an azimuth AC FS adjusted closure is desired for azimuth adjustment Foresight XC and YC or AZ data items are required The XC and YC data items are used to compute the closing azimuth The azimuth takes precedence over Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 4 SDMS Tasks and Activities Activities Data Items the coordinates if an AZ XC and YC are entered If neither coordinates nor an azimuth are entered SDMS Collector will first look in the active Locate control file to find a ma
80. be compatible with the post processing software that interprets the SDMS data file Defining Connectivity in the SDMS Calculated File The Chain Activity AC CH is used in the calculated file CAL to define the point connectivity and other chain information The post processing software interprets the connectivity information in the SDMS project file PRJ to build Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 57 Appendix the various chains This process produces a separate Chain Activity AC CH for each chain defined in the project file All of the Chain Activities that are generated by SDMS Processor will be shown at the bottom of the SDMS calculated file and will always follow the points in the calculated CAL file The CAD software being used needs to be able to read and interpret the SDMS calculated file to display the points and chains The user can also manually create additional chains during field data collection as well as during the post processing phase An existing chain activity can be edited or a new chain activity can be manually entered into the project file The user will have to reprocess the data in the project file for any edited information to be passed to the calculated CAL file The chains listed at the bottom of the calculated file can also be edited or new chain activities can be added manually No further checks will be made by the processing software to verify the information is correct Therefore the use
81. coordinates staff and instrument heights etc AC BS The backsight activity must immediately follow the occupied station activity if no station resection shots occur The data items in the order described above are the nuts and bolts of a project file In an actual project file there will be many data items appropriately inserted after each activity data item See Chapter 11 for examples of a project file A control file contains the known or previously determined coordinates for points These files are used to define horizontal control points vertical benchmark points and calculated points to be staked out CTL is used as the file extension for Control files SDMS Collector allows up to five active control files at one time Details on the allowed control file names can be found in Chapter 9 Customizing SDMS The table below shows the minimum structure of the control file Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 3 Data Item AC PR AC XX PN YC XC ZC PD CM FE etc SX SY SZ SDMS Collector System Basics Description All data before the first activity other than a project header activity is ignored The project header information is for documentation only However systems that read and write this file may need to know some of the information such as the metadata items for units datum coordinate systems combination factors etc Ultimately such information should be checked agains
82. could occur at two or more locations the format n is used n is a positive integer value used to indicate the section of the alignment in which the equation is located n 1 meaning between the beginning of the alignment and the first station equation n 2 second section etc If n is not given the first section of the alignment is assumed In other words there are no station equations involved El xxxx Defines the superelevation slope rate on the left side Slopes are expressed in feet feet or meter meter i e 0 02 is a 2 slope downwards E2 xxxx Defines the superelevation slope rate on the right side Slopes are expressed in feet feet or meter meter i e 0 02 is a 2 slope downwards PD CM Can be used to tell what the transition is For example CM End Full Super Section AC Repeat activities as required to define superelevation transitions See the Appendix for an example of a superelevation file Configuration Files Help Files Sequence Files The configuration files contain configuration information used by SDMS Collector such as the paths to find the files the tolerances for multiple measurements and computations the name of the control files etc See Appendix for the examples of the configuration files and see Chapter 8 for how to use configuration files to customize SDMS Collector for a specific project CFG is used for the file extension for Configuration files The help fil
83. data ST OF ZC Vertical Horizontal Ratio VH and catch point offset OF e Compute the Vertical Horizontal Ratio Enter the hinge point data ST OF ZC and the catch point data ST OF ZC Note The VH is held for computations until the value is deleted or the user presses lt F2 gt NewP This allows the user to change the offset of the catch point to compute the elevation or to change the elevation of the catch point to compute an offset based on the elevation The desired information will then be computed based on the data input The position of the desired point can also be based on the measurement information for that point The update function lt F4 gt Uptd on the HVD data screen as shown in Figure 6 17 is used in this case Vertical Horizontal Ratio Computations Hierarchy To compute the vertical horizontal ratio between the hinge point and catch point or to compute an offset or elevation based on VH requires data be entered in a specific manner The tables that follow indicate the order data should be entered E Entered as known from CTL or Manual Entry C Computed value based on entered information IN BOX Order data should be entered to compute values for other than VH 1 Enter PN from CTL file Hinge Point PN E Hinge Point PN E ST From CTL ST Equal Hinge Point OF From CTL OF From CTL ZC From CTL ZC From CTL VEG SS Ss EE ee 2 No control points all manual entry based on a
84. data tags the default entries are prompted together with the data tags The user can accept the entry by pressing lt ENTER gt or change the entry Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 6 Data Collection by overwriting the response displayed For example the user can change to a different activity by changing the activity identifier prompted However if an activity that is not defined for the current task in the TASK TGS file is chosen by the user SDMS Collector displays an error message Either select another activity or edit the TASK TGS file to include the desired activity If this happens a lot the user may not be using the best task for the job For some of the data tags the valid entries are predefined in the TAGS HLP file The user can bring up the entry list by pressing lt gt when the cursor is at the first character of the data field and select an entry from the list For example the list of supported total stations is displayed when SDMS Collector prompts IT and the user presses lt gt The user can use the arrow keys lt P gt and lt gt to browse the list The entry in the line of the cursor is highlighted The highlighted entry is entered in the data field by pressing lt ENTER gt If the user knows the first letter of the proper response they can first type that letter and then the lt gt key This will cause SDMS Collector start the pop up list for that data tag response at the first item that status
85. e The examples are set up as new projects es The examples do not use total stations The user will enter horizontal angle vertical angle and distance measurements through the keyboard e When using a total station the user would use either lt F1 gt Measure or lt F2 gt Measure 2 to collect data from the instrument on the first prompt that asks for measurable information e The examples use the default task and activity definitions found in the Appendix e The examples do not use control files e The first example radial topography begins with opening a new project at the main men u The rest of the examples assume that a project has been opened a task has been selected and it is ready to enter the beginning occupied station data e Prompts or messages are shown in small bold letters like this MIOC or Enter Task e Keys pressed are shown in brackets like this lt ENTER gt lt F1 gt Project or lt Esc gt e Information to type is shown in bold italic letters like this 2244 08 Configuration Settings The following are the configuration settings used in these examples Project System Tolerance Definition Configuration Configuration fos as sos NS NEWPRSEQ gt ms OOO RE 2 A AE AAN AA Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 1 Examples mm 1000 gt Radial Topography Example Radial topography TK RTO can be either a horizontal task to collect data with X and Y components or a horiz
86. focus on point numbers numbering schemes hold true for any incrementing data tag Using Point Numbering with Multiple Sequences Assume the user is in data collection mode and in the middle of a sideshot sequence There are four sideshots in the sequence which begin numbering at 10 20 30 and 40 respectively Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 5 10 User Shot Sequences After the first sideshot point number 11 SDMS Collector displays MIOC Call a level 2 sequence with point numbers beginning at 100 When the level 2 sequence is completed and the level 1 sequence is resumed SDMS Collector retains the integrity of point numbering in the level 1 sequence This means that the point number for the second sideshot in the level 1 sequence is 21 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 User Shot Sequences Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 5 12 Computations Chapter 6 Computations SDMS Collector provides various functions to let the user process and check their survey measurement data in the field SDMS Collector automatically makes some tolerance checks during data collection tasks Several functions provided allow the user to request tolerance checks coordinate values or station and offset values on the fly SDMS Collector also provides the user with the capability to use batch computations to compute and adjust the coordinates for all points in a project file Tolerances in Computations SDMS Collector co
87. from the Total Stations PROMPTING DATA TAGS 0 ia ENTERING DATA FIGLDS Manually Entering DAata Entering Data from Total Stations Attribute and Information Data Items Entering Data from Control Rieger eege ii Oah dani ie 4 8 TRACKING POINT AND FIGURE NUMBERS Intelligent Point Numbering CORRECTING ERRORS Deleting A A A A ee ea ei Editingto Correct Data Entry Er a aa ReenteringDatato Correr Eed Nee 4 12 INDICIO Suspending a BDroiect Closing a Project CHAPTERS USER SHOT SEQUENCES ABOUT S HOT SEQUENCES ii ia Why Use a Aeagutence SEQUENCE FU ES Required Data for Sequences EE Default New Project SCQUence ed A sia BUILDING A SEQUENCE FILE NEEN Inserting a Standard Shot When Building a Sequence Inserting Another Sequence in a Sequence Sequence Levels and Remaining Shots Skipping or Repeating Shots in a Sequence ESCAPING froma SEGUN A A A i TE RE n a Escaping from an Activity Ia equence iii a ERE 5 6 Multiple Sequences Skipping or Repeating Shots in Multiple Sequences Updating Conetonte tii REMOVING EE Inserting a Standard Shot in a Redgientce NEEN How to Quickly Repeat a Sequence io noi Eallingthe Same Sequera Deleting Shots or Stations from a Sequence Ending a Sequence with AC CK SEQUENCES AND POINT NUMBERING SCHEMES A Stmple Point Numbering Schmid Point Numbering E 5 10 Using Point Numbering with Multiple Seogttenceg 5 10 CHAPTER 6 COMPUTATIONS
88. from the configurations menu include lt F2 gt System to edit the system configuration found in file SYS CFG lt F3 gt Project to edit the project configuration found in file PROJECT CFG not available from the functions menu lt F4 gt Control to edit the control file configuration found in file CNTL CFG Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 20 SDMS Collector System Basics e lt F6 gt I O to edit the I O configuration found in file IO CFG e lt F7 gt Tolerance to edit the tolerance definition found in file TOL CFG e lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt or lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to record a macro e lt Esc gt to return to the original menu Selecting Files to Use Most operations require that a file be named on which to perform the operation A file must be named to e Open a project e Create or edit a sequence e Edit a file e Perform disk operations e Perform I O operations e Compute a file The File name Prompt When SDMS Collector first prompts to name a file it suggests the path named as the default data path Set this path under the DP Data Path tag in the I O configuration Each time SDMS Collector presents the file name prompt it turns the insert toggle on as indicated by Ins in the upper right corner of the screen This toggle can be turned off and on by pressing lt Ins gt The displayed path can be change when a file name is entered Type in the directory path and the file name Press lt ENTER gt
89. gt to accept the offset of 0 PRR Type 5 4 AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity AC SS RR Type 5 83 o O AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity AC SS ST 14 00 Type 14445 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the offset of 0 PRR Type AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity AC SS E EE eee Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 28 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments perce IAN y w EEN AC SS Type ES over SS to select the foresight activity to check in to closing benchmark EA EEN AC FS Manually select the elevation Z coordinate data tag to input the enter closing elevation Back up to the A in AC and type ZC but don t press lt ENTER gt Choose a SDMS Collector returns to the main menu Command The Profile Example Project PRJ File d PR PROEXAM De TES RO a AC 0S 4 BINGE ce PD USGS 81L 1964 es UDS E Mer AC BS 8 RR 5 43 a AC SS LO STEGO CH QEU MES Soit O ESTA AC SS ER Sure Sr 00 L CERO We BR De AC SS D ST10F00 Se DEA 20 RR 4 26 eae AG TOS SE e e GE DES 24 RR 7 4 ZE E 26 Sma soe KE OF 20 28 RR 7 0 AE ROSS 30 a eA Se Greg S25 RR 6 9 SE AC FS 34 PN 2 SO PD SSPK IN PBE Sors RRAGA S7 e GO 28 OF AS 39 AC BS 40 ROS 41 AC SS 42 E OC 43 ESO Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 29 44 45 46 Bie 48 49 S06
90. information required for each of these options and the order data searched is described in detail in the sections that follow Data from a Control File SDMS Collector will automatically searches the control files first to find point coordinate data if the following data tags have a response entered on a stakeout screen e PN Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 6 Computations e ST OF e ST FE If any of these combinations of data have been stored in the control file those coordinates will be used and all other data tags will be filled or computed based on that information for that particular screen In this case the horizontal alignment profile and superelevation file will be ignored Data for the Orientation screen is considered primary control information Therefore SDMS Collector first looks at the named L1 control file for the point to fill in the fields on this screen If it does not find the point there it looks in the named L2 control file SDMS follows this hierarchy because the user would most likely keep location control data in one of these two files Data for the other stake out screens is considered staking information Therefore SDMS Collector first looks at the named S1 control file If it does not find the point there it looks in the named S2 control file SDMS Collector follows this hierarchy since the user would normally keep staking data in one of these two files If SDMS Collector does not f
91. is considered fixed SY Standard Error Estimate Y Coordinate used with control points to define an error estimate in the Y component Northing of the ordinate for that control point to be used during the least squares analysis process The response represents the amount of freedom the user wishes to allow the control point to adjust during processing The default value in SDMS Processor is 0 001 feet or meters which is considered fixed SZ Standard Error Estimate Z Coordinate used with control points to define an error estimate in the Z component Elevation of the coordinate for that control point to be used during the least squares analysis process The response represents the amount of freedom the user wishes to allow the control point to adjust during processing The default value in SDMS Processor is 0 001feet or meters which is considered fixed TA config Traverse Horizontal Angle Closure when used in the TOL CFG file defines the angular closure error tolerance value TD Tunnel Direction records the direction of a tunnel such as INBOUND or OUTBOUND TE Temperature used to record the current temperature in the units designated in the UT data item TE config Traverse Elevation Closure when used in the TOL CFG file defines the traverse elevation closure tolerance value TI Tunnel Identification records the name or number of a tunnel TK Task used to define he type of survey task being con
92. is the first of two possible location coordinate files This file normally contains the coordinates of known points such as those established by NGS or points established by high precision GPS or traversing that have been adjusted using least squares or some other technique and may be needed during a projcect L2 This is the secondary location control file It is the second of two possible location coordinate files Sl This is the primary staking control file It is the first of two possible staking coordinate files This file will normally contain the coordinates of points computed during project design such as alignment control points right of way points and structure stake out points S2 This is the secondary staking control file It is the second of two possible staking coordinate files WC This is the write control file This is the file SDMS Collector save the computed coordinates During the live computation this is the default file SDMS Collector uses when the user saves the coordinates After the batch computation SDMS Collector will write all the computed coordinates to this file If this file is not specified SDMS Collector will use the file name of the current project file and extension CTL to create a write control file Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 9 6 Customizing SDMS Collector HA This is the horizontal alignment file This file contains the coordinates of key points along a horizontal
93. line elevation at any station along the alignment Symmetrical and asymmetrical vertical curves are specified by defining the lengths of the parabolic curves along the vertical alignment The first and last VPI points listed in the file are beginning and ending point respectively and cannot have vertical curve lengths listed with them PRO is used as the file extension for Vertical Alignment files Note The vertical alignment control points VPT VPL VPT do not have to correspond to control points in the associated horizontal alignment file But the stationing used for the vertical alignment control points must be within the stationing defined in the associated horizontal alignment file The first segment in a vertical alignment file is shown in the following table Data Item Description AC PR All data before the first activity other than a project header activity is ignored The project header information is for documentation only However systems that read and write this file may need to know some of the information such as the metadata items for units datum coordinate systems combination factors etc Ultimately such information should be checked against the similar settings in the system reading this data and provide warnings or conversions as needed Any valid SDMS descriptive tags can be used under this activity OPTIONAL AC EQ Station Equations are optional in the profile file The equations define the location of a
94. minimum e Husky FS 3 2Mb minimum e Husky FSGS 2Mb minimum Husky MP2500 2Mb minimum e HPIO00LX 2Mb minimum e HP200LX 2Mb minimum e PC and Laptop Computers that support MS DOS Total stations supported by SDMS Collector include Driver GEODIMETER System 400 500 600 LIECA T1010 amp 1610 LIECA TCR303 LEICA TCA1103 LIETZ SET 3 amp 3B NIKON DTM Series 400 500 700 800 PENTAX PTSH SOKKIA SET Series 2 2B 3 3B XL amp 100 Series TOPCON Coarse and Fine Modes GTS Series 4 amp 300 500 700 GTS AF Series 601 603 605 GPT Series 1001 1002 1003 TRIMBLE TTS 300 and 500 WILD T2000 amp T2002 ZEISS Elta Series 3 amp 4D For information on supporting other brands and models of total stations review information on the SDMS web site or contact AASHTO 444 North Capitol Street N W Suite 249 Washington D C 20001 202 624 5800 SDMS Collector may be also be used as a survey data recording system without being connected to a measuring device In every case where a measurement is called for the user has the option of manually entering the values through the keyboard or polling the connected total station for the measurement values Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 1 3 Introduction Contact AASHTO Headquarters for information on the procedure to add support for other brands and models of total stations SDMS Documentation Complete documentation available for the
95. no more than 20 activities in a task and no more than 20 data items in an activity When creating user shot sequences the user should first look up the required data items for the activities as they apply to the specific project Make sure all required measurement and coordinate data items for each activity are included As a rule of thumb use the default task and activity definitions found in the Appendix Data items can be added to or removed from the default definitions provided they do not impact the computations For more information about required data for computation see Chapter 3 SDMS Tasks and Activities An activity must contain at minimum e The activity data tag AC e A point number e Required measurement or coordinate data Descriptive data is optional and does not help or hinder the remaining information in the shot Note Failure to enter required data particularly measurement or coordinate information can result in incorrect results or other processing inconsistencies Tags Only Sequence A sequence file can have data tags only without any activity tags Usually this kind of sequence file is used to insert a series of data items in the current activity during the data collection Default New Project Sequence The first sequence for a new project is named in the project configuration file under the NS data tag default sequence to begin new job SDMS Collector Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 5 2
96. of the calculated file The Calculated File For Connectivity By Unique Feature Codes For Each Chain The shot sequence using connectivity by feature code would be listed in the SDMS calculated file CAL as AC SS PN 10 FE EP1 XX 9480 1798 YY 10561 1445 Z22 504 8596 HAZ OOO VI 87 2649 OF DS 920900 Oe 11 PN 12 12 FE EP2 LS XX 9500 9082 14 EE Sy Ge DE 16 HZ 266 1432 e WAR Pee ZS DS 114 8700 19 AC SS 20 PN 14 21 FE EP1 22 XX 9479 8421 AIA Gs GA NR Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 92 287 EE 24 ZZ Zor HZ AS WAIES SC DSE SE AC Zoe PN BOs FE Sle WOKE 32s Ke SN ZZ 34 HZ 33e WAS 36 Des SE AC oon PN OF FE 40 YOKE 41 NOES 42 SS 43 HZ 44 Wig 45 DS 46 AC 47 BIN 48 FE 49 XX Sor NES E ZZ 525 HZ Dox WAS 54 DSK 55 AC DO PN SV FE Do ORS Sos E 60 ZZ Gules BAS C2 ALS 63 DSE 64 AC Se PN 66 FE Os XX 68 A Son ZZ TOR HZ Tila ABS SE D s KI BG 74 AC TD FE TC EGE Wiis PL SE AC ZEIL FE a EG Sule BAS E EG 83 OB 10645 4492 507 5401 ADA SS 87 4540 dE SEI ss 16 EP2 9501 4436 10644 9117 507 8418 ANS NS 87 4154 195 2400 ss Vy EP2 HERE SEI SS SiS 254 1241 Orme 341 6900 ss Zi EPI 9478 1080 OL OS 7 DLL ALI 250 2943 87 5954 338 4300 ss 29 EP2 9496 3387 10866 5262 DIS GS O02 UNS EE 414 9400 ss 26 EP 9471 8457 10853 0941 SiS iS 249 1628 88 0
97. or OF stored in the file and the mmed horizontal alignment vertical alignment and superelevation file In this case all computations for station offset and elevations will be based on the horizontal alignment vertical alignment and superelevation file named The elevation stored in the control file will be used in this case All of the files must be named in the control configuration file CNTL CFG for computations to function in this manner It is important to remember the control file cannot contain ST or OF for this option to function Alignments with Equations It is important to remember to enter the section number n to designate which segment of the alignment is being used if that alignment contains equations For Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 7 Computations example ST 2 indicates the station desired is n the segment of the alignment immediately following the first equation If a segment number n is not included SDMS Collector assumes the station is before the first equation But no data will be computed if the station entered is greater than the back station value of the equation listed Be careful that the correct segment number is entered If the wrong segment number is entered and the stationing exists in that section data will be computed but it will be in the wrong location For example the user intends to stake out a point at station 12 00 located between the first and second station equ
98. point it Elevation Control would then USE the elevation value as established by the AC EC to continue on with the level loop The AC CC will only compute and display the difference and continue with the project values for elevation The utility elevation activity is used to determine the elevation of an underground utility A sideshot is taken on a point directly above the underground AC UE utility The utility elevation activity records the Utility Elevation rod reading of a rod dropped down to the utility itself The utility elevation activity must be entered after the leading sideshot before any other activities are started There may be multiple utility elevations taken from the same leading sideshot The turning point rod reading is taken from the current set up The instrument is then moved to a new set up and the turning point point is again AC TP shot from the new set up as a backsight The Turning point turning point activity achieves the same computational effect as the foresight but it is considered an intermediate and non critical point Coordinates for turning point activities are not included in the results when the file is processed Turning point activity contains the rod reading when the rod is placed on the turning point Note If there is no elevation ZC provided with an occupied station AC OS but elevations ZC are provided on one or all the foresights that follow that AC OS the post processing software
99. postion as possible This method results in a file where the points on any given chain are scattered throughout the file and in which several chains may be in progress simultaneously Connecting the points to define chains is the job of the post processing software that interprets the SDMS data But the field data collection procedure needs to provide the post processing system with the intelligence to do that correctly SDMS has several different methods of tagging points for chain definition Each method has its advantages and the selection is to some extent a matter of personal preference These methods include e Connectivity By Figure Code e Connectivity By Origin Destination e Connectivity By Taping e Connectivity With The Chain Activity Other information nay also be needed when defining chains This can be accomplished by adding data tags to define attributes of the chain being defined Tags can be used to designate such things as e The chain feature code e Whether the chain represents a surface break line or just a planimetric feature e Which points in the chain are angle points and which are points on curves e Graphical attributes such as level color and line style The SDMS Collector software provides a wide variety of methods to define connectivity Details on several of these methods are provided in the in the Appendix Note SDMS Collector passes this as information only SDMS Processor uses this information to g
100. pressed lt ENTER gt on A1 Attribute 1 in the help list SDMS Collector returns to the project file and displays Al Other data is then entered as usual Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 10 5 Getting Help and Using Macros How to Use Help on Data Fields When the user is not sure what answer is acceptable for a data tag the help function can be used 1 Display the response list for the data field 2 Use lt 4 gt and lt gt to scroll the list When the cursor is on the desired value for the data field press lt ENTER gt to select it 3 To exit without selecting a response press lt Esc gt For example assume SDMS Collector is displaying DO in the project file Place the cursor on the blank field to the right of the colon Press lt gt SDMS Collector displays the response list as shown in Figure 10 4 PN 2 horizontal V vertical Figure 10 4 Select an entry for DO If the user pressed lt ENTER gt on H Horizontal in the help list SDMS Collector returns to the project file and displays DO H in the project file Help is not available for all data tags If the user presses lt gt on a tag that help is not available SDMS Collector will display the message shown in Figure 10 FE BL SO Meal Mea2 eto Figure 10 5 Message displayed when there is no help information for a data tag Many data tags such as FE feature code can have a vast number of allowed responses To sc
101. screen will display with the data changed based on the measured point The measurement values will be displayed for both the hinge point and the catch point e The user can continually update screens manually or automatically e Computations work based on measurement data from an instrument or manual entry lt Fl gt Meas The screens that utilize this function should update based on the HZ VT and DS measured in the field and if a VO is entered e When the user is satisfied with the results of the measurement information press lt F4 gt Data The catch point data is then updated based on the last information displayed on the Slope Stake Shot screen This data can then be saved to the write control file by pressing lt F5 gt Save e When the current catch point is completed the user presses the lt F2 gt NewP key to start staking out the next catch point All the fields in the screen will be cleared and the values are removed from the program memory Additional Computation Functions Azimuth Bearing and Distance Between Points The Orientation and Shot Inverse screens can also be used to compute the inverse horizontal distance azimuth and bearing for points other than the occupied station and backsight This is done by entering the point numbers or coordinate values of the points desired on the left and right sides of the Orientation screen as shown in Figure 6 7 Press lt Fl gt Shot to view the computed information for the azimu
102. shot sequence This method allows chain points to be collected out of sequence This method can also be used along with the Figure Code method to designate that a certain point can be part of one chain based on the figure code FG and part of another chain based on the origin destination OD Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 60 Appendix Connectivity Using The Origin Destination Method Point number indicates the survey shot sequence Figure 6 2 Connectivity by origin destination Project File for Connectivity by Origin Destination An example of how this method works uses the information shown in Figure 6 2 If PN 10 is side shot from the current occupied station and it is part of a chain for which the next point is PN 14 the following information might be recorded da ASS Res PN 10 She FE CURB 4 CD CURB LINE or SEO r HZ 45 2354 Ye YESO SOS ES DS 100 44 Da OD 14 103 ACSS MR PN 12 JS FE FENCE LS SHES 14 HZ 45 2354 LSe OI SS LS DS 100 44 Ir OD 16 ES ACESS he PN 14 20 FE CURB GH SEL GER EU E EE 0 24 DS aes OA Zoe ODEA 26 CES BY PN 16 28 FE FENCE 29 SHRED SOF HZ 45 2354 Sch VT 90 3045 BA DS 100 44 BSF ODEs 34 ASS SD EE EE FE FENCE s7 SEL SIS EU ES BoE VT 90 3006 40 DS 180 94 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 defines the feature code of the first chain as CURB points to PN 14 as the next point in the CURB chain defines th
103. should compute the file from the point where the first ZC is encountered to the end of the file or until another AC OS is encountered Note Multiple loops can be collected in the same project file Each loop should start with AC OS This tells the post processing software the intent is to start a new loop from that point to the end of the file or until another AC OS is encountered that signifies the start of another loop Hand Level Shots in a Cross Section Sideshots are often needed in a cross section at locations which cannot be shot from the current instrument set up Survey crews often pick up the elevation of these shots with a hand level The SDMS data structure provides a method of recording hand level shots as LOC shots LOC shot mode is activated by a data item SI BL Shot ID begin LOC shot in a backsight activity The backsight shot must be on the last sideshot All shots after the activation of LOC shot mode are processed using elevations based on the backsight shot that began the LOC shot mode This includes turning point shots and other backsight points When the LOC shot mode is ended the instrument set up elevation is restored to the value it had at the beginning of the LOC shot mode LOC shots are ended by entering an SI EL Shot ID end LOC shot data item in the last sideshot activity AC SS in the LOC sequence Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 13 SDMS Tasks and Activities The Profile Task TK
104. software HOUSE 10068 6824 10187 1534 DOL GRET TA 0000 90 0000 86 5650 60 0850 OS 101 10068 6824 10187 1534 501 6167 TA 0000 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 82 Ending in a Figure Appendix ONE Nice at OZ eH HOUSE HOS ee AO OS Hos TOA Ye 1015259848 105 ZZ 498 4165 LOS Sar Quy Oyo Sie O00 Oy Eas O000 re 0 EE PN assigned to the next taped point by the post processing software 111 FE HOUSE EIERE WSS SNES DEU DL EIERE JL SILSIVA beet 0000 EISE OOO KIELEN E ED SE S 90000 JE CHOS MITEN EIOZ TA ESE O USE ISSO 0 07 2 210 MAN SENES MOS SOL WAS ARO ASS 1200 SISIVA ME 5 O00 LARS ACTES TAOTE PNE EON 130 FE HOUSE 131 XX 10068 6824 MSA BORA Losa WSIS E SOL GLET ISA Seg ays LSS S13 0000 136 HZ 0000 USTs ACES LS NOS PN assigned to the last taped point by the post processing software TS OA HE HOUSE 140 XX 10126 4909 141 YY 10180 9743 MAPS HASSO GLES LAS STETA 144 SH 0000 145 HZ 90 0000 146 VT 90 0000 147 DS 44 0000 148 BG BEGIN CHAIN LIST JEE 150 FE lt HOUSE Sl ES 152 PESO ALO ALDO AOL ALA E e 153 EG END CHAIN LIST 154 CP 06 08 2000 14 08 15 Using the Taping Activity The taping activity can also be used to define a taped figure that ends and is not intended to create a closed object A chain created by the taping activity can be stopped at any point by ending with an AD in
105. temporary points shown in Figure 6 18 O Point collected in field _ Temporary point computed at OF Field collected figure Figure 6 18 Temporary points for a parallel chain outside the closed figure The actual points and chain to be stored in the calculated CAL file and or points and chain PAC file is shown in Figure 6 19 PN 100 PN 105 Point collected in field Computed point A stored in CAL or PAC file Field collected figure ere Parallel chain Figure 6 19 A parallel chain generated outside a closed figure Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 102 Appendix A parallel chain lying inside the closed figure will generate the temporary points shown in Figure 6 20 Point collected in field Temporary point computed at OF Field collected figure Figure 6 20 Temporary points for a parallel figure within the closed figure The actual points and chain to be stored in the calculated CAL file and or points and chain PAC file is shown in Figure 6 21 Point collected in field Computed point stored in CAL or PAC file Field collected figure Parallel chain Figure 6 21 A parallel figure generated within a closed figure Note SDMS Processor reads connectivity by Origin Destination OD as a series of two 2 point chains Therefore if a parallel chain of more that two points is to be created the OD method cannot be used A Figure Code is required for
106. the Inverse Shot screen Refer to the Inverse Shot section for details Summary of the HVD Data Screen The function keys on the HVD Data screen Figure 6 14 perform the following lt F2 gt Prev Returns to the active stakeout screen lt F4 gt Updt Indicates the computed information based on the measurement is to replace the data currently on the active stakeout screen lt F6 gt Rec Saves records the entire screen data as displayed to the Record REC file lt F8 gt OR_ Return user to Orientation screen lt Esc gt Backs up one screen The data displayed on the Alignment Control Stakeout screen is as follows AZ BR HZ VT DS Azimuth of the point entered on the active stakeout screen Bearing of the point entered on the active stakeout screen Displays instrument measurement or the input by user on data entry screen Displays instrument measurement or the input by user on data entry screen Displays instrument measurement or the input by user on data entry screen Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 16 Computations SS Computed station based on the current shot point OO Computed offset based on the current shot point ZZ Computed elevation of the current shot point DZ The algebraic difference between the known elevation ZC the computed elevation ZZ plus the vertical offset VO That is ZC VO ZZ DH Horizontal
107. the data field of the NS data tag in the Project Configuration File must be changed See Chapter 9 Customizing SDMS Collector for more information Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 2 Data Collection Automatically Inserted Data Items SDMS Collector automatically inserts certain data items from the project configurations immediately after the first activity in the project file This is transparent to the user and helps to document meta data items for the project The current settings are extracted from the various Configuration files that are active during data collection The data automatically inserted by SDMS Collector includes the following items Data Tag Description Curvature and refraction toggle and the current setting Combination factor and the current setting Units of length and the current setting Unit of angles and the current setting Units of temperature and the current setting Units of pressure and the current setting SDMS Collector version number Rod type vertical tasks only Three wire stadia constant three wire level task only The user can reopen an existing project whether suspended or closed to continue data collection or do some computations or editing This allows some preliminary work to be done before the surveyors arrive at the site For example before going to the field the user might e Name the control files to use in the control file configuration e Open a new project a
108. the parallel chain to be create that consists of more than two points Note The chain activity to create the parallel chain must be entered in the project file after the entire chain that is being paralleled has been collected It does not have to follow immediately after that chain but it is recommended Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 103 Appendix General Rules of SDMS Tasks and Activities Overview There are a number of basic rules that should be used and followed in the development of data collection and processing software using SDMS These rules have an effect on the actual field data collection procedures as well as the way the processing software uses the field generated project file information Rules The following lists contain some of the basic rules that should be followed in the data collection and processing software 4 Only certain activities are allowed with a given task These are somewhat definable by the user in the TASK TGS file but there are also some restrictions imposed by the processing routines For example an activity of stationing to define the nominal station is not valid when doing a traversing task and even if the user figured out a way to edit that tag into the TASK TGS file the processing software would not understand how to use It 5 SDMS Collector does not change to the default sequence for the activity currently displayed until the user presses lt ENTER gt on that new AC Ther
109. the project file Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 83 Appendix Connectivity Using The Taping Activity Point number indicates the survey shot sequence e Figure 6 5 Taping Activity Ending a Figure Using the example in Figure 6 5 to end a chain the taping activity will be oop 4 Yop Gal SS ee TES OS PRPPPRPRPRO onn NBEO dee la he SE ZS 22 23 24 25 ADO AC PN 1 GER HAs E DS AC PN ab GER HZ WARS DS AC OS BS PN EEs EG EI R 34 Right 34 feet use the same elevation as AD AD AD AD GPs SS 79 HOUSE 5 TONSILS 90 3045 ASIS SS 10 HOUSE 5 0 90 3006 180 94 TA 10 Point Number of the point to be used as the occupied station This is the second point in the chain being defined within the taping activity 9 Point Number of the point to be used as the loyevelie See te ls idas Ilse teen Elin A chain being defined within the taping activity 100 Beginning Point Number to be used for the points computed within the taping activity HOUSE Feature to be used for the new chain 5 Figure Code to be used for the chain PART OF OUR HOUSE Chain Description PN 10 SO ORZ Right 60 feet Add 3 2 feet to the elevation of the preceding point L 38 0 Left 38 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point R 44 Right 44 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point and the end of the chain 09 18 1
110. the target may be directly offset along the line of sight in front or in back of the desired object A sideshot is taken to the target and the taped offset is entered with the LO data tag AC SS PN FE PD HZ VT DS LO When facing the desired object from the instrument as shown in Figure 3 2 if the target or prism is behind the object the offset is positive If the prism is in front of the object the offset is negative Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 16 SDMS Tasks and Activities Figure 3 2 Offsets Front or Back Utility Elevations The Utility elevation activity is used to determine the elevation of an object This activity is normally associated with a utility object located directly above or below the level of the sideshot RA 8 Take a leading sideshat directly above the utility with the sidashot activity SCH D 2 Drop a rod to the utility and record the rod reading with the utiity elevation activity Figure 3 3 Utility Elevation The field procedure is as follows 1 Take a sideshot to the ground point directly above or below the utility as shown in Figure 3 3 AC SS PN FE PD HZ VT DS 2 Use AC UE to start the utility elevation activity Record the rod reading of a rod dropped or raised to the utility itself A positive rod reading RR Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 17 SDMS Tasks and Activities indicates that the elevation of the utility is bel
111. to accept the suggested sideshot activity PD Press lt ENTER gt to accept the blank line COSSA a es AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity PD Press lt ENTER gt to accept the blank line RR Type E Type722 O AC BS Manually select the shot ID data tag to indicate the beginning of hand level LOCKE shots Back up to the A in AC and type SI but do not press lt ENTER gt PD Press lt ENTERS to accept the blank line RR TO AC SS Type TP over SS to select the turning point activity make a turn with the hand level for one more shot CS YE E TA FE XSE Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested feature PD Press lt ENTER gt toaccept the blank line OF 75 Type 100 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 21 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments AC SS Manually select the shot ID data tag to indicate the end of hand level LOCKE shots Back up to the A in AC and type SI but do not press lt ENTER gt SI BL Type EL This restores the HI saved at the start of LOCKE shots AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity FE XSE OF 100 Type 5 8 AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity FE XSE Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested feature OF 25 AC SS PN 2 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point number Type BM and press lt ENTER gt Type SPK IN PP Type
112. two places in SDMS Collector 1 From the main menu press the lt F2 gt Edit key to select edit mode 2 In project mode at the MIOC prompt press the lt F7 gt Functions key then the lt F2 gt Edit key to select edit mode How to Select a File to Edit When the user presses the Edit key SDMS Collector prompts the user for the name of the file to edit SDMS Collector suggests the default data path in the DP data item in the 1 O configuration as shown in Figure 7 1 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 7 1 The Editor Load File gt SDMS PRJ PRJ IIe a Ee Figure 7 1 File name prompt If SDMS Collector is in project mode it suggests the active project file name The cursor is at the beginning of the file name The user can type in the name of the file to edit change the path if necessary or press lt F1 gt Dir key to browse the directory to pick up the file If the user presses lt F1 gt Dir SDMS Collector prompts the default directory path with the file extension PRJ as shown in Figure 7 2 Figure 7 2 Default directory path 1 Press lt ENTER gt to see the files in the default path If the file is located in another directory change the path before pressing lt ENTER gt 2 Move the cursor to the desired file and press lt ENTER gt to select it for editing When a file is selected SDMS Collector changes to edit mode The cursor will be at the top of the file If t
113. well suited for GIS systems and long term archiving Instructions can be recorded for line connectivity figure and feature coding and other CAD or drawing information AASHTO SDMS is a detailed data structure which has been defined documented and adopted by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AASHTO for recording field survey information This data structure is defined in the AASHTO SDMS Technical Data Guide 2000 This Technical Data Guide can be obtained in Adobe PDF format or HTML format for free by downloading it from the AASHTO SDMS web site at http www aashtoware org sdms sdmsdown nsf or in hard copy format for 40 by writing or calling AASHTO at AASHTO 444 North Capitol Street NW Suite 249 Washington DC 20001 202 624 5800 The goal of AASHTO in defining this data structure is to establish a national standard for recording exchanging and archiving survey data With electronic measuring equipment and computers being applied to every facet of surveying civil design plans production and construction the need for such a defined standard has become critical The current situation of each brand and model of data collector having a unique data format is a huge impediment to the automation of these processes SDMS Collector is a Year 2000 Y2K compliant survey data collection software that can be used for common surveying tasks and it complies with the SDMS technical data structure
114. with that letter in the TAGS HLP file response list Entering Data from Total Stations Normal Shots Quick Shots The data for the horizontal angle vertical angle and slope distance can be recorded from the total stations SDMS Collector sets two function keys lt F1 gt Measure 1 and lt F2 gt Measure 2 to collect data from the total stations Generally lt F1 gt is for getting the horizontal angle vertical angle and distance while lt F2 gt is for getting horizontal and vertical angles only There are presently two types of shots that use these function keys They are normal shots and quick shots When SDMS Collector prompts for the measurement data tags HZ VT or DS and the user presses one of the measurement function keys data measured by the instrument will be displayed and entered in the project file If the sequence being used contains these measurement prompts in order when the user presses the measure function on one of these lines any subsequent measurement items that can be transferred will be Therefore if the prompt sequence in use has HZ VT DS and the user presses the measure key while on the HZ line the VT and DS values will also be transferred if they exist on the total station and SDMS will move to the first prompt after the DS line in the sequence If the prompt is on the VT or DS tags and the HZ was missed accidentally the user will need to move the cursor to the left of the colon and ov
115. 0 Direction of Offset 66 H horizontal OW 6 V vertical 68 DP 8 0 Depth 697 DS 12 1 Distance Slope EE DT 10 0 Date Je Dv 12 1 Distance Vertical o DES IL IL Si E DY 12 1 Delta Y 74 DZ 12 1 Delta Z De El 6 0 Left Side Slope 76 E2 6 0 Right Side Slope ba ED 8 1 Error Distance er ES 20 0 End Group A EH 8 1 Error Horizontal Angle 80 EQ 4 1 Equation Number SC ES 3 2 Ending Station Y N YES 827 YES current OS is ending station 83 NO current OS is NOT ending station 84 EV 8 1 Error Vertical Angle 85 EX 10 1 External Distance Circular Curve 86 FC 1 1 Face Number STe l direct face 88 2 reverse face 89 FE 5 0 Feature Code OO SL e FG 4 0 Figure Code OD GM 1 0 Geometry Type Oss C Curve Point 94 P Point on Line SL GR 4 0 Group 262 EL 230 slo Nhe HA 12 0 Horizontal Alignment File Name Jom HD ts 0 Horizontal Datum 997 HE 9 1 Height Ellipsoid 100 HG 9 1 Height Geoid Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 27 DL REES NOS 104 LOS KOLO LOT 6 LOS OSR TOS LCE LI LS 114 TALS 6 iS ET JL ITOR LAs SL EE LST 124 Es Je Ts ASA 129 6 SOR LS L326 SS sae TSS 6 ISS IS LS mIn 140 MANS TA 25 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 SOR Loi ZAS IS 154 1557 ISS ISe LOS 5 F597 ILGOR at MOZA az 164 az 166 Ja 168 COS LOR LL Appendix HH 9 0 Horizontal Angle Computed HT 6 0 Height
116. 001 PD 24 IN MAPLE lt T SIN e Wei lt Type 225 1422 Type 88 3035 Type 265 934 AC SS Due to an obstruction the staff height changes to 8 50 for this one shot Move to the A in AC and type SH but do not press lt ENTER gt yet SH 6 0 Type 8 50 Since this is a one time change use DO the once function Press lt CTRL gt lt ENTER gt to enter the staff height value AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested ES sideshot activity Press lt ENTER gt to accept incremented point number 1004 PD SE COR Type NE over SE so that the description reads BLDG NE COR BLDG Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 4 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments Type 251 5246 Type 88 2942 Type 271 581 AC SS A staff height must be selected again to return the staff height to its original value before it is changed with the once function on point HZ VT DS 1003 Move to the A in AC and type SH but don t press lt ENTER gt yet SH 6 0 Press lt ENTER gt to accept 6 0 and restore the staff height NOTE The staff height tag SH can be added to the TASK TGS file under TK RTO AC SS to eliminate the need to type in the tag each time The user could accept the value displayed or change using the once shot etc AC SS Type UE over the displayed SS to select the utility elevation activity Use a vertical zenith angle measurement in the utility elevation to measure the elevati
117. 2 meters 100 meter stationing M3 meters Kilometers stationing UA 0 Units Angles D D degrees R rads 7G gons UT 1 0 Units Temperature F F Fahrenheit C Celsius UP 1 50 Unite Pressure I B bars I inches of Hg OS 37 0 Default Seq to Begin Old Job r default is no beginning seq to change enter new path file name NS 37 0 Default Seq to Begin New Job NEWPR r NEWPR de fault to change enter new path file name RTL OrRod Type E F foot 7Y yard Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 24 Sion System Configuration Appendix M meter The System Configuration File SYS CFG dl LP No AD OFF OP No RP No MP 0 AS YES A The System Configuration Help File SYS HLP Ri 2 2 2 2 VO OO Jo Om URN o JO UD bs GA k Oe VO OL Ls 27 Sh Tolerance Definition The Tolerance Definition English Unit Project Metric Unit Project VO OO JO 0 BWNE o Jon E GA A Oe EE EE ech e Yes project data listed to printer EE data NOT listed to printer AD 4 0 Auto Date Time Stamp Off PROJ enter at start of project only STAT enter at each occupied station SHOT enter at each activity OFF no date time stamping OP 3 2 Overwrite Protection No Yes files may NOT be overwritten No files may be overwritten RP 3 2 Removal Protection No Yes files may NOT be deleted No files may be deleted MP 3 1 Macro Pause in 1 18 sec 0 r O d
118. 2 shows a typical SDMS Collector file request prompt Figure 8 2 A File Request Prompt Viewing a Directory To see the files in a directory press lt F1 gt Dir when prompted for a file name The user can change the default path and use DOS wild cards to narrow the list from which to choose when using lt F1 gt Directory When SDMS Collector displays the correct path press lt ENTER gt to view the directory as shown in Figure 8 3 or press lt Esc gt to exit C SDMS PRJ ARDOT lt DIR gt TXDOT lt DIR gt WIDOT lt DIR gt MARK CTL 4974 MARK ALI 3158 Figure 8 3 Viewing a directory To pick a file from a directory press lt F1 gt Dir at the file name prompt Change the path and use wildcards to narrow the list before pressing lt F1 gt Dir When SDMS Collector displays the correct path press lt ENTER gt When SDMS Collector displays a directory e Select a file by moving the cursor to the file name and pressing lt ENTER gt Use the lt T gt or lt J gt and Page Up or Page Down to move the cursor to a file name or directory entry e View the parent directory by pressing lt ENTER gt on lt DIR gt Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 8 2 Disk Management and Communication e View another directory by pressing lt ENTER gt on the directory name e Name a new directory to view by pressing lt F1 gt Dir and entering a new path specification use wildcards in the p
119. 2r L2 125 000000 26 AC 0S ZS SE 28 SEAS US 29 ZC 284 000640 BOF L1 100 000000 Silke L2 100 000000 BA AC 0S Ber SIIVET 34 EE SE ZC 275 500640 SO L1 100 000000 Sie L2 100 000000 28m AC OS SIE SISIB 40 ST 12 494 867 3 41 7C 275 500640 42 L1 0 000000 43 L2 0 000000 44 AC OS 45 SADA 46 ST 13 402 462 3 47 ZO 72H 94999998 48 L1 0 000000 49 L2 0 000000 KOS COR EO Olin elek Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 NM STATE HWY A HWY B CM DESIGN CENTERLINE PROFILE Second Occurrence of the Station Third Occurrence Third Occurrence Third Occurrence Third Occurrence of the of the of the of the Station Station Station Station Appendix 12 55 Sample Superelevation File SUP PI Definition KONO E e MACIAS AO NAS AC E NM CM CM DADES UL VD NADA SSA 9 91 ZN HD RE El E2 EZ El E2 El E2 El E2 PR STH67 SUP STATE HWY A HWY B DESIGN SUPERELEVATION FILE THROUGH THE FIRST CURVE 03 26 1998 M3 NGVD 29 4802 GENO AC Si 8 rire Caen ATOR ELS 00020000 CS Supe Eris 11 8 AC SET 1518 0 000000 ACS Siea pI E2 AC Sire 0 OS 9000 0 059000 AC SES SO OZ OO 0 000000 AC SIS r 020000 EEN OS SONS OS OCIO 0 020000 0 020000 OS DEE 0 020000 OS AOS SEO 0 059000 OS 1 344 836 Os 11 400 000 OS 11 410 169 Survey Data Management Sys
120. 30 ss 1336 SIRS O48 92 4502 DIRS DA ss SS 38 2014 93 014 ANS 5 TAL ss 1338 36 1204 EE 193 66 ss LESS 32 5414 EE MESA 1 ss 1340 AOR OSA 93 4456 SOTS SS 1341 ADS ESIA 93 4852 132 ALG 736 0436 94 0048 dee ss LSO Soran 93 4224 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix 12 39 13S LSS WS E 1398 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 alt 1527 LOSS 154 ISS dE ST SS Sos 160 Gi IG 6 MOS 6 164 ze 166 OTs 168 INGO pt EI JL dees 174 SR IR TT US erg 180 SES JS e 184 LES 186 HS 188 189 DION SL HZ HZ PN HZ HZ HZ HZ HZ PN HZ PN HZ DS IS AC PINES 241 3208 WAES DS AC EN 43 2018 WAS DS AC 109 44 2818 ARS DS AC Sts AC PN 257 4836 Ales Se SES AC PN 57 4044 Wales DS AC PN 57 3424 WARS DS AC INS SOME Oe YATES DS AC 1408 57 21 56 YES D HGS AC 21409 EST a LAK Eeler DS AC NES AZ YES DS ere Maley iL SS TOST 99220 184 54 SS 1368 ISS ZOO ss PRATS 22O sT IPPON SS 1404 92 4444 LID 8 4 SS 1405 SE 214 8 SS 1406 93 2744 190 42 SS 1407 93 4942 EE SS 94 0448 SSRN 1 ss 94 3428 ASS ss 1410 57 124 IS ONS OAs ALS 08 14 1995 16 34 43 Appendix Horizontal Alignment ALI for the Radial Cross Section Example i AC PR gt
121. 4 6 3 010 Point number increments by 10 10 20 30 Point number increments by 100 100 200 300 The Response List Help files also contain lists of responses where applicable This list can limit responses to only those in the list or can include a wildcard entry so the data tag can accept responses other than those in the list Accept Only Listed Responses A data tag can be set up to accept only the responses in the response list If the user attempts any other response or tries to leave the field blank SDMS Collector refuses the entry In this example SDMS Collector accepts only the listed responses Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 10 2 Getting Help and Using Macros GM 6 0 Geometry lt ENTER gt CURVE connect points with smooth curves lt ENTER gt sPOINT connect points with straight lines lt ENTER gt Accept Only Listed Responses or a Blank If the user wants to make sure that the prompt is either answered with a listed response or left blank the help file wildcard must look like this lt ENTER gt The semi colon followed by a space an equals sign and carriage return line feed forces the user to either accept one of the suggested responses or leave the field blank This wildcard can be placed anywhere in the response list GM 6 0 Geometry lt ENTER gt CUR VE connect points with smooth curves lt ENTER gt sPOINT connect points with straight lines lt ENTER gt lt ENTER gt A
122. 4 84 LOSA CS SO EN EAS Ee t 9 BS LOG NAS MOTA EDS TRA WO HASA LOS VESSE 1950 IER E Di E E EE TESA Et e EE iia EAS AN LAS WES IO 30 20 ING DS os PA GSA Ligo IVA Sal ISA be CAJAS USOS Computed Traverse Example Saved As A Control CTL File Lo ACIER 2 NM JOB TRAVEXAM 3 ID STATE HWY 1136 4 CM CONTROL FILE Oe DT 03 26 1998 6 HD NAD 83 1996 Any SDMS compliant data 7 VD NAVD 88 tags may follow the AC PR en UL M3 Se ZN 4802 10 AC 0S ales IER 12 AO AS L E 14 ZC 448 225 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 43 L LS Whe ES E r AOE Call 22 2303 24 DD 267 Ao 28 SEL 307 sie SE See 34 SR EE She Soe EE 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 20 Sil e RO AC ENE ZER KOR WAG PE AC PINE MCE E AGS ER AC PINGS Es E GIE IPID S AC PN MES XE GE EE AC PN SS XG AGS EK AC BANGS YOt OE ACS POS CNR ET BS 26 80101 427 853960 738 438 652 CREE OS 101 VIUDA 853606 076 444 133 TRAV PIL OS 102 79053 258 e AY gS Mab Dear IE AL OS 103 SAA 854423 960 458 927 TRAV PT OS 39 78484 9389 855651 863 433 482 CORTADO ES 36 78462 065 856487 098 CIRIA Jee Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix 12 44 Level Run Task TK LEV Project PRJ File ke PR LEVEXAM PRJ 25 TK LEV SC AC PR 4 ID HWY 136 Sy TES OKA Du S5N 76428 Ts NM PROJECT 89 123
123. 40 See Ik 7S SIE as VT 87 3846 42 DS 698 496 43 SHORO 44 AC 0S 45 PN 102 46 SE DE EE 47 RE see es 48 SEIS ES 49 AC BS 507 PN 101 Sl PDSTRAV PT 52 HZ 0 53 Mt 2114 54 DS 698 496 55 AC FS 50 PN 103 ra PD TRAV PT Se SE EE 597 EE 60 DSS SIS 61 SENO 2 GR AC 0S 697 ENENG 64 ID Sanaa PT GE EE 66 SENOR ST AC ABS 68 PNSLOZ2 G2 EBL PE TON HZ 0 aly VT 89 0145 2 DSE VIS STT TS AC FS 74 FNS 25 W AD SCAU RIE PE Se BAS USS OSO PTS VAER Sala MOTO er EE We SH 4 84 80 AC 0S 81 PN 35 EE EDS SE ER 194 9 84 SH 4 84 Siok YC 78484 989 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 13 SE 100 HL OE AC PN RD HZ WAES DS AC PN E HZ WAES DS SH AZ ER SIND ANS BS 103 TRAV PT 0 88 4950 TELAS 6 AZ FS 36 CIRTDAN 181 5540 90 3020 39057593 Soll SD Se Er 15332309 Examples The Computed Traverse Example Saved As A Control CTL File LORO AECI SACOS AC PN CH OE 448 225 ICI SE BS BAG JSO ISSA TIIS 738 438 652 CERE SE OS Sp EE 853606 076 444 133 SPL RAW PT OS Su EE E EE SE SE RANA 105 OS MISAS Al 854423 960 458 927 SILA PT 305 25 78484 989 IIGS 863 2433 482 SC TRI SE SS 136 78462 065 856487 098 N Q D Q EE OS 27 80281 016 853432 237 CINE Jeb Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 14 Examples Level Run Example The level run task
124. 67 SILI 68 IH 0000 Sor AC BS TOs Es SE FE HOUSE V2 XC 10000 0000 WS YC 10180 9330 74 ZC 99999 Ue XX 10000 0000 76 VOCS MOTS SSO Tie ZZ 498 4164 Wess SECU TOR SH 0000 80 HZ 0000 SE AC SS 82 ENERO PN assigned to the next taped point by the post processing software Se FE HOUSE 84 XX 10068 6824 So ANOS NANO Sd 86 ZIZ2501 6167 Ee SES HE 88 SH 0000 89 HZ 90 0000 90 VT 86 5650 Se DS 60 0850 SG AC 0S GER NEO 94 FE HOUSE 5 XX 10068 6824 96 TAK GET e SI EE 987 SES AVA SS IH 0000 MOORA BS 101 PN 100 102 FE HOUSE EE 104 YY 10152 9848 TOS EZ KEE IOG Stan EIS ESO 000 OE Eag 0000 COMA CESS DLO PN LOZ PN assigned to the next taped point by the post processing software 111 EE SHOUSE WIAA ee SAAS WIS SNES OLS DATA LA YAS NOL ST JE SIESIVA IG Sele OW 117 HZ 270 0000 Maley WANS SO OOOO LES DSSS CONO ZORA COS UA is INE AO JEE DESEO USE EE MAA ONES DEn SOL t25 AASDOL GNET LAC SILSIVA EELER JS o EIS LASS EN All 130 FE HOUSE 131 XX 10068 6824 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 86 Appendix LIA ES MIST SSA T357 ZALDO GST is ES TETA ISS Shi 0000 136 HZ 0000 IST EE Ee EOS PN assigned to the last taped point by the post processing software 139 FE HOUSE 140 XX 10126 4909 Ee EECH de EE 144 SH 0000 EECHELEN 146 VT 90 0000 147 DS 44 0000 148 BG BEGIN
125. 814 400 2300 BEGIN CHAIN LIST CH sIm 309 Figure Number Assigned by post processing Software OA ZA 2 6 CH EP2 310 Figure Number Assigned by post processing Software TA NG i BS END CHAIN LIST OS A A ASE SS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix 12 93 Appendix Beginning and Ending Chains Using Common Feature Codes and Shot Identification Individual chains can also be created using the same feature code for chains of the same type by indicating when each particular chain begins and ends This is done by adding the shot identification tag with the begin chain SI BC response to the shot where the chain begins and adding the shot identification tag with the end chain SI EC response to the shot where the chain ends For example the points for the left and right edge of pavement chain may be given feature code EP as shown in Figure 6 10 Connectivity Using The Feature Code Method Point number indicates the survey shot sequence A Figure 6 10 Connectivity by Feature Code and Shot Identification The project file using the shot identification to begin and end a chain would contain the data that follows Le ACSS 2a PN 10 3 HES EE 4 EE e EE 5 VT 87 2649 Of DS 109 090 HS SUB E Begin Left Pavement Edge 8 AC SS Do BNSAII LOR EFELER mE HAEA DA NEO Ids VT 87 4540 M36 Debt EIS 14 AC SS tigers IEI9 LS FESEP Ali HZ 250 2943 I VRET OOSA 19 DS 338 430 RE
126. 999 18 46 43 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 84 Appendix The Calculated file Using the shot sequence listed the post processing software would display the calculated shot information and describe the chain in the SDMS calculated file CAL as TL Ze Ee 2 PN 9 3 FE BU 4 XX 10085 4876 Os OEA 00 y ee 6 ALERT ANA 7 SH S0000 8 RAS TOTSES oF VEAS OSOS 10 DS 254 9300 iig AC SS WA PN 10 1B FE SU 14 XX 10000 0000 J r EES iio ZZ 498 4164 7 SH 5 0000 TB HZ 0000 Wye VT 90 3006 20x DS 180 9400 Sa AC TA DER 0S 10 DS BS 9 24 PN 100 25 CD OUR HOUSE 26 AD R 34 Zain AD SRO Oye Zo AD L 38 0 29 AD R 44 30 AC 0S Sc PN TO 32 FE HOUSE Sor XC 10000 0000 34 VCE hot BTS So URI Sor XX 10000 0000 Sie Yves OES ORS SO 38 ZZ 498 4164 SUF SIE Assigned to all taped points in the AC TA by the post processing software 40 IH 0000 41 AC BS 42 BNE 43 FE HOUSE 44 XX 10085 4876 45 YY 10240 1582 46 SS YAA 47 SI TA 48 SH 0000 49 HZ 0000 505 AC SS Gull PN 100 PN assigned to the first taped point by the post processing software SE FE HOUSE 58 XOXO OMI ASAS 54 SO SAR OLA SS 552 ZZ 498 4165 r SI TA ST e SH 0000 597 HZ 90 0000 Sd VT 90 0000 60 DS 34 0000 Sie AC 0S 62 PN 100 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 85 Appendix ES FE HOUSE 64 XX 10019 3623 OSs YY 10152 9848 66 ZZ 498 4165
127. 999 18 46 43 The Calculated CAL File The shot sequence used and the resulting chain list AC CH would be listed in the SDMS calculated file CAL as AC SS PN 9 PE BU XX 10085 4876 ENEE 2Z 497 7211 SH 5 0000 HAE RS 53 3 EE 10 DS 254 9300 i AC HSS Ws PN 10 13 FE SU 14 XX 10000 0000 Sy EES EN T6 ZZ 498 4164 TA SH 5 0000 TB HZ 0000 ILS VT 90 3006 Zoe DS 180 9400 EE ss COMIN a BA AC TA 22 os 10 Le BS 9 24 PN 100 Zor CD OUR HOUSE 26 AD R 34 Dale ADAR OOR 28 AD L 38 0 29 AD R 44 SOF INDIRA Sho da Skis AD R 104 GE AC OS SSF PN 10 34 FE HOUSE 397 XC 10000 0000 50 YC 10180 9330 Sie EE She XX 10000 0000 SOF SEET 40 ZZ 498 4164 41 STIA Assigned to all taped points in the AC TA by the post processing software SE IH 0000 43 AC BS 44 PN 9 45 FE HOUSE 46 XX 10085 4876 47 OA OS iz 48 ZZ 497 7211 49 SE LAN 50 SH 0000 onl HZ 0000 BA INES SC PN 100 PN assigned to the first taped point by the post processing software 54 FE HOUSE Dd LOBOS ZAS 50 ASADAS y SSA STe ZZ 498 4165 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 73 Appendix Ser SESIA SEL SH 0000 60 HZ 90 0000 Gil VT 90 0000 625 DS 34 0000 63 AC 0S 64 PN 100 gom FE HOUSE 66 XX 10019 3623 Cie YY 10152 9848 68 ZZ 498 4165 69 EE Oe IH 0000 Pike AC BS E ENSLIO VE FE HOUSE 74 XC 10000 0000 1D E OTSO ISSO WG WES
128. As with horizontal tasks if the closures do not meet tolerances the user is asked if adjustment should continue or not If not the unadjusted values are put in the CTL file Three Wire Level Task TK 3WR SDMS Collector will compute the error of vertical closure and the stadia imbalance If closure is within tolerance elevations are adjusted just like for single wire leveling based on number of turns SDMS Collector does NOT adjust three wire levels based on length of sights as some survey texts suggest Cross Section Task TK XSE SDMS Collector first computes the single wire level loop if one exists It then computes the sideshot elevations Finally if there is an active horizontal alignment SDMS Collector will merge the partially computed project file with this alignment to compute the XX and YY for each sideshot The end result will be the similar to a radial topography computation having an active horizontal alignment in that every sideshot would contain an XX YY ZZ However in this case the station and offset values would have been measured so they would be labeled with ST and OF instead of SS and OO The level closure is not adjusted even if there is a closed level loop in the project file SDMS Collector also supports Hand Level Shots These would be computed similar to regular sideshots after adjustment of the main level loop Chapter 3 for the procedure used to enter hand level shots Note Computed values in an
129. CHAIN LIST LAS INCE OL 150 FE HOUSE Weil wees UG WIS NO OO OA r02 E 153 EG END CHAIN LIST 154 CP 06 08 2000 14 08 15 Chain Activity and Chain Data Item Chain Activity The chain activity AC CH can be used in the project file during data collection and in the resulting calculated file to define a chain manually It can be used along with any of the other connectivity methods described Shot order is not critical when using the chain activity in this manner but the points listed must be in the project file in which the manually added chain activity appears The point list PL and chain list CH data items are used to specify which points connect in what order The PL data item is an exception to the rule that only the last occurrence of a data item in an activity is significant All PL data items in the chain activity are used to create the list of points to be connected The post processing software should interpret the last point of any PL line as connecting to the first point in the next PL line This rule is followed for each PL data item encountered within a specific chain activity AC CH The primary advantage to this method is that points may be shot in any order Another advantage is that it is easy to use the same measured point in more than one chain so that chains join and intersect cleanly at the same common point Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 87 Appendix Connectivity Using The Ch
130. DECIAS OLAS ISI SO OM ENS chain being defined within the taping Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 77 TOR TOR 20 Dale 22A Gi 24 ADO 267 Ze PN EEs HES OD EE Appendix E EE 100 Beginning Point Number to be used for the points computed within the taping activity HOUSE Feature to be used for the new chain 5 Figure Code to be used for the chain OUR HOUSE Chain Description AA Right 34 feet use the same elevation as PN 10 NAO es Right 60 feet Add 3 2 feet to the elevation of the preceding point ly 8 0 Left 38 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point R 44 Right 44 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point 9 Close the new chain on point number 9 09 18 1999 18 46 43 Calculated File with OD in the Taping Activity Using OD to close the figure the post processing software would display the calculated shot information and describe the chain in the SDMS calculated file CAL as E AC Ze PN on FRE 4 XX SE E or ZZ ie SH Ce HZ 9m WEIS Oe DOR SCH AC Us PN Se FE 14 XX TO SAR Ls ZZ ate ge Sis Les EAS TOS AVALES 20 DOS Sch AC S OSE SEN BSE 24 PN SE CDE 26 AD ad AD 28 AD 29 AD 30 OD Sd AC sae PN don FE 34 EI SE XEF BO AOR S XX Ser YAYES 29m ZZ ss 9 BU 10085 4876 10240 1582 497 7211 5 0000 19 3538 90 3045 254 9300 ss 10 SU 10000 0000 10180 9330 498 4164 5 0000
131. DMS Collector is in Batch Computation mode it will return missing values for the coordinates of the respected occupied station and continue Note In SDMS Collector resection computations are based on a link traverse solution Therefore only the last two resection shots will be used Note In SDMS Processor all resection points shot are used as part of the least squares adjustment In all cases the HZ VT and DS must be included in the activity This information is used to compute the occupied station coordinates and establish orientation of the survey Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 15 SDMS Tasks and Activities Perpendicular Offsets Right or Left If the user is unable to place the target on the desired object or is unable to sight the object directly the target may be perpendicularly offset from the line of sight to the right or left of the desired object A sideshot is taken to the target and the taped offset is entered in the activity with the data tag AC SS PN FE PD HZ VT DS OF When viewing the desired object from the instrument as shown in Figure 3 1 if the target or prism is to the right the offset is positive If the prism is to the left of the object the offset is negative Figure 3 1 Perpendicular offsets left or right Offsets in Front or Back of the Object If the user cannot place the target on the desired object but is able to place it directly in front or behind the object
132. DS AC PN THs GER MAES XG ACS AC ENE HZ WALES Se AC PN 6 BS 2 24 5604 88 5748 LAG a S70 EG 103 ot ZE Z5 OMEO 8825338 381 168 SE SS 104 IP SW COR LOT44 BLK12 134 0738 87 2455 230 603 ss 105 R W MON B 27 HZ WAS DS CM CM AC PN HZ SEES 566 994 JEE 86 2818 676 971 MULTI STUB MORELO ss 106 ZEUS 88 5542 SS 107 308 0349 E 415 505 FS 4 198 2428 89 3422 1348 459 OS 4 SO 6 6250 00 VIVO IS 9012 03 BS 3 354 5026 O SS 1348 459 FS 5 NGS PT JONES BS Wales DS MCE dC AC PN ED HZ WAES Uas AC PN 226 3004 88 1906 MALS GAL DOSIS SIZES SS 108 NE COR SEC 6 292 2006 85 4946 369 439 ss 105 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix 12 32 LS Sio 134 T57 LS WST Las LS 140 LATS 142 143 PE AZ WAES DS AC PN ED Ee YES DS ER HZ R W MON B 27 LPA OOS 87 4228 806 761 SI 102 WDGY TOWER 86 2102 US SSS OG fA LOD TUS ears Appendix Computed Combined T p ask Example Saved As A Control CTL File o AC PR 0 30040 r NM ID CM EEN HD VD UL AC PNS NaC XG LES DJS NOS PN MES XG ZC SES AC PN MOR Xe AGS PES AC PN YG XC GE R W MON B 45 ACS ENS YGS XG Ls WDGY TOWER AC SC eS AGs AGS FEO AC SOS AOS XG OS BM 2356 1 AC 104 IOs XG AGS PEY AC PD PD PN PN PD PN
133. Direction aa a File Management Funetione Special Considerations Disk Operations COMMUNICATIONS The Default PC Communication Poronmteterg EE Sending a File to Another Computer eene a E iE a O AEA EO E EE E Ai Receiving a File from Another Computer CHAPTER 9 CUSTOMIZING SDMS COLLECTOR cssssssssscssescssescssssssssssscssscessssessncessncsssnsosssssessssesassessseers 9 1 THE LOCATION OF THE CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONS EDITING THE CONFIGURATION FULES The Order of Items in a Configuration Fe Editing and Saving a Configuration iner ree E O TE OAA E E E THE I O CONFIGURATION IO CFGo ococniininninioninonos I O Communication Devices I O Communication Parameters eee VO Ettel ege kee EES EEEE THE PROJECT CONFIGURATION PROJECT Ch THE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SS ChO non non nonncnncnnnnnos THE CONTROL FILE CONFIGURATION CNTL CFG TOLERANCE CONFIGURATION TOL CEO THE TASK ACTIVITY DEFINITION FILE TASK TGS How to Change Task and Activity Definiton e 9 9 CHAPTER 10 GETTING HELP AND USNG MACROS GETTING HELP A A E E ETE The SDMS Collector Help Files How to Get Help ossee KEYBOARD MAGROS amp deed EEN EEReEER aaa Bilin SM SR RR Gd Us bs EE ao alot ean iis Using Macrog Examples of Macros EC O TA NOIN o PE TE ebe e Kee e 11 1 CONFIGURATION SEIN ee e a a a a Be Sea EE a iaa EE 11 1 RADIAL TOPOGRAPHY EXAMPLE ener aa TA ETA EE a EEEN EER 11 2 Computed Radial Topography Example S
134. Disk Disk Operations Date 04 18 96 Time 16 49 45 Disk Space Avail 270991360 Pick a Disk Command Figure 8 1 The Disk Operations Menu From the disk operations menu the user can e Press lt F1 gt Directory to view a directory listing e Press lt F2 gt Copy to copy files e Press lt F3 gt Rename to rename files e Press lt F4 gt Delete to delete files e Press lt Esc gt to return to starting point either the main menu or data collection Note The lt F4 gt Delete key does not appear when file removal protection is turned on RP Yes in the system configuration file SDMS Collector offers a built in file manager that can be used without exiting the program A file must be named for most of these operations This includes Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 8 1 Disk Management and Communication e Opening a project e Editing a file e Performing disk operations e Performing I O send receive and print operations The File Request Prompt When SDMS Collector asks the user to name a file it uses the path set underthe default path data tag DP in the I O configuration file Notice that the insert toggle is on as indicated by Ins in the upper right corner of the screen It can be turned off and on by pressing lt Ins gt The user may change the displayed path then type in a file name and press lt ENTER gt to select the file or press lt Esc gt to exit file selection Figure 8
135. E FG Figure Code to be used for the chain 8 AD Angle distance and difference in elevation to the next point SS AD Angle distance and difference in elevation to all other points as needed WOE PL Point List to indicate previously shot points to include as the last points in the chain created dota CM Add at any time Two radial measurements establish the first segment of the chain within each taping activity These points are used as the back sight BS and occupied station OS to start defining the figure to be taped Note The BS and OS data items are required for the post processing software to generate data for the taped points Therefore both data items must contain a response for each taping activity entered in a project file Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 69 Appendix The Point Number PN indicates the point number to be used for the first point taped Subsequent point numbers will increment as defined in the TAGS HLP file The feature code data item FE designates the feature of the chain being built by the taping activity The figure code data item FG designates the Figure Code of the chain being defined The angle distance list defines the direction horizontal distance and difference in elevation from the preceding point to the point that follows The format is AD Direction Horizontal Distance Vertical Distance Note The AD line must include at least the direction and horizon
136. F HEHEH ss 16 EPL 1 8 5 AS OS 90 3006 LA d d d d d dd ss 23 EPL d 5 ZN 89 1642 210 24 did d d d dd ss 24 EPL d ISI 90 1432 LEO SS d d d d d ss 25 EPL iL SOR Ose 89 1642 180 24 d d d d d d ss 26 EPL AT 9 1642 55 24 L id EE egin Chain Li T E ES AC Pi CO s Se e PO pp B O SO ea Eno Chain ls OPA TOSE als Connectivity by Taping Appendix Start the gap in the chain and end the gap at the next point shot with the same figure code Gap ends at this point The figure will then continue 46 43 st EFT PAVEMENT EDGE EE 8 15 2 ALG Taping is an activity specifically designed for defining chains around buildings or other figures when it may not be practical or desirable to use an electronic Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 68 Appendix instrument to collect all of the points that define that building or figure This procedure allows the user to tape the horizontal distance along each side to approximate the direction and to indicate the approximate difference in elevation between two angle points Before the taping activity can be used two points must be recorded using the sideshot activity to establish a beginning reference line for the taped measurements Typically the total station is used to measure these two points immediately before beginning the taping activity but this is no
137. Figure Number Assigned by post processing Software O 2 E ALS CH EP 310 Figure Number Assigned by post processing Software A lo LO LY END CHAIN LIST 05 01 2001 09 05 35 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix 12 96 Appendix Generating Chains and Points Parallel to a Previously Defined Chain The Calculated File A chain parallel to a list of points shot previously or parallel to a chain figure defined previously in the same file can also be generated by the post processing software This is accomp lished by adding horizontal offsets OF and or vertical distances DV to the Chain Activity AC CH This process also generates the points that make up the new chain My AC CH FE CURB PG She PN 50000 E HEA CH 10 is made of PN s 40 42 for this example IPE Sl Sy ORONS o DV 0 5 RETOS ike CP 09 18 1999 18 46 43 Nu GA N 212x009 cul The example chain activity shown above indicates a chain with the feature CURB is to be generated 0 5 feet right and 0 5 feet above each point of the chain defined by the points list and chain list included The Figure Code FG is used as the identifier of the chain to be created The point number for each point generated will be based on the point number that has been entered in that particular chain activity For examp le in the chain activity listed above the first point generated parallel to PN 1 will be PN 50001 A new point will be generated f
138. IDO E XX 10000 0000 eke YY 10180 9330 Were 2ZZ 498 4164 80 SSA slo SH 0000 227 HZ 0000 E AC SS 84 PN 101 PN assigned to the next taped point by the post processing software Een FE HOUSE 86 XX 10068 6824 E KEN Se 88 ZA BIS OL 5 GALS 7 ed SI TA 90 SH 0000 Ske HZ 90 0000 O28 VT 86 5650 OBE DS 60 0850 94 AC 0S len PN 101 96 FE HOUSE ST XX 10068 6824 03 SOS ALS Se SEI ZZ 501 6167 mt St OIE 40 0 00 102 AGsBS 103 PN 100 104 FE HOUSE LOS OS US SOAs GS ee es 107 22 498 4165 LOS SIESTA 109 SH 0000 LAO KASo OOOO TL ALTOS LAA seis OZ PN assigned to the next taped point by the post processing software Te PESHOUSE IA NO OS 220 Mt Ia ta LA LS AS SHOAL ELST LLE ALTA SAS EA 00 0 IO EZ ZO OOOO 120 VT 90 0000 SE SS E EE E ee Ee 124 FE HOUSE len MO OS ZO AT e ENE e SLTA Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 74 Appendix UAT eg IS GNET LAs SIES INA WAS a OOO TOMAC BS Lao ENSO 132 FE HOUSE 133 XX 10068 6824 LS ASUS SSA LS AE ASS ASG SESIA EELER 1S See EAs 0000 139s Gees EE KA PN assigned to the next taped point by the post processing software 141 FE HOUSE 142 XX 10126 4909 EE MAA 2225016168 IAS TETA 146 SH 0000 147 HZ 90 0000 148 VT 90 0000 149 DS 44 0000 E RE ISL LNTO 152 FE lt HOUSE 153 XX 10126 4909 Ee ALS 1555 VAS OIL oles ISG SIESIY IS
139. In the table that follows the lt Ctrl gt key is represented by the character For example D means press and hold lt Ctrl gt and then press D Key Function T Moves the cursor to the first line in the file Top of File Moves the cursor to the last line in the file Bottom of File lt Home gt Moves the cursor to the top line of the display window lt End gt Moves the cursor to the bottom line of the display window Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 7 3 The Editor tag to the right side of the colon data tag lt Shift gt lt Tab gt Moves the cursor from the right side of the colon data ee deg lt backspace gt Moves the cursor to the left one character at a time and ee e ne Deletes the character under the cursor Toggles insert mode on or off Deletes the line on which the cursor is sitting place the line in the recall buffer Inserts a new line above the cursor Reviews the definition of a data tag or restricted response if any Brings up prompt for user related to saving changes or not AL Clears the line from where to cursor is sitting to the end of the line and does not place the line in the recall Changing Data in a Line 1 Use the sl gt and lt gt keys to position the cursor on the line to be changed This highlights the line 2 Type over the old data with new information The user can change the data tag the data field or both Inserting a Line ne Positio
140. MH 70 3524 91 1548 436 472 UE sale OZ OE VCP CR 98 TOUS SE COR BLDG E Pn Wes 2684 US 200 934 potas Ol Ge 1004 NE COR BLDG 251 5246 88 2942 NS Fell 00 El LOOS INE COR BLDG ROOF 261 4352 05 14 95 Li suis Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Examples 11 6 Examples Computed Radial Topography Example Saved As A Control CTL File PELO OD ATO OT ee eh Oo JO UD bs GA H Oe Rh D Om DD DG GG ss vs vs ds ds Gs GA GA GA YY YU Y Y WNNNNNNNNDNDN Ss GA b t OO oO JODAS G b t OOv Oo J OD GA b i Ou oO J OD E GAbh t OH VO De le A ES O 2 1 4 4 CTRL MON B 2 2 4 S 5 See 73128 360 244 080 TESTS LALO 439 460 CTRL MON BING SST 2042 498 AT ST IO ad 448 391 TBM SS 1000 PLS oe Use 473633 447 435 041 247 MAPLE SS Soot E SANS A 429 667 SAN MH TUE 1002 hee ose BATS Sil A 419 367 EE SS ZOOS Se E 472862 622 443 704 SE COR BLDG 359 1004 1696293 SE 446 421 NE COR BLDG DIS AER EE 472889 227 25955279 NE COR BLDG ROOF Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 7 Examples Traverse Example Traverse TK TRA can be either a horizontal task to collect data with X and Y components or a horizontal and vertical task to collect data with X Y and Z components A traverse is normally defined as a series of occupied stations backsights and foresights Other types of
141. MS Collector Release 3 4x and earlier Those versions use 99999to indicate the NULL value SDMS contains many tags that can be used by a survey crew to communicate how points are to be connected in a drawing used in a DTM routine etc 10 The Geometry GM data tag is used to define a point as a line point or a curve point If the activity has a GM C line this can indicate to a CADD software that this point is on a Curved line Various algorithms can also be written to evaluate how many points in succession are defined as C curve points to determine if the points are to be connected with straight line segments or curved line segments If the user does not define this GM data tag the default value of line point is normally assumed and all connections would be made with straight line segments The user would have to review their CADD processing software rules to know how GM may be interpreted and what happens in various ombinations of points with GM values 11 The Class CL data tag can be used to define a point as a Feature point or a Ground point for DTM software This allows the user to collect information on points for two dimensional 2D presentation that do not have valid or accurate elevations or for use in three dimensional 3D computations or presentations that do have valid or accurate elevations The options are currently CL F for a 2D feature point and CL G for a 3D ground point The default in this case would probably be
142. MS COLLECTOR MENUS The Main Menn The Project Mode Menus Tit Mi Rai The 2D and 3D Stakeout Menu ic The Edit Menu The VO Menn The Disk Operations Menu ThE e SIA LAHIRAN DESNE N DO DE T A EET AT E AEE E E EESE TE sad The Filename Prompt erain has LE EE 2 21 TE 2 22 CHAPTER 3 SDMS TASKS AND ACTIVITIES occncnccaonononsononsacionoroncononononcocononorcrnononencononononcocononcrnonononencocononorcacononoso 3 1 HORIZONTAL KEE The Traverse Task RR a The Radial Topography Task TK RTO The Combined Task TK COM The Control Network Task TK CONI The Photo Control Task TK POL The Terrain Model Task TK TMO cono n EAEE E E aE VERTICAL TASKS CA The Three Wire Level Task TK 3 WR eocenie n RAE R E E EEEN E TAER RARER The Level Run Task TK LEV The Cross Section Task The Profile Task TK PRO SPECIAL SURVEY PROCEDURES Perpendicular Offsets Right Or Left ee EENS Offsets in Front or Back of the Object Utility Elevations ui Remote Elevations TEA As Check Activity Figure Activity Defining Connectivity in the SDMS Project File CHAPTER A DATA COLLECTION 10 cssssssssssssnssssnssessssessssnssesessessssesssessssesssesssessssscessscesencessnconsaconsassessssosassessseess 4 1 QBENCA PROJECTE Eege e BENS TRESS Ope Nm Oe Ee AEAEE E OA e Open an Existing Project USING A TOTAL STATION Naming a Total Srorton Getting Measurements
143. N FE PD RR FE PD RR ZC PN PN FE PD RR ZC 12 20 AC TP AC SS AC PR AC CK Three Wire Level Task 3WR Activity AC OS AC BS AC FS AC EC AC CC AC TP AC PR AC CK AC TX Cross Section Task XSE Activity AC OS AC BS AC FS AC SS AC ST AC EC AC CC AC UE AC TP AC PR AC CK AC TX Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix RR PD PN FE PD RR Default Data Tags PN FE PD ZC RR PN FE PD RR PN FE PD RR ZC PN FE PD RR ZC RR PN CM Default Data tags PN FE PD ZC RR PN FE PD RR FE PD OF RR ST PN FE PD RR ZC PN FE PD RR ZC PN FE PD RR RR PN CM 12 21 Appendix The Default Configuration and Help Files Control Configuration The Control Configuration File CNTL CFG We BSCR AM pee ia The Control DT Been Help File CNTL HLP Wg eegen Cin se Com ND O IAAHHWNEO ER NH 3 N p N bh WN N ws UO Configuration VO L1 12 0 Primary Location Control File eS MECO L2 12 0 Second H enter L2 cont ary CEI Or file name Location Control File file name s1 12 0 Primary Staking Control File H enter Sl con Sa 2A 0 Secona H enter S2 con ary ELO EEE file name Staking Control File file name WC 12 0 Write Control File D enter WC cont HA 12 DU Horizo D rol ntal file name Alignment File enter HA hor
144. PN SDMS Collector will always find the first one when accessing that control file If the user presses the lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt to compute the last measured shot or another shot in the current project file SDMS Collector will compute the required coordinates and present screens similar to shown above If the selected point has known coordinates in the project file the difference between the computed coordinates and the known coordinates are also reported as DX DY and DZ values The 2D and 3D Computations and Stake Out Functions SDMS Collector has a number of 2D and 3D computation and stake out functions available while in the project data collection mode The computation functions provided are e Calculate the azimuth bearing and horizontal distance between two points e Locate a point at a given azimuth bearing distance and elevation from a known point e Calculate X Y and Z coordinates and station offset values relative to the active horizontal alignment vertical alignment and specified superelevation This can be done by using point numbers station and offset or station and feature from a control file or by hand entering the required data e Set slope stakes based on a known or computed hinge point and catch point e Set points based on a slope ratio The stakeout functions enable the user to perform stakeout operations based on point data and roadway design information Therefore based on the files name
145. RE Ge ALTOS Le PN 200 24 KAS 25 XO 26 ZO Soros ale IID 23 Ao oe Ao PN 201 20 107 Ske XO Sy E 7242 Bor PD 24 VCP NW 34 AC UE 357 PN 202 207 YG SR ACE SEI EE 39 EDEN Camere Ee 40 AC FS 41 BNE 42 1408 43 XC 44 ACS MEL 5 22012 45 PD DOT 8242 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 49 Appendix Profile Task TK PRO Project PRJ File ke PR PROEXAM Zs TRIERO Se AC PR 4 ID HWY 136 Sy dE BI Du SN 76428 Te NM PROJECT 89 123 8 TE 28 OF BESOS HOR OB K ADAMS alls RE K ADAMS 12 EE RE EE WE CLEAR 14 IRENE T5 Chal 16 LOLA S12 EY UA D 18 arse LS 18198 1 207 VR SDMS Collector 3 4 0 SE AC 0S 22 BNE DS PD USGS 81L 1964 24 MESAS ALS GT AC BS 26 Ee 20 ACISS 28 ST18 60 29 CHRO BO RUNS he SO od AC SS BAe ST oa Se OS 0 34 RREZ oo AOS oo Seedy Sy OERO 38 RR 4 26 390 AC SS 40 Sws LOO 41 ORO 42 RR 7 4 43 ACESS 44 Siri2700 45 ORRO 46 RUE 0 47 ACs oS 48 SE L2 20 49 OF 20 50 RR 6 9 Se AC TES BA PN 2 Soe PDESPK INPE 54 E 20 GE E SH 56 OF 45 57 AC BS 58 RO 2 DOr AC HOS 60 STS TAWO 61 OBRO bes EEN Sa AC SS 64 SEAS 65 OF 0 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 50 Appendix 66 RR 5 49 UA AC SS 68 ST 14 00 PER OF 0 O EE ES AC SS 72 ST 14 45 Vda OF 0 74 RR 6 10 De AC SS Te SPs 15400 ES OF 0 mon RR 6 01 Se AC SS 80 E 00
146. S ONS IAE MESE AAS e SI LEa Sils US RAS LESS ge Lo DOS LAs EZ IAE NE T2 EE AS JS O MS AAS JS SE MS LS e BATE EAU TS Te TS 08 Ee E AS VARS PAS SI Ne dome LST o dig VIS Cs Za 292 140 FE MA 2 0 68 MA OE dE ZAE 144 SI 145 CES EZ MATES NVE EE 149 BG Lego Aes IST GAHE Lar GS eso Seis 15d 8G LS E Appendix 2 0000 2 0000 Ss Su PN assigned to the next taped point by the post processing software HOUSE 10090 3226 e ae 501 6167 TA 0000 270 0000 90 0000 38 0000 Os 102 HOUSE LOOS 2216 KOLES OLA 501 6167 TA 0000 BS POL HOUSE 10068 6824 LOLS 534 BOL ler TA 0000 0000 SS 103 PN assigned to the last taped point by the post processing software HOUSE 10126 4909 10180 9743 501 6168 TA 0000 90 0000 90 0000 44 0000 BEGIN CHAIN LIST CH HOUSE 5 70 LOO TOTA LOA TOSS END CHAIN LIST 06 08 2000 14 08 15 The Project file Closing ACTA using C in the Angle Distance AD List Using the example shown in Figure 6 4 the building can also be closed by adding the letter C preceded by a comma C at the end of the last angle distance AD list Using this method tells SDMS Processor to close the figure on the back sight point that is listed with the particular taping activity The data will be collected in the project file as ACEROS BINEAO FE HOUSE SHR ES EES BEE EE ACESS PN 10 VO 0 J0040N Aa
147. SDMS CAL file produced by SDMS Processor will always have a double character tag Note All other SDMS tasks are basically subsets of those discussed above and would follow similar rules related to computations and adjustments Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 28 The Editor Chapter 7 The Editor Start Editing SDMS Collector provides the user with an ASCII file editor so it is not necessary to exit SDMS Collector to edit most files e The SDMS Collector editor edits these files e Raw data files e Edited data files e Coordinate control files Alignment files User shot sequence files The task activity definitions file TASK TGS Configuration files Calculated files Note To maintain file integrity the SDMS Collector help files can be edited only by using a generic ASCII editor See Chapter 9 Customizing SDMS Collector for details The editor works the same way on all SDMS Collector files but how the user accesses each type of file varies with the file type To Edit This Type of File Use This Main Menu Key Edited project files extension EDI lt F2 gt Edit Task activity definitions TASK TGS lt F2 gt Edit Sequence Files extension SEQ lt F2 gt Edit Configuration files extension CFG lt F7 gt Configurations In project mode press lt F7 gt Functions then lt F2 gt Edit In project mode press lt F7 gt Functions then lt F7 gt Configurations The edit function key can be accessed from
148. SDMS system consists of e AASHTOWare SDMS Collector User Guide which contains the rules of SDMS and instructions for data collection editing computing files customizing file management stakout and more It also includes default listings of the configuration files data tags task and activity definitions as well as many examples of collected data files e AASHTOWare SDMS Collector Getting Started Manual which contains instructions for installing the software and for using the more common features of the software e The AASHTO SDMS Technical Data Guide 2000 which provides detailed information on the SDMS data structure This document is needed by anybody who wants to write translators to import and export SDMS data e AASHTOWare SDMS Processor User Guide is provided as an on line help within the SDMS Processor software Any of these documents can be obtained in Adobe PDF format or HTML format by downloading it for free from the AASHTO SDMS web site at http www aashtoware org sdms sdmsdown nsf Hard copies can also be obtained for a fee from AASHTO headquarters SDMS User Manual Overview Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter includes a general introduction to SDMS Collector software describes the SDMS documentation that is available as well as how this User Guide is laid out and describes how to install SDMS Collector software Chapter 2 SDMS Collector System Basics This chapter describes the basic SDMS data st
149. TK LEV is a vertical differential leveling task The occupied station AC OS enters the beginning elevation and signals the beginning of the task The elevation control is carried through a series of backsights and turning points The foresight activity AC FS is used for sights on permanent and temporary benchmarks for which elevations are known or desired HI 848 48 HI 841 90 AC OS E PN 1 PD USGS 31E 1957 PD USGS 31 D 1957 ZC 839 123 ZC 835 61 Ze Displayed Instructions and Comments Choose a From the main menu press lt F1 gt Project to open a Command project Type the project name LEVEXAM lt ENTER gt PRJ New Project Type LEV and press lt ENTER gt to select the traverse Enter Task TK task Type the elevation of 835 61 for the occupied station AC BS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested backsight A 2 cee benchmark AC BS Type TP over the displayed BS to select the turning point AS amp ooe aaea B a eeto ume pai RR Type 1 36 to enter the turning point rod reading AC TP Type BS over the displayed TP to select the backsight Type 7 94 to enter the observed rod reading at backsight A A activity Type point number 2 over the suggested point number 3 PD USGS 31D Change the point description to read USGS 31E 1957 1957 RR Type 9 37 to enter the rod reading at foresight AC FS SDMS Collector suggests a foresight activity But before Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 15
150. They control what kind of data the data item accepts alphanumeric numeric only or yes no responses e They control incrementing for data items such as point or figure numbers The SDMS Collector help files are File Name File Content CNTL HLP Control file configuration help IO HLP O configuration help PROJECT HLP Project configuration help SYS HLP System configuration help TAGS HLP Data tags help TOL HLP Tolerance definition help Note Make sure to understand the help file structure before editing a help file A help file contains e The data tag information line which contains the data tag the data field length the data type and the prompt name e A list of allowed or suggested responses if applicable following the data tag information line e A list of help messages pertaining to the data tag if applicable Note No data tags can be added to or deleted from the list in a help file Only responses to most data tags listed may be added or deleted Responses to the data tags TK and AC cannot be changed The Data Tag Information Line Using the ending station ES data tag in the TAGS HLP file as an example the information line for the tag is ES 3 2 Ending Station Y N YES lt ENTER gt An explanation of each entry on the information line can be found in the table that follows Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 10 1 Getting Help and Using Macros The two character data tag followed by a space
151. Total Stations Mid Project It may be necessary to change total station in the middle of a project due to a malfunction or for some other reason To do this set up the instrument and attach it to the data collector in the usual manner Then enter a new IT data tag with the new driver name for the instrument to be used Naming the Total Station on Reopening a Project When a Closed project is reopened the user must enter a new IT data tag to name the total station even if the instrument data item may have been entered in the project file already This is required to assure the crew has selected the correct instrument driver when reopening a project When a Suspended project is reopened the user does not have to rename the total station unless the type of the instrument is going to be changed When a project is suspended SDMS Collector automatically stores the value of the IT tag in a separate project specific file Getting Measurements from the Total Stations SDMS Collector provides the user with two function keys to collect measurement data from the total station lt F1 gt and lt F2 gt The lt F1 gt key is used to get the horizontal angle vertical angle and distance measurements while the lt F2 gt key is used to get the horizontal and vertical angles only See the section of this chapter Entering Data from Total Stations to get more detailed instructions Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 5 Data Collection
152. UE PN PD NO STATES POWER RR AC UE PN PD NWBELL TELE RR At MIOC press lt F3 gt Sequence and call EW SEQ Complete data entry for the first four sideshots top of pavement through the centerline When the fourth sideshot is complete the user is at MIOC and the sequence message line reads Level 1 Shot 3 The user then is ready to shoot the utility manhole The user temporarily interrupts EW SEQ to use UTILMH SEQ by pressing lt F3 gt Sequence to call the Level 2 sequence UTILMH SEQ The sequence message line reads Level 2 Shot 4 After the data for the Level 2 sideshot is entered the sequence message line reads Level 2 Shot 3 The user may now pick up the Minnegasco pipeline Drop the rod to the pipe and enter the data The sequence message line reads Level 2 Shot 2 When the Level 2 sequence is finished the sequence message line again reads Level 1 Shot 3 Skipping or Repeating Shots in Multiple Sequences To skip over a shot in a sequence press lt PgDn gt when SDMS Collector displays MIOC SDMS Collector advances to the next shot in the sequence Press lt PgDn gt once for each activity to be skipped Pressing lt PgDn gt on the last shot in the last sequence produces a harmless No More Shots in File message Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 5 7 User Shot Sequences If the user is in a Level 1 sequence and the next activity is a Level 2 sequence to be automatically called using the data tag pressi
153. UIRED The point number correlates the PI point with the point in the project control file OPTIONAL This is the stationing value of the second VPI of the vertical alignment The value may be either stationing format or decimal format REQUIRED NOTE If the station value could occur at two or more locations the format n is used n is a positive integer value used to indicate the section of the alignment in which the equation is located n 1 meaning between the beginning of the alignment and the first station equation n 2 second section etc If n is not given the first section of the alignment is assumed In other words there are no station equations involved The X coordinate for the second VPI of the vertical alignment based on the stationing of the associated horizontal alignment OPTIONAL The Y coordinate for the second VPI of the vertical Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 10 SDMS Collector System Basics alignment based on the stationing of the associated horizontal alignment OPTIONAL ZC XXxXXX xxx The elevation for the second VPI of the vertical alignment REQUIRED SI VPI As above L1 xxxx As above L2 xxxx As above AC Repeat as above to define each VPI in the vertical alignment Remember that the last VPI cannot contain vertical curve data See the Appendix for an example of a vertical alignment file Superelevation Files A superelevation file defines the vertical
154. VT 90 3006 Dale DS 180 94 bes XX BS YY d 60 EE dE CUA E G2 PN 42 63 FE EPL 64 SHS EES VAS e Ee 66 VT 90 3006 EG DSi 68 XX 69 YY HOR ZZ ttt AA E FE CURB Se FG 12 74 BN 50000 REG PTRS TV CHENG CH 10 is made of PN s 40 42 for this example THe Piso Ugh OF 0 5 Sia DVORE SR AC SS Gill 5 PN 50001 First point generated by the offsets being included in the chain activity at PN 1 82 ERTCURB SIS XX 84 YY Soe ZZ ttt EE ah PN 50002 Second point generated by the offsets being included in the chain activity at PN 2 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 98 94 95s Ge Mike 98 997 100 HE OAc OSS 104 105 106 LOT 108 dE LLO LE LI JS 114 LS 6 Ss 17 ES TON SE SE 1227 AST 124 T297 126 SCT AIS 6 12 dE Lk WS o LIS 134 So Sc LS She LS 140 EEr XX NES EE AC PN FE XX NEVER ZZ AC PN EE XX VOCS GE AC EE XX NENES ZZ AC PN PES XX MES ZZ CP BG AC EE ue PLES AC ERS FG Ris EG CEs CH RB 042 IRC 18 1999 18 46 43 gin Chain List EPL 10 40 CH CU 12 RB ae Appendix Third point generated by the offsets being included in the chain activity at PN 3 Fourth point generated by the offsets being included in the chain activity at PN 40 Fifth point generated by the offsets being
155. Version 3 5 The occupied station activity is a required activity It is used with a backsight activity to establish the initial instrument set up elevation The bench mark is not normally physically occupied but the AC OS signals the actual beginning of computational data The AC OS signals the beginning of computational data All preceding survey shots are ignored during computations Subsequent AC OS data items signal the end of the current level run and the beginning of another The elevation of the initial backsight point can be entered in the occupied station or the backsight activity with the ZC data item It can contain either the known elevation or an assumed value If the ZC is an unknown elevation and the user does not want to use an assumed value the default value is 0 Occupied station activities are not allowed for the intermediate set ups The backsight activity is used after an occupied station activity to establish the elevation of the first instrument set up Subsequent backsights are shot from each instrument set up to the previous turning point or foresight point The backsight contains the three wire rod readings at the backsight point i e the rod readings taken from the top R1 middle R2 and bottom R3 stadia wires in the telescope The backsight activity can also contain the description The first backsight in a level of the backsight point loop will actually be the description for the beginning Bench Mar
156. a item A data item consists of two parts Data Tag and Data Field A data tag is a two character alphanumeric code that describes the type of data in the data item A data field is the value of the data in the data item There are three types of data fields e measured values e computed values e descriptive values The hierarchical data structure of SDMS Figure 2 1 is e Each survey project will have one or more project PRJ files with each one involving one type of Task e Each Task consists of one or more Activities Each Activity consists of a set of data items The type of data in each data item is designated by the Data Tag e The data is stored in the Data Field Data Item Data Item Data Item Data Item Figure 2 1 SDMS data structure Different types of tasks activities and data tags are defined for SDMS Refer to the Appendix for the detailed definitions Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 2 SDMS Collector System Basics SDMS Collector File Types Project File Control File SDMS Collector data for a Task is stored in an ASCII text file called a Project File PRJ is used as the file extension for such project files In a project file each data item occupies one line The line begins with the two character data tag followed by a colon and then the data field Each activity begins with the AC data tag followed by a colon and a two character activity code The first two lines of a project file always
157. activity changes are temporary it may be preferable to create a user shot sequence instead of changing default definitions SDMS Collector then displays the TASK TGS file All editing tools are available The file is organized in the order shown in the Appendix That is the first task is traverse TK TRA with its activities and data items The second task is radial topography TK RTO and so on When a task or activity definition is changed be sure to include all data items and activities that are needed for computations Note The maximum number of activities in a task definition in TASK TGS is 20 If there are more than 20 activities in a task definition SDMS Collector will give a warning message when a project is started or reopened Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 9 9 Getting Help and Using Macros Chapter 10 Getting Help and Using Macros Getting Help SDMS Collector offers unique tools to make data collection fast and easy This chapter discusses e Getting help in SDMS Collector e Building and using keyboard macros The SDMS Collector Help Files Help File Filenames Help File Structure The help files give immediate context sensitive help while the user is working with SDMS Collector Help files have several functions e They give the full name of a displayed data tag e They can give a list of suggested or allowed responses for each data tag e They can include help comments for each data item e
158. ain Activity Point number indicates the survey shot sequence Figure 6 6 The Chain Activity For example the topography shown in Figure 6 6 could be listed in the project file as E AC CH De FE FENCE So CD OUR FENCE LINE 4 FG 10 te E 6 PL 21 24 The chain activity AC CH defines a chain whose feature code is FENCE and which connects points 6 7 8 15 14 13 21 22 23 and 24 in that order Notice that the PL data item is an exception to the rule that only the last occurrence of a data item in an activity is significant All PL data items in the chain activity are used to create the list of points to be connected The calculated file would first list the shot information and computed coordinates for the points in the list The chain created would be listed at the bottom of the calculated file as PESOS ee EG End Chain List y EE EE E BG Begin Chain List Do AC CH Sra FE FENCE 4 CD OUR FENCE LINE Be HG BO 63 Se 8 Creating A Gap With the Chain Activity A gap can be created in the chain by including two commas in a row For example Ts AC CH Bo FE FENCE 3 CD OUR FENCE LINE 4 FG 10 B PbS 6 4 4 sls 6 PL 21 24 will create a gap between points 8 and 15 as shown in Figure 6 7 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 88 Creating A Gap Using The Chain Activity Point number indicates the survey shot sequence PN 8 amp Figure 6 7 Gap created in a chain Appendix The chai
159. alignment It is used in computing cross section data and for stake out based on station and offset Horizontal alignment files based on the PC PT definition are used for 2D stakeout and live computations available during data collection This type of alignment file must be used with the cross section task TK XSE if X Y coordinates are to be calculated for the shots A horizontal alignment file can also be used in other tasks to calculate X Y coordinates from station offset values and vice versa The PI definition must be used in the 3D stakeout functions VA The Vertical Alignment file This file gives the vertical geometry elevations for the calculations used in stake out SF The surperelevation file This file gives the information relative to cross slopes for the sub grade or pavement calculations used in 3D stake out SUP is used as the file extension for surperelevation files Note Horizontal alignment files can be used by themselves for 2D stakeout The vertical alignment and superelevation files must be named for 3D stakeout Tolerance Configuration TOL CFG TOL CFG defines settings for such things as minimum closures instrument precision specifications error radii and standard deviations SDMS Collector issues a warning if any of the default tolerance values are exceeded during computations Most of the default values are based on values establish by NGS for third order surveys and are in units of feet To be able to
160. and superelevation data provided in these files to compute and display radial stakeout information for any requested point number PN station and offset ST and OF or station and feature ST and FE on the appropriate stakeout screens The slope stake out function allows catch points to be set using point numbers station and offset ST and OF or station and feature ST and FE from a control file or entered manually The slope ratio VH can also be changed to compute a new catch point These functions can be accessed at any time MIOC is displayed in the project file by pressing F8 Stak function key F8 Note SDMS Collector does not perform a collimation check of the instrument to compensate for the telescope cross hairs being out of adjustment Therefore the user should use the collimation functions on the instrument to assure the points staked are correct as it relates to the line of sight Entering Stakeout Data Coordinates and some other specific information can be entered on the stakeout screens using control file information or entered manually There are three options levels available when search for data The options and order searched are e Control Files e Control Files and Horizontal Alignment File e Control Files Horizontal Alignment File Vertical Alignment File and Superelevation File Certain data is required to be included or excluded for particular files based on the search option desired The
161. and Comments Note From here on the user will not be told to press lt ENTER gt to enter values that have been typed into the data collector But be sure to do so for data to be entered in the project file PN 58 Type point number 000 PD TBM Type 24 MAPLE Type 16 3741 Type 90 2550 Type 565 855 A length offset data item must be entered to correct the tree shot which was taken on the near side of the tree to the center of the tree Back up to the A in AC and type LO but don t ress lt ENTER gt yet Type the staff was one foot nearer the instrument than the center of the tree Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity Press lt ENTER gt to accept incremented point number 1001 Type SAN MH lt ENTER gt remember to clear the rest of the line before pressing lt ENTER gt Type 70 3524 Type 91 1548 Type 436 472 Note Other information about the underground utility may be recorded with other data tags specified by the user AC SS Type UE over the displayed SS to select the utility elevation activity Press lt ENTER gt to accept incremented point number 1002 PD SAN MH Type 8 VCP Type 10 3 which is the vertical offset from the last sideshot to the utility elevation point AC UE Type SS over the displayed UE to select the sideshot activity PN 1003 Press lt ENTER gt to accept incremented point number 1003 PD 8 IN PVC Type SE COR BLDG lt 4 x N AC SS PN 1
162. and bearing and the computed horizontal distance DD between the occupied station and the backsight listed on the Orientation screen If the data collector is hooked to an instrument pressing the lt F1 gt Meas key will trigger the instrument to measure the horizontal distance HD and horizontal angle HZ between the occupied station and backsight The computed elevation difference DZ between the known elevation of the backsight and the computed elevation based on the current measurement will also be displayed Coordinates based on a state plane coordinate system can be used for staking out points The combination adjustment factor CF saved in the project configuration file PROJECT CFG will be displayed and used for computations At times the wrong value for CF has been saved in the project configuration file The user can change the combination adjustment factor to the correct value on the Shot Inverse screen Be sure to press Enter after making a Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 10 Computations change The value entered will automatically be saved as the updated project combination adjustment factor in the project configuration file l Shot Inverse GFE 49 0331 BR 830 5629E DD 76 88M6 DZ 8 1188 DH 78 873 HZ 149 33 CF 1 000008 Meas Stak Slop EC Z Func JOR Figure 6 8 The Shot Inverse Screen The user can also enter the measurement information manually if an instrument is not hooke
163. apter 7 The Editor For a more step by step approach to using SDMS Collector the user is referred to the SDMS Collector Getting Started Manual This user guide is designed to detail the SDMS data structure and rules and details the basic functions which have been implemented in SDMS Collector Conventions Used in this Manual Keys are bracketed like this lt F1 gt Directory or lt CTRL gt e File names and file name extensions are shown like this NEWPR SEQ or the file name extension PRJ e Information to be typed is shown in bold italic letters like this Type an N to e Prompts and messages displayed by the computer are shown in smaller bold letters like this Choose a Command or MIOC e Variables such as a value or file name are shown in italics like this path file name ext or XC XXXXXX XXX How to Install SDMS Collector Create an SDMS Collector directory Use the DOS make directory command At the DOS prompt in the root directory CA type MD SDMS 2 Press lt ENTER gt to create the directory 3 To log into the new directory use the DOS change directory command and give the new directory name Type CD SDMS 4 Press lt ENTER gt to change to the new directory To copy the SDMS Collector program files into the SDMS directory follow the directions furnished with the data collector being used 5 When copying is complete store the original program in a safe place 6 It may desirable to have a separate direct
164. at the same time FS to select the occupied station activity Press lt ENTER gt to accept incremented point number 101 PD TRAV PT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point PE description TRAV PT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested instrument height 5 2 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested staff height 4 9 HZ T PN 102 Press lt ENTER gt to accept incremented point number 102 T PD CTRL PT Type TRAV over CTRL Type 173 3938 Type 87 3846 Ds Type 698 496 AC FS The staff height has changed again a new SH value V D must be entered Move to the A in AC and type SH but do not press lt ENTER gt yet Change it to 5 3 over FS to select the occupied station activity Press lt ENTER gt to accept incremented point number 102 PD TRAV PT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point EE description TRAV PT S S TH 5 2 Change the instrument height to 5 42 SH 5 3 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested staff height 5 3 AC BS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the backsight shot activity PN 101 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point number 101 PD TRAV PT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point description SDMS Collector suggests the backsight activity Type ES over BS to select the foresight activity PN 103 Press lt ENTER gt to accept incremented point number 103 PD TRAV PT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point Surve
165. ath specification if desired e Press lt Esc gt to exit without selecting a file Specifying File Subsets The user can enter a file specification for viewing a certain subset of files in a directory Wild card characters or specific characters or extensions in addition to the path can be included For example Enter this To view CASDMS All files in the SDMS directory on drive C CASDMSDATA P All files in the SDMSDATA directory on drive C RJ with the file name extension PRJ A PR8909 All files on the A drive beginning with the letters PR8909 with any file name extension A S All files on the A drive with a two letter file name with an extension of S followed by any or no characters Marking Files in the Directory It is possible to choose several files to copy rename or delete Sometimes wildcards are inefficient because the desired file names are so varied In this case use the file selection tools available on the directory display function keys e lt F2 gt Mark places a flag on files to be used in the selected operation e lt F2 gt Mark acts as a toggle That is the first time it is pressed it on a file name it marks the file The next time it is pressed it removes the mark and so on e lt F3 gt All automatically marks all the files in the displayed directory for the selection made This is faster than marking every file individually e lt F4 gt All removes all file marks e lt Es
166. ations and at an offset of 50 feet right The correct entry is ST 12 00 2 and OF 50 The correct stakeout data would be computed If ST 12 00 3 happened to be entered by mistake and that station exists between the second and third equation data would be computed but for the wrong location It may be obvious by the horizontal angle HZ and horizontal distance DH displayed that the point is in error in most cases But it may be difficult to detect if the control point being occupied happens to be in the vicinity of the equation which could make the error difficult to observe Manually Entering Data Coordinate data can be entered manually if a control file is not available on the data collector Use the lt T gt and lt gt keys to move the cursor from field to field Note that the cursor cannot be moved left or right If the cursor is on the left side of the screen it will have to be moved down through all of the items on the left to get to the top of the right side of the screen Use the lt ENTER gt key to enter a value without leaving the field When a value is typed in a field that impacts the results in another field SDMS Collector will re compute the entire screen when lt ENTER gt is pressed or when the cursor is moved up or down Note SDMS Collector does not transfer any measurement values up to the instrument The Orientation Screen The first screen that appears for the stake out functions is the Orientation screen sho
167. aved As A Control CTL File TRAVERSE EXAMP L Eeer taO RE AEN E EEA The Traverse Example Project PRJ File The Computed Traverse Example Saved As A Control CTL File s LEVEL RUN TEXAMPLE lt lt a The Level Run Example Project PRI File sscccssscececasssacesscesonasassixesaptavaocasvavasestvspacss EEN ENEE The Computed Level Run Saved As A Control CTL File THREE W IRE LEVEL BSAMPLE nc ncnnocrncnncnnon The Three Wire Level Example Project PRJ Elei des The Computed Three Wire Level Example Saved As A Control CTL File nsss 11 18 CROSS SECTION EXAMPLE ss a aia EE ESE The Cross Section Example Project PRJ File The Computed Cross Section Example Saved As A Control CTL File PROFILE EXAMPLE sc cccsdcscescevsesccssesetocsiestvavssuseesen seutesiveieieetssiv sdh ceviva ses deed nee ste The Profile Example Project PRI File sic sssssacgsscesecasacnssaasecenssasoscsvass basses EE A EE EGA ERR Computed Profile Example Saved As A Control CTL File CHAPTER 12 APPENDIX A E T O E T E E O VIER VIE Ware A E E ee ca ec eee 12 1 SET UP OF Ka E ER LEE 12 1 SDMS COLLECTOR FILE NAMING CONVENTIONS nena non nonan non n non non aaron nonan nen nn non ronannen cinema 12 2 THE SDMS COLLECTOR PROGRAM PE ENEE 12 2 ACTIVITIES A E E E E DATA RE TASKS DEFAULT PROMPT SEQUENCES ine Traverse TASK TRA eseu Radial Topog raphy TASK EE a A Eeer Combined Task COM id Control Network Task CON eet Ee e Profile Task PRO iss Ph
168. ay want to shoot a series of sideshots in a predictable pattern Each sequence contains sideshots for top of curb bottonrof curb edge of pavement center of road etc Instructions on entering a point numbering scheme for this sequence appear later in this chapter There are also other things found in and around a street which can be material to any survey such as utility manholes If the user is in the middle of a Level sequence and wants to step out and shoot the manhole the user can simply interrupt the level 1 sequence and call out a Level 2 sequence When the Level 2 sequence is complete the Level 1 sequence is continued Suppose the sequence file EW SEQ East to West is to take sideshots across the road from the east curb to the west curb The data tags and any descriptive constants listed in report form would be AC SS PN PD TOP OF CURB HZ VT DS AC SS PN PD BOTTOM OF CURB HZ VT DS AC SS PN PD EDGE OF PVMNT HZ VT DS AC SS PN PD CENTERLINE HZ VT DS AC SS PN PD EDGE OF PVMNT HZ VT DS AC SS PN PD BOTTOM OF CURB HZ VT DS AC SS PN PD TOP OF CURB HZ VT DS Also suppose sequence file UTILMH SEQ Utility manhole is to take utility elevation shots for a manhole a sideshot of the top of manhole and utility elevations for gas electric and phone lines These data tags and any fixed descriptions listed in report form would be AC SS PN PD TOP OF MANHOLE HZ VT DS AC UE PN PD MINNEGASCO RR AC
169. b Surrey Dota Management System AASHTOWare SDMS Collector User s Guide Release 3 5 American Association Of State Highway and Transportation Officials Acknowledgements Technical Writer Kit Carson Arkansas Highway and Transportation Department SDMS Task Force Emeritus Reviewed by Jay Tarwater Texas Department of Transportation Chairman SDMS Task Force Brian Casey Maine Department of Transportation SDMS Task Force Dean Wilkerson Arkansas Highway and Transportation Department SDMS Task Force Dennis O Brien Iowa Depart ment of Transportation SDMS Task Force Gene Hafermann Wisconsin Department of Transportation SDMS Task Force Emeritus Document Production University of Maine 348 Boardman Hall Orono ME 04469 207 581 2189 www AASHTOWare org Trademarks AASHTO Ware is a registered trademark and service mark of AASHTO AASHTO and SDMS are registered trademarks of AASHTO SDMS Collector and SDMS Processor are proprietary software products of AASHTO Other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Copyright Published by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials Inc 444 North Capitol Street N W Suite 249 Washington D C 20001 USA 202 624 5800 O Copyright 2002 by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials Inc All rights reserved This book or parts thereof may not be reproduced in
170. c gt returns to the disk operations menu with no files selected File Management Functions How to Copy Files From the disk operations menu press lt F2 gt Copy 2 Enter the name of a file to copy Use wildcards to specify more than one file The user also may use lt F1 gt Directory At the directory select files with lt F2 gt Mark lt F3 gt All or lt F4 gt All When all files are selected press lt ENTER gt 4 SDMS Collector prompts the user to name the destination file s Enter a file name specification change the path if necessary and press lt ENTER gt Use different file name specifications depending on the desired effect For example Ke Source Destination Effect TRAV PRJ OLDTRAV PRJ Copies the file named TRAV PRJ to a new file named OLDTRAV PRJ RAW PRJ Copies all files with the extension RAW to files with the extension PRJ SEQ to one new file named ALL SEQ Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 8 3 Disk Management and Communication After SDMS Collector copies the files it returns to the disk operations menu How to Rename Files 1 From the disk operations menu press lt F3 gt Rename Enter the name of a file to rename Use wildcards to specify more than one file The user also may use lt F1 gt Directory All the directory select files with lt F2 gt Mark lt F3 gt All or lt F4 gt All When all desired files have been selected press lt ENTER gt SDMS Coll
171. ccept Any Response When the user wants a list of responses but does not want to be limited to the list enter this wildcard as the first line of the response list lt ENTER gt The semi colon followed by a carriage return line feed must immediately follow the data tag information line and precede all suggested response lines For example GM 6 0 Geometry lt ENTER gt lt ENTER gt CURVE connect points with smooth curves lt ENTER gt sPOINT connect points with straight lines lt ENTER gt Adding Help Comments To add help comments to the response list make the entry like this shelp comment lt ENTER gt A semi colon followed by a help comment and a carriage return line feed is the help comment wildcard This line appears when the user asks for help on a data field but is not entered into the project file This wildcard can be placed anywhere in the response list For example GM 6 0 Geometry lt ENTER gt shelp comment added here lt ENTER gt another help comment added here lt ENTER gt another help comment added here lt ENTER gt CURVE connect points with smooth curves lt ENTER gt a help comment could be added here lt ENTER gt sPOINT connect points with lines lt ENTER gt lt ENTER gt Add the situation where descriptive data tags can have items added if the item begins with a semi colon and ends with an equal sign followed by an optional description For example the PD list might read PD 25 0 Po
172. ccupied stations allowed per traverse A warning will be given during processing that the number has been exceeded The maximum and default value is 25 SDMS Collector will not process the file if it contains more than 25 Occupied Stations TA The traverse horizontal angle closure tolerance specifies the difference between the given closing azimuth and the azimuth computed through the traverse divided by the number of occupied stations The default value is 3 TE The traverse elevation closure tolerance specifies the maximum difference between the given elevation of the closing point and the elevation as computed through the survey The default value is 0 5 RA The reciprocal angle difference tolerance specifies how far a shot in the double reciprocal angle calculation may be out of tolerance The default value is 0 1 When the tolerance is exceeded SDMS Collector reports the error and disregards the shot that caused the error and recalculates the double reciprocal angle HA The set horizontal angle tolerance specifies the standard deviation of measured horizontal circle readings The default value is 5 VA The set vertical angle tolerance specifies the standard deviation of measured vertical readings The default value is 20 DS The set distances tolerance specifies the standard deviation of measured distance readings recorded in sets The default value is 0 05 The Task Activity Definition File TASK TGS The defau
173. ce must be in place for the user to get top value out of any automation system Part of good management may involve a point numbering system that lets the user recognize a shot by its point number With careful planning the user can set up a general structure to apply to all of the surveying projects This effectively promotes data collection standards even within the flexibility of SDMS By combining point numbering schemes with sequences the user can still collect data in completely customized series of sequences and the point numbering will not get confused since SDMS Collector keeps track of it for the user A Simple Point Numbering Scheme As an example for a point numbering scheme the following sequence file for a utility elevation activity will be used AC SS PN 700 PD SIDESHOT FOR UE Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 5 9 User Shot Sequences HZ VT DS AC UE PN 750 RR The first time this sequence is used and if the point number is coded to increment by a factor of 1 in TAGS gt HLP the point number for the sideshot activity increments from 700 to PN 701 The point number for the utility elevation activity increments from 750 to PN 751 The next time this sequence is used the sideshot point number increments to 702 and the utility elevation point number increments to 752 Note The user can override point numbering any time by typing a new point number over the displayed number The next point number
174. ceptthe blank line ESOO AIN AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity PD Press lt ENTER gt to accept the blank line AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity Po Press ENTER to accept the blank Ine RR iz AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity FE XSE Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested feature PD Press lt ENTER gt toaccept the blank line Enter a comment for the special cross section Back up to the A in AC and type CM but do not press lt ENTER gt Type0 gt ETT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity FE XSE Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested feature Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested feature PD C L ENT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point description Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 20 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments PD C L ENT Press lt ENTER gt OF 15 Type 25 Type 5 8 AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity FE XSE Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested feature PD C L ENT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point description OF 25 AC SS ST 10 41 PD C L ENT Press lt Ctrl gt lt L gt to clear the line then press lt ENTER gt OF 52 A PA A eel AC SS Press lt ENTER gt
175. ch as a staff or instrument height must be reentered in the next shot taken The one time entry makes this easier by re displaying the previous value for faster reentry Attribute and Information Data Items The attribute and information data items keys AO through A9 and I0 through 19 are user definable data tags The attribute data tags create additional survey data items for which an existing data tag does not define The information data items create additional project header project header data items To select one of these tags type the desired tag and press lt ENTER gt These data items are used the same as any other data item and can be included in prompt and shot sequences These data items have prompts in the TAGS HLP file but the user can create personalized prompts for them Regardless of how the prompts are edited the data tags stay as originally defined and listed in the Appendix Entering Data from Control Files Control files store the coordinates and attributes of points These may be lists of benchmarks and monuments a listing of coordinates created with other software or a project file that has been formatted to control file format The user can have up to five control files active at any time These files are named in the Control Configuration file see Chapter 9 Customizing SDMS Collector The control files are Control Files Representing Data Tag e The primary and secondary location control files co
176. chain activity The calculated file would list the shot information and computed coordinates for the points in the list The chain will be listed at the bottom of the calculated file as EE bo callie Ee EG End Chain List S EE EE Connectivity by Feature Code T BG Begin Chain List Zee AC CH Es E 4 CD LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE ENTIRE PROJECT Gis Ee si Gs ge 8 The feature code methodology defines connectivity by using the same unique feature code for all of the points on a given chain This method is similar to the figure code method except that instead of giving the feature code and figure code as separate data items the figure code is directly linked to the feature code Project sites usually have more than one chain of the same type Therefore some procedure must be used to indicate when a specific chain begins and ends One procedure is to assign a unique feature code FE for each chain that will be encountered The project header must indicate this procedure is being used by adding the the chain desciription data tag CD with the response FE CD FB The second procedure uses the same feature code for chains of the same type and designates where each individual chain begins and ends by using the shot identification SI data tag The project header must indicate this procedure is being used by adding the the chain desciription data tag CD with the response BE CD BE Connectivity by Feature Code normally d
177. computations as explained above Computation Results Screen Reports SDMS Collector produces various screen reports for the computed project depending on the type of survey task SDMS Collector displays each screen and waits for the user to press a key to continue to the next screen The first option that SDMS Collector offers the user is the opportunity to observe the reductions of any angle sets that are contained in the project file SDMS Collector offers a Yes or No option to let the user choose to review or not to review the set reduction results If the user selects Yes the user is presented the screen shown in Figure 6 19 which shows the station name the mean standard deviation the maximum value and the minimum value of each horizontal angle vertical angle and distance measured for a particular set 100 BS Horz Vert Dist Mean 359 59550 90 00000 1940 57000 Sdev 6 00000 0 00000 0 00000 Max 359 59550 90 00000 1940 57000 Min 359 59550 90 00000 1940 57000 Range 8 00000 0 00000 6 00000 Sets l Used 1 Rejected Figure 6 19 Set Reduction Results The screen will also inform the user of the number of sets and if any were rejected because they did not meet the tolerance requirements The user may scroll through each set by using the lt gt or the lt gt keys If the user selects not to review the set reduction results the set reduction is performed in the background and will not be displayed on the s creen
178. ct the turning point activity ype 2 228 pe 2 115 ype 2 003 pe BS over TP to select the backsight activity ype 1 722 ype 1 603 Type 1 485 Type FS over BS to select the foresight activity Type 2 PD USCGS Type USCGS 3005B 3005A Type 2675 Type 2 550 Type 2 425 Manually select the elevation Z coordinate data tag to enter the known closing elevation Back up to the A in lt lt Type 1016 723 and press lt ENTER gt PEA sa ee Y Type FS over BS to select the foresight activity pa A A OA ETA Type2550 III AAA Type 1015 986 Press lt Esc gt to leave data collection Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 17 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments Close or Suspend Type a C to close the project Choose a SDMS Collector returns to the main menu Command The Three Wire Level Example Project PRJ File R PR 3WREXAM Do TK 3WR So AC 0S 4 ENEN So PD USCGS 3005A ES ACS WOLS VAS ie AC BS Go RIL BA RIAs oF BVA 8 TS TOF Pe EE 12 te I R222 L5 14 DIN LSe ACSES e Risi 722 3 EE He a R3 1 485 AAC ES AY e EN Z 21 PD USCGS 3005B 22 ZORO Le ELIO DO ERAS 25 OS OLS 5 SIS 26 CP 08 24 95 09 04 23 The Computed Three Wire Level Example Saved As A Control CTL File ye AC 0S De PNG e Ae TUTO 743 4 PD USC6S 3005A SC ER ES BNE 2 KS EE OSG GE E E EE Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 18 Examples Cross Section Example The cro
179. cting spiral between compound curves R2 TK 3WR Rod Reading Middle Wire for three wire leveling 3WR used to record the middle wire reading R2 Radius Second Curve used with a horizontal alignment HA to record the radius of the second circular curve of a compound curve or compound reverse curve and also defines the ending radius to use for a connecting spiral between compound curves R3 TK 3WR Rod Reading Bottom Wire for three wire leveling 3WR used to record the bottom wire reading RA Radius records the radius of a curve The radius for a curve to the left is entered as a negative value RD Ring Description a special tag used in tunneling operations to describe the current ring RE Recorder records the name or initials of the note taker or recorder on the survey crew RN Ring Number a special tag used in tunneling operations to identify the current ring RO Right Angle Offset used to record the angular offset left or right of the line of sight to an object Not presently used in SDMS Collector live or batch computations RP config Removal Protection when used in the SYS CFG file YES indicates the removal protection is on files may not be deleted RP config Ratio of Precision when used in the TOL CFG file defines the position closure tolerance in traverses A warning is issued if the computed closure is worse RR Rod Reading used to record the rod measurement in vertica
180. d data Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 106
181. d to the data collector When no instrument is attached or activated the user must set the data collector to IT MANUAL Pressing lt F1 gt Meas will then bring up the Enter HVD Data screen shown in Figure 6 9 This allows the manual entry of the necessary measurement data Pressing lt Fl gt Save on the Enter HVD Data screen will then return the user to the Shot Inverse screen with the DH HZ and DZ data tags updated based on the data that was entered on the HVD screen Enter HUD Data HZ 149 08338 UT 96 5555 78 89 HO El Ee EE ee PER A Eee Figure 6 9 The HVD Manual Entry Screen Note that some of the same functions that are displayed on the Orientation screen are also available from the Shot Inverse screen This eliminates the need to return to the Orientation screen to access those particular functions Note The user can have any angle on the EDM at the time the backsight measurement is made Horizontal angles for the stakeout functions will be calculated based on that reading Note If no measurements are taken with the instrument or entered for HZ and VT SDMS Collector will assume HZ 0 and VT 0 These values will be held for all staking until the user returns to this screen to change and re orients to the backsight Summary of Shot Inverse Screen Functions and Displays The function keys on the Shot Inverse screen Figure 6 7 perform the following lt Fl gt Meas Activates the instrument to measure HVD to the bac
182. data item and response of TA SI TA The chain figure created will be listed at the bottom of the file Note Taped objects with angles other than 90 degrees may not be supported by the post processing software being used In that case it will be necessary to collect the data as side shots and define their connectivity using the chain activity Direction Options for the Taping Activity Currently there are two options available to indicate the direction being taped The first option uses the alpha characters F B L R to define the direction The second option uses the horizontal angle right HZ to define the direction Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 70 Appendix These options are defined in detail at the beginning of Section VI The sections that follow will explain how these options are used in a project file Connectivity Using The Taping Activity Point number indicates the survey shot sequence e Figure 6 4 The Taping Activity Direction using alpha characters Most taping will consist of measuring around objects with 90 angles and at time forward and back Therefore the use of alpha characters to represent those angles provides a short hand method for data entry For example the sequence to tape around the building in Figure 6 4 is 1 ACSS Des PINES Br FE HOUSE 4 SHR So EVA GALS SES 6 VT 90 3045 qe Die DATOS EE AC SS ER PN 10 LO FE HOUSE SE SESS JS 137480 JS VT 90 3006
183. distance from occupied station point to the current shot point Slope Stakeout and Slope Stake Shot Screens The slope stakeout screen shown in Figure 6 15 allows the user to stake points based on a known or computed slope ration between a hinge or beginning point and a catch or ending point This screen is accessed from the Orientation screen and the Shot Inverse screen by pressing lt F3 gt Slop I Slope Stakeout Hinge PN 8500 Catch PN 8561 ST 61 66 606 ST Figure 6 15 The Slope Stakeout Screen The left side of the screen is for data input related to the hinge point The user can enter a point number PN to get the point from the active primary or secondary stake out control file S1 or S2 The station ST and offset OF will be computed based on the active horizontal alignment The elevation ZC will be the value in the named control file Note The preference of the combinations for searching the stake out files is point number station and offset station and feature Note Data from the L1 L2 or WC control files can be used by entering a comma after the point number followed by the control file tag into which the point is stored e g 1 1 or 100 WC The right side of the screen is for the catch point The user can enter a point number PN to get the point from the active primary or secondary stake out control file S1 or S2 The station ST and offset OF will be computed based on the active h
184. ducted There may be only one TK data item per project file and it is normally the second data item in the Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 15 Appendix Data Tag Description project TL Tangent Length used with a horizontal alignment PI Definition to indicate the tangent length of a simple curve TM Time used to record the time TN Traverse Number used to tag which traverse a point belongs to when multiple traverses are in the same project TP config Temporary Path when used in the IO CFG file designates the default directory path for temporary files TS Date Time Stamp records the date and time TS config Time Stamp when used in the IO CFG file Yes or No indicates whether or not to time stamp each page for SDMS reports and printouts TT config Maximum Stations Traverse when used in the TOL CFG file sets the maximum number of occupied stations allowed in a traverse TY Type used to record a type code for an object It is used by some post processing software to assign graphical attributes such as level or color UA Units of Angles specifies the units used in angle measurements Most systems record degrees minutes and seconds ddd mmss UL Units of Length specifies the units used in length and distance measurements coordinates station wlues etc Allowable responses are F feet and M meters with kilometer stationing HHH M2 meters with 100 meter statio
185. e combinations The length of an entry spiral The length of an exit spiral The length of a connecting spiral The subsequent segments repeated as necessary Data Item AC xx PN nnn ST n XC XXXXXX XXX YC XXXXXX XXX ZC XXXXXX XXX SI PI RA nnn PD CM TR RK AC xx PN nnn ST n XC XXXXXX XXX YC XXXXXX XXX Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Description As above The activity is used to define each intermediate PI in the horizontal alignment Use any activity data item except AC PR or EQ As above The stationing of each intermediate PI for the horizontal alignment being defined As above OPTIONAL Defines the X coordinate of each intermediate PI in the alignment REQUIRED Defines the Y coordinate of each intermediate PI in the alignment REQUIRED As above As above As above including additional tags required to define spiral curve combinations As above NOTE The alignment must end at a PI with no curve or spiral data It must be a point on the tangent after the last curve or spiral point in that alignment The data that follows is needed for the Final Point in an alignment As above REQUIRED As above REQUIRED The stationing of the final PI for the horizontal alignment being defined As above OPTIONAL Defines the X coordinate of the final point in the alignment REQUIRED Defines the Y coordinate of alignment REQUIRED the final point in the 2
186. e the current definition of the figure activity is very general Defining Connectivity in the SDMS Project File Defining connectivity refers to the method used to indicate which surveyed points should be connected together to form linear and curvilinear features such as centerlines edges of pavements break lines fences and so on The word chains will be used to refer to the figures formed by connecting points The definition of chains is vital to producing good maps and accurate digital terrain model surfaces Obtaining accurate measurements is the first priority of a survey crew But just knowing the positions of the points is not very helpful if there is no information related to what the points represent and how they are connected to one another The decision on which connectivity method is used has an enormous impact on the procedures used by the field crew SDMS Collector records data in the same order the measurements were taken in the field It would be fairly easy to define point connectivity if the field crew was forced to collect points along a chain from one end to the other and was Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 20 SDMS Tasks and Activities not allowed to take other shots that are not part of that chain However this is not always an efficient way to operate A more efficient procedure is to move the instrument along a corridor or to different spots around a site and to take as many measurements from each set up
187. e Method Point number indicates the survey shot sequence Figure 6 1 Connectivity by Figure Code Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 58 Appendix SDMS Processor connects points in shot order by default Chains connected by point number can be generated using the Chain Activity AC CH at any time during the data collection session Project File for Connectivity by Figure Code The information shown in Figure 6 1 will be used to create a chain using Figure Codes FG Each point is labeled with its point number PN and Figure code FG The point numbers correspond to the shot sequence used in the field is AC SS 2a PN lt TO Ge FG 1 4 FE EPL oF CD LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE 6 SO E HZ 45 2354 gi VT 90 3045 9 DS 100 44 10 AC SS dE PN 14 We Geel LS E 14 SIS L EE Lee VT 90 3006 at DS 180 94 Ker AC SS E BIN SL 20 Gre SL EE Zee SH 5 GG EE 24 VT 90 3006 Ae DS 180 94 Se sos op ARNG dl 6 CU US ADOS MISA iS This data represents the first three points that make up the chain defined by Figure 1 FG 1 The FG data item tells the processing software to generate Figure 1 and to connect PN 10 to PN 14 to PN 21 The chain would continue based on all points found in the file with FG 1 as the assigned Figure Code This method does impose the restriction that the points on a given chain must be measured in shot order working from one end of the chain towards the other but not necessarily in se
188. e SAO 000 158 AC BS seg eren 160 FE HOUSE IAS SS MOLA ESO LoS AB SOA GLE EANES TR TEA MOSS ES 10000 166 HZ 0000 rer ACSS 168 PN 104 PN assigned to the next taped point by the post processing software 169 FE HOUSE 170 XX 10085 4884 LY SACS LOA TOS LOS WUZ o AA N LTO L736 St WA 174 SH 0000 175 HZ 90 0000 Ys VARSA GEOL LL DOSA Oo JET COS 179 PN 104 180 FE HOUSE 181 XX 10085 4884 ISAs OCS OZR LS WSs 222498 401 0 Aah SER UNA EELER en CES SANOS 188 FE HOUSE 189 XX 10126 4909 L ee EE DAS tegt ELES 192 Stan JL iere 0000 194 HZ 0000 OCA CIASS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 75 196 L t WN DIOR 200 ZOnE 2027 208 204 2057 2067 AO o PN FE Appendix 105 PN assigned to the last taped point by the post processing software HOUSE XX SES ZZ BG AC as EG PUS EG CPs 91999739993 10180 9328 498 4172 BEGIN CHAIN LIST CH HOUSE 5 FLUO OO O OZ LOS 104 LOS END CHAIN LIST 06 08 2000 14 08 15 It should be noted that in this case PN 104 will be at or near PN 9 and PN 105 will be at or near PN 10 This is due to the lower precision of the position of the point that normally results from taping The Points and Chain PAC File The points created by the taping activity and the resulting chain list AC CH would be listed in the SDMS Points and Chains PAC file as LOCO IOMA dE er o
189. e delete shot DL SH data item in the activity instead of answering the current prompt SDMS Collector returns to MIOC at the next activity in the current sequence Multiple Sequences A sequence can be interrupted to use a second sequence The second sequence can be interrupted to use a third and so on up to six levels deep SDMS Collector keeps the place where the sequence is interrupted and lets the user execute subsequent sequences before returning to finish the interrupted sequence s The term Level 1 is given to the first sequence in progress at any given time The term Level 2 is given to any sequence called before completing a Level 1 sequence The term Level 3is given to any sequence called before completing a Level 2 sequence The term Level 4 is given to any sequence called before completing a Level 3 sequence The term Level 5 is given to any sequence called before completing a Level 4 sequence The term Level 6 is given to any sequence called before completing a Level 5 sequence By itself no sequence is defined as having any certain level Levels merely define the order in which sequences were called into use The following is an example where multiple sequences could be beneficial Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 5 6 User Shot Sequences The job is to survey a city street from curb to curb It must be done so that the shots may be linked later to produce cross section results Obviously the user m
190. e feature code of the next chain as FENCE points to point number 16 as the next point in the FENCE chain 12 61 Appendix 41 ODIA 42 ease AMS 43 CP 09 18 1999 18 46 43 The OD data item under the shot activity for PN 10 tells the processing software to create a figure using a Figure Code FG assigned by the post processor to connect PN 10 to PN 14 using the feature code CURB FE CURB The OD data item under the shot activity for PN 14 tells the post processing software to add PN 21 to the chain The Calculated file for Connectivity by Origin Destination The shot sequence used in the Project File for Connectivity by Origin Destination section would be listed in the SDMS calculated file CAL as CSS 2 PN 10 8 BEES CURB 4 CD CURB LINE a SHRED 6 HAAS ODA 7 VT 90 3045 8 DS 100 44 So XX HtH Calculated X coordinate LOR YY Calculated Y coordinate SN EE Calculated Z coordinate 127 OD 14 Ab Sis INGE SS 14 PN 14 d EE CURB de GS SHRED TA EA ADE ler Ve JOL SONG LS DS 180 94 20 XX HE SL YY H DP LZLittt tt Sh ODRA 24 so EE 25 CPOO at TOO ORES AER AS 26 BG Begin Chain List 27 AC CH wee FG 1000 Figure Code assigned by the post 29 FE CURB processing software since not given BOF CD CURB LINE Sil POA So AC CH 237 FG 1001 Figure Code assigned by the post 34 FE CURB processing software since not given SE CD CURB LINE Sib
191. e horizontal angle HZ horizontal distance DH and the Delta Z DZ will also be computed and displayed based on the occupied station point data entered on the Orientation screen and the point data entered on the Stakeout Alignment Control screen The instrument is then turned until the horizontal angle reading on the instrument display equals the HZ value DH is used to tell how far the desired point will be from the instrument location The staff height SH entered on the Orientation screen will also be displayed This value can be changed as needed as shots are taken If the staff height needs to be changed for a particular shot or shots it can be done at this screen These values will be used to compute the length offset LO and the Delta Z DZ for that particular point When the prism is set in that direction the user can use the lt Fl gt Meas key to measure the actual values for the horizontal angle HA slope distance DS and vertical angle VT to the prism From this actual measurement information the length offset LO right angle offset RO and the DZ will be calculated Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 13 Computations The length offset LO shown in Figure 6 12 is based on the instrument as the reference A negative length offset LO indicates the distance actually measured is short and the prism needs to move away from the instrument the distance displayed to reach the desired point
192. e modified to include user specified responses for many of the descriptive data tags as well as to change the length of data field HOWEVER since SDMS Collector uses this file to check for valid data tags and field entries the user must be careful not to add or delete any of the SDMS data tags and definitions For this reason editing this file is not allowed with the SDMS Collector editor Instead a separated ASCII editor must be used The Location of the Configuration Functions Configuration functions can be changed by pressing lt F7 gt Conf at the main menu or from project mode by pressing lt F7 gt Func then lt F7 gt Conf This will bring up the menu screen as shown in Figure 9 1 that displays the configuration files that can be changed Remember project configuration cannot be changed from project mode Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 9 1 Customizing SDMS Collector Configurations Pick a Configuration to Change Figure 9 1 Configuration screen e To edit a specific configuration press the corresponding function key e To edit the task activity definition press lt F2 gt Edit from the main menu then s elect the TASK TGS file Note The configuration files all program files with the file name extension CFG and the TASK TGS file must be located in the same directory as the executable program file SDMS EXE This is also true for all files with the HLP extension Editing the Configuration File
193. e responses will be passed to the calculated file by the post processing software 7 Certain data tags are treated as toggles by the processing software This means if these data items are defined in one activity they will be used as defined in all subsequent activities and computations where they are needed as if they are the same as last defined Two primary examples of this rule are staff height SH and instrument height IH If an AC SS is done to measure a sideshot point and SH 5 5 is entered then 5 5 feet will be used in computing all subsequent AC SS coordinate values even if the SH data tag does not appear within those Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 104 Appendix subsequent sideshot activities If the user does not define the SH or IH in any activity in the data set then the processing software uses a built in default value Sometimes this built in value is user definable and sometimes it is hard coded by the program developer Other data tags that follow this rule are combination factor CF all of the data tags used to define Header Units and Datum information instrument type IT and other data tags related to instrument constants There is also the SI data tag that defines the shot identification and once designated will apply to all succeeding shots until the response is changed As an example this is used to designate which shots in a PRJ are to be used for cross section purposes only and
194. e top of each named control file when data collection is resumed This will effect the results of automatically getting the next and previous control points from a control file For example assume the user has pulled four successive points from the Ll control file by pressing lt ENTER gt on the Get PN prompt Then the user stops to name a new Sl control file Naming a new control file causes SDMS Collector to lose track of its position in all of the control files When the user resumes data collection and presses lt ENTER gt on the Get PN prompt for the LI file SDMS Collector goes back to the first point in that file it does not pick up where it left off after the fourth point Viewing a Control or Alignment File Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 10 Data Collection The user can look at the coordinates for any point in an active control or alignment file with the editor Tracking Point and Figure Numbers The user can keep track of the point and figure numbers with the lt F9 gt key For example the user has been jumping around in the point numbering from 4 to 15 to 19 to 6 Now the user cannot remember the numbering scheme and needs the next highest number from those already used Proceed as follows When SDMS Collector prompts and suggests a point number press the lt F9 gt key SDMS displays the next largest number from the points the user has already used Point 20 SDMS Collector suggests 20 because t
195. eading Top Wire Radius 1 R2 8 1 Rod Reading Middle Wire Radius 2 R3 8 1 Rod Reading Bottom Wire RA 10 1 Radius RD 25 0 Ring Description RE 15 0 Recorder RN 6 3 001 Ring Number RO 8 1 Right Angle Offset RR 6 1 Rod Reading E O Ee RUE 2 O ROCE YSE F foot rod Y yard rod M meter rod s1 12 1 Stk 1 CTL File Name Spiral Entry Length 2 12 1 Stk 2 CTL File Name Spiral Exit Length 3 12 1 Spiral Connecting Length Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 28 JL TEE 174 O LS rer e TD SO Mels EEN SL 184 HS 186 STO 188 ECK LSO 19 12 ES 194 PISE LS U7 6 LS O 2007 200m 2027 AUS o 204 2057 AOC GER GREG AOS ZO SEL Ds ANS O 214 DLS 5 DA DT 6 SR ANS o 2207 GR GE AUS 224 EE GE Ge EEN GE ZO ASA o SID ESS 0 234 DIS y EE ER Ge GER 240 241 242 gs L0 I begleet Becky SD 4 0 Station Direction UP shots taken up station DOWN shots taken down station SE 2 1 Set Number SF 12 0 Superelevation File Name Sil Scam BEHEINE SISMOS OLD BL begin LOC shots EL end LOC shots PC point of curve PI point of intersection PT point of tangent CS curve to spiral SC spiral to curve ST spiral to tangent TA taping shot TS tangent to spiral RTO radial topog shot XSE cross section shot SN 10 0 Serial Number SP 25 0 Suspend Project SS 10 0 Stationing Computed SITO Ener aert SX 6 0 Standard Error E
196. ecord user defined information fields These tags may have specific usage defined by the post processing software ID Project Identification records the name or identification number of the project in the project header IH Instrument Height used to record the vertical distance from the occupied survey point to the vertical index of the instrument IT Instrument Type used to record the type of instrument used This information tells SDMS which device driver to use IT NONE indicates that all measurements will be entered manually L1 config Location 1 Control File Name used in CNTL CFG to name the primary control point file By default referenced control points are searched for in this file first and in the Location 2 file second LI Length First Curve used with a vertical alignment PRO to record the length of vertical curve for symmetrical curves or the curve length from the VPC to VPI for unsymmetrical curves L2 config Location 2 Control File Name used in CNTL CFG to name the secondary control point file L2 Length Second Curve used with a vertical alignment PRO to record the length of vertical curve from the VPI to VPT for unsymmetrical curves LC Long Chord used with a horizontal alignment PI Definition to record the distance represented by a straight line between the PC and PT of a curve LG Longitude used to record the longitude of a point LN Length used to record the length
197. ector prompts the user for the new name of the selected file s Use different file name specifications depending on the desired effect For example Source Destination Effect TRAV PRJ OLDTRAV PRJ Renames the file TRAV PRJ to a new file named OLDTRAV PRJ RAW PRJ Renames files with the file name extension RAW to new files with the file name extension PRJ After SDMS Collector renames the files it returns to the disk operations menu How to Delete Files Note The lt F4 gt Delete key does not appear when file removal protection is turned on RP Yes in the system configuration file 1 2 How to Print Files From the disk operations menu press lt F4 gt Delete Enter the name of a file to delete Use wildcards to specify more than one file User also may use lt F1 gt Directory At the directory select files with lt F2 gt Mark lt F3 gt All or lt F4 gt All When files have been selected press lt ENTER gt SDMS Collector asks if the selected files are to be deleted For example if four files are selected to be deleted SDMS Collector asks Delete 4 Files Yes No Type a Y to delete the selected files Type an N or press lt Esc gt to cancel the deletion process and return to the disk operations menu SDMS Collector can print project control alignment sequence tag and configuration files Such files can be printed from several spots in the program From the main menu press lt F4 gt I O then
198. ed data tag and data is entered DMS Collector will next continue with the prompt that comes next in the default sequence If the user is running a user shot sequence and wishes to insert a default sequence from the TASK TGS file when the cursor is on the Activity line to be started the user can hit Insert instead of Enter This will cause SDMS Collector to take the list of prompts for the current activity from the default sequence and then return to the user defined sequence In addition while in a user defined sequence the user can repeat the previous Activity in the sequence or skip the next Activity in the sequence by using the Page Down and Page Up keys Entering Data Fields There are several ways to answer a prompt and enter data into the data field The user can e Manually enter the data by typing the requested data and pressing lt ENTER e Skip a prompted data item by pressing lt ENTER gt with the data field blank the user may have to clear the line first with the Ctrl L CLEAR LINE command or with the lt space bar gt e Get the measurements from the total station by pressing the appropriate measure key either lt F1 gt Measure 1 or lt F2 gt Measure 2 e Get the data from the control files using GET POINT Manually Entering Data For all the data tags the user can manually enter the data by typing the response in the data field The response is accepted when the user presses the lt ENTER gt key For some of the
199. een the text activity and other shot activities is that the text activity can be used to provide extensive additional detail to a point that was shot previously in the project file or about the project file itself No shot data HZ VT DS can be included The advantage of using this activity is that the point does not have to be re shot if additional descriptive information needs to be added related to that shot The first method for using the text activity is to add descriptive information about a point shot previously in the project file This method only requires that the point number of the point that the descriptive information is to be appended be included with the text activity When the project file is processed the descriptive information will be appended to the shot activity with that point number No shot data HZ VT DS or feature code FE is included The second method for using the text activity is to record information about the project file itself If the text activity is used for reference purposes about the project file the point number PN number is omitted The default text activity is made up of three data items The AC TX data item is always the first entry of a text activity but the other items may be entered in any order Data Tag Description of Data Tag AC TX Text Activity Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 19 SDMS Tasks and Activities PN Point Number CM Comment Check Activity T
200. efault no step delay for macros AS 3 2 Automatic saving Yes Yes files will be saved automatically No user will be prompted OA 1 2 Overwrite or Append O O data will be overwritten A data will be appended File TOL CFG SO W3 03 GS ell SIDO RT 30 RS ee RP 10000 EIS SE e ERES HA 5 VA 20 BE OS M25 W ROS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 25 AIAN vs GA Ho 10 lila E hs 14 LS So To OS WS Sia OILS SE SDg L3 RS e ER 2 MS 10 OS RP 10000 TEAS TARS RARS HA 5 VA 20 DS 02 The Tolerance Definition SE File TOL HLP Tags Help 6 1 Max of OSs in a Vertical Task 25 A 6 1 Single Wire Level Closure 05 ST 6 1 3 Wire Stadia Difference 011 W3 6 1 3 Wire Level Closure 03 XC 6 1 Profile X section Closure 1 SD 6 1 Deviation from Nominal Stationing 5 IST Resection Tolerance feet 0 30 ER 6 Radial Topog Error Radius 25 MS 6 Double Multi Stubs 25 VI 6 1 Vertical Intersects 25 RP 6 1 Ratio of Precision 10000 TT 6 1 Max of OSs in Traverse 25 TA 6 1 Traverse Horizontal Angle Closure 3 TE 6 1 Traverse Elevation Closure 5 RA 6 Reciprocal Angle Difference 1 HA 6 1 Set Horizontal Angle 5 VA 6 1 Set Vertical Angle 20 ES Set Distances 05 The Default Tags Help aL TAGS HLP SE N NNNNNNNNNERR PR PR tatata KO OO DAS Lat DES O AO O AT NOTAS IAEA w 10 0 Attribute 0 a 10 10 ROE Cae iat eek l A2 10 0 Attribute 2 A3 10 0 Attrib
201. efore nothing in the just completed Activity is stored to the project file until the new Activity is accepted This feature allows the user to modify items in the just completed Activity without having to use the Edit command This is done by moving the cursor over the currently displayed Activity and typing in any valid data tag The data tag and response will be added to the bottom of the previous activity SDMS will then redisplay the next Activity prompt This procedure allows the user to either add an item to an activity that is not in the default prompts for an activity listed in the TASK TGS file or to change an already entered item in the activity by entering the same data tag and a new response 6 Within any activity only the last occurrence of a data tag is used by the processing software The purpose of this rule relates to the rule in surveying of never erasing in a field book For example if a mistake was made by recording a feature as FE CURB that should have been FE EC another line with FE EC can be added following the incorrect entry and the processing software will assume this last line is the correct one There are a few exceptions to this rule for data that does not fit in the 25 characters allowed per data item Presently four data tags can be listed multiple times within an activity The data tags are comments CM point lists PL point descriptions PD and chain list CH Each appearance of these data tags and th
202. elf The additional tag needed to define an SC or SR combination is S1 which defines the length of the entry spiral RA defines the spiral ending radius and the radius of the curve If the computed spiral deflection angle is equal to the total PI deflection angle a zero length curve is assumed CS curve with an exit spiral only RS an exit spiral by itself The additional tag needed to define a CS or RS combination is S2 which defines the length of the exit spiral RA defines the spiral beginning radius and the radius of the curve If the computed spiral deflection angle is equal to the total PI deflection angle a zero length curve is assumed RSR a partial or connecting spiral with different radii The additional tags needed to define an RSR type are R1 R2 and S3 R1 and R2 define the beginning and ending radius of the spiral Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 8 Vertical Alignment SDMS Collector System Basics respectively Neither R1 nor R2 will be infinity S3 defines the length of the spiral NOTE If an SCSCS Entry spiral curve connecting spiral curve exit spiral is not computed directly by the software being used one of the following methods can be used to develop a horizontal alignment to accomplish this combination SCS and CS or SC and SCS File A vertical alignment file defines the VPI points specified by station and elevation This information is used to compute the profile grade
203. em 00 which indicates if the prism is set in a horizontal or vertical offset orientation If when facing the point the prism offset is to the right enter a negative offset value PP config Project Path when used in the IO CFG file it designates the default directory path for creating and editing projects files PR Project Name identifies the file name of the file used to collect the survey Only one PR data item may be used per project file The project name may be up to 8 characters It is ALWAYS the first data item in a project file Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 12 Appendix Data Tag Description PR config Protocol when used in the IO CFG file designates the communications protocol NONE or XON XOFF PW config Page Width when used in the IO CFG file designates the width of the page in characters for SDMS reports and printouts Defaults to PW 40 for screen output and PW 80 for printer output SDMS assumes that a constant width character font is being used QP config Sequence Path when used in the IO CFG file designates the default path for finding sequence files R1 TK 3WR Rod Reading Top Wire for three wire leveling 3WR used to record the upper wire reading R1 Radius First Curve used with a horizontal alignment HA to record the radius of the first circular curve of a compound curve or compound reverse curve and also defines the beginning radius to use for a conne
204. end Project used to suspend work on a project until a later time or day Any response may be used and recorded The SP data item is generated by SDMS and Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 14 Appendix Data Tag Description does not affect computations SP config Screen Pause when used in the IO CFG file designates the amount of time for pausing the screen display for scrolling screen reports in 1 18th second increments SP 2 2 18th sec pause SS Stationing Computed computes and records the station relative to an alignment of a point shot radially ST Stati oning used to define the nominal station along an alignment or the stationing to use ahead at an equation It is also used in the station activity AC ST where it applies to all subsequent shots until a new station activity is begun The format is based on the units of length UL settings in the project configuration file ST config Three Wire Stadia Tolerance when used in the TOL CFG file designates the 3 write stadia difference tolerance SX Standard Error Estimate X Coordinate used with control points to define an error estimate in the X component Easting of the coordinate for that control point to be used during the least squares analysis process The response represents the amount of freedom the user wishes to allow the control point to adjust during processing The default value in SDMS Processor is 0 001feet or meters which
205. enerate the chain list at the end of a calculated project file and is stored in the points and chain PAC file Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 21 Data Collection Chapter 4 Data Collection Open a Project As discussed in the last chapter an SDMS project is made up of a series of activities which in turn are made up of a series of data items A data item consists of a data tag and a data field Therefore when using SDMS to do data collection the user needs to determine the sequence of the activities that will be used in the current project which data tag to use and what data to enter in the data field This chapter covers data collection with SDMS It includes information on e Starting a new project or reopening an existing project e Naming the total station to use during data collection e Prompting data tags for the next data item e Entering the data field manually from the total station or from the control files e Measuring points in sets e Using intelligent point numbering e Correcting data entry errors during data collection e Ending data collection by suspending or closing a project To open a project press lt F1 gt Project displayed in the main menu SDMS Collector briefly displays the message Building Help Tables then prompts to name the project desired as shown in Figure 4 1 Project Name gt PRJ_ Figure 4 1 Open a project When the file name prompt appears the cursor is sittin
206. ent project file name can be entered and computed SDMS Collector displays the selected project file and the named control files as shown in Figure 6 18 and asks if the user wants to proceed Before continuing check the displayed file names for any errors Batch Computations Input File C SDMS PRJ TEST GSTRAY Read Control C ASDHSAPRINSH67C CTL Write Control C SDMS PRJ COMP CTL Hz Alignment OK to continue Y N Figure 6 18 Batch Computation Set Up The Batch Computations screen displays e The input file is the file to compute e The read control file is the L1 primary location control file named in the control configuration file e The write control file is the WC write control file named in the control configuration file and where SDMS Collector writes the computed coordinates for this project If no write control file is specified SDMS Collector uses the input file name to identify the write control file It uses the same file name with the CTL extension e SDMS Collector uses the horizontal alignment file during cross section computations to produce XY coordinates If the user types Y Y must be pressed twice the batch computations start If the user types an N SDMS Collector returns to where the user accessed the computation function to allow the user to make necessary changes to the control Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 24 Computations configuration file The user then proceeds with
207. er pause instructions for prompts that have varying responses from project to project Press lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to finish the macro then give it a comment and a name t Files Begin at the main menu Press lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to begin recording the macro Press the lt F5 gt Disk key to display the disk operations menu Press the lt F2 gt Copy key from the disk operations menu SDMS Collector prompts for a file name s to be copied Enter the path for the project files and use PRJ as the file name specification and press lt ENTER gt This targets all project files in the specified path for the copy process The user could also enter a pause instruction then use the lt F1 gt Directory key to manually select the files to be copied before resuming the macro Enter the drive letter and path if necessary of the destination disk and press lt ENTER gt Press lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to finish the macro then give it a comment and a name Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 10 10 Examples Chapter 11 Examples This chapter presents some sample projects so the user can practice using SDMS Collector The examples include a graphic of the project instructions for entering the data and a printout of the project file There is an example of each of these six tasks e Radial topography e Traverse e Level run e Three wire level e Cross section e Profile Assumptions When doing the examples please remember
208. er the tools to change them Making modifications is fast and easy with the editing procedures described in Chapter 7 The Editor For example date and time can be stamped into the project at the start of the job at each occupied station or at each shot If date time stamping is not wanted at all the user can turn it off by setting this toggle to AD OFF This chapter talks about the configuration files and about the default task activity definitions e The I O configuration file sets up data directory paths controls communications between SDMS Collector and outside devices and enters specific printer controls for reports such as page length and width print headers and footers etc e The project configuration file sets controls for a project such as the combination factor or three wire stadia constant documenting the units of measurement used in the project etc e The system configuration file defines other data collection conditions such as activating the over write protection lock or specifying automatic data logging to a printer etc e The control configuration file names the control files and the horizontal alignment file to use with the projects e The tolerance configuration file lets the user set certain tolerances for checking data values during data collection and computations e The task activity definition file lets the user modify the sequence of prompts for normal data collection e The tags help file can also b
209. er type the tag displayed with HZ Pressing lt F1 gt again will record the instrument value When SDMS Collector prompts an activity data tag AC if the user presses one of the measurement function keys SDMS will take a quick shot A quick shot automatically e Increments the point number from the previous shot e Duplicates descriptive information from the previous shot Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 7 Data Collection e Enters information that can be measured by the instrument e Presents the activity data tag for the next shot Once Function for One Time Data Entry Many times during data collection a data item only needs to be changed for one shot The ONCE Function allows the user to make a one shot change to a data item This makes a one shot change to a constant entry such as a staff height easier by redisplaying the previous value for faster reentry 1 During data collection select a data item that carries values forward like a point number point description instrument height or staff height 2 Type the data tag for one of these repeating items Notice the previous or incremented value from the last time this item was used 3 Type a new one time entry over the displayed information but do not press lt ENTER gt Instead press lt CTRL gt lt ENTER gt The next time SDMS encounters this data item it prompts for the default not for the value of the one time entry 4 Note that constants su
210. ered throughout the file and in which several chains may be in progress simultaneously Connecting the points to define chains is the job of the post processing software that interprets the SDMS data But the field data collection procedure needs to provide the post processing system with the intelligence to do that correctly SDMS has several different methods of tagging points for chain definition Each method has its advantages and the selection is to some extent a matter of personal preference These methods include e Connectivity By Figure Code e Connectivity By Origin Destination e Connectivity By Taping e Connectivity With The Chain Activity Connectivity by Feature Code Connectivity by creating parallel chains Other information may also be needed when defining chains This can be accomplished by adding data tags to define attributes of the chain being defined Tags can be used to designate such things as e The chain feature code e Whether the chain represents a surface break line or just a planimetric feature e Which points in the chain are angle points and which are points on curves e Graphical attributes such as level color and line style The SDMS Collector software provides a wide variety of methods to define connectivity Details on several of these methods are provided in the sections that follow It is important to remember that the method used for defining connectivity and assigning attributes to chain figures must
211. es describe the data tags the size of the response data field the type of response expected and in some cases lists of allowable responses See Chapter 9 for the structure of the help files and how to use them to get help HLP is used as the file extension for Help files A sequence file stores a sequence of activities and data items Sequence files are used during data collection to prompt the user with the Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 12 SDMS Collector System Basics activities and data items in the order defined in the sequence Default responses to data items can be provided in the sequence file SEQ is used as the file extension for Sequence files Macro Files The macro files store a sequence of keystrokes The stored keystrokes may include function keys data item input the ESC key and so on Executing a macro will read the keystrokes and enter them into SDMS Collector automatically See Chapter 9 for how to use macro in SDMS MAC is used as the file extension for Macro files Edit Files Edit files are copies of the project file being edited with the SDMS Collector editor These files can be saved with the extension EDI so the raw project file is not changed Temporary Files There are general purpose temporary files produced internally by SDMS Collector software and they are defined with a TMP file extension SDMS File naming Conventions SDMS follows DOS file naming conventions and uses these file na
212. es the radius of a curve or curve spiral combination Based on the direction of the alignment being defined a positive value indicates a curve to the right and a negative value indicates a curve to the left REQUIRED NOTE A radius is not required for PIs with no curve defined normally called an angle point All other tags listed with the activity are ignored in computations but may be included for documentation purposes Any of the tags that follow can be used as attributes for a simple curve These tags are not used in computations The tangent length distance from the PI to the PC or PT 2 6 EX nnn MO nnn LC nnn DA PD CM FE Rl nnn R2 nnn S1 nnn S2 nnn S3 nnn SDMS Collector System Basics The external distance from the PI to the curve midpoint The middle ordinate distance from the curve midpoint to the long chord midpoint The long chord distance from the PC to the PT The delta angle on the direction of the alignment being defined a positive value indicates a curve to the right and a negative value indicates a curve to the left All other tags in the shot are ignored but may be include for documentation purposes The tags that follow are required to define the various curve spiral combinations Supported combinations are defined following the table Defines the beginning radius for certain spiral curve combinations Defines the ending radius for certain spiral curv
213. f The default is No MP The macro pause setting determines the length of time in seconds that SDMS Collector pauses between steps in a macro before continuing to the next step The default is O no pause AS The automatic save setting determines if each data item is saved as it is recorded If this toggle is turned on data is saved to the file automatically after each shot If this toggle is turned off the user is asked it the data should be saved Yes turns this toggle on No turns it off The default is Yes OA The overwrite data setting determines if control point data computed during batch processing is written to the control file overwriting all existing information in the file or if the new control point data is appended or added to the existing data in the file If this toggle is turned on by choosing A the computed data is appended If this toggle is turned off by choosing O the existing data is overwritten The default is O The Control File Configuration CNTL CFG SDMS Collector inserts active control file names in the project file after the project configuration automatic entries SDMS Collector can have up to five different control files active at a time Each has an associated data tag as described below In addition to these the horizontal and vertical alignment files and the superelevation file are necessary for the stake out functions to operate properly L1 This is the primary location control file It
214. f The utility elevation activity must be entered after the leading sideshot before any other activities are started There may be multiple utility elevations taken from the same leading sideshot The Combined Task TK COM The combined task is a comprehensive horizontal task that allows control traversing trigonometric leveling and simultaneous collection of radial topography sideshots as well as all other common SDMS horizontal project activities Optional activities that can be included with the combined task include sideshot foresight elevation control control check sideshot intersect utility elevation tie sequence and project header Intermediate set ups are optional to a combined task The Control Network Task TK CON The Photo Control The control network task is most closely related to a traverse but the control network task assumes that multiple foresights will be taken to all visible points from och occupied station Each foresight is then occupied and all visible points are shot form those stations This results in a project file with many possible traverse routes running through it The technical specifications for each defined activity in the control network task are contained in the information on the traverse task The required activities include occupied station backsight or station resection if no backsight and foresight The optional activities include elevation control control check sideshot intersect
215. f the station equation point as needed by other software interpreting the alignment OPTIONAL IER Defines the station back of the equation REQUIRED ST HEHE Defines the station ahead of the equation REQUIRED PD CM All attribute tags in the shot are ignored in computations FE etc but may be included for documentation purposes AC xx The alignment description begins here Use any activity data item except AC PR or EQ ST nn nn This is the beginning stationing value at the beginning or within the stationing defined by the horizontal alignment The value may be either stationing format or decimal Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 11 SDMS Collector System Basics El xxxx Defines the superelevation slope rate on the left side Slopes are expressed in feet feet or meter meter i e 0 02 is a 2 slope downwards E2 xxxx Defines the superelevation slope rate on the right side Slopes are expressed in feet feet or meter meter i e 0 02 is a 2 slope downwards PD CM Can be used to tell what the transition is For example CM End Normal Crown Section AC xx A new activity is used for each change in superelevation transition to be defined whether on one side or both sides of the horizontal alignment Use any activity data item except AC PR or EQ SIS 1 This is the stationing value for the transition being defined The value may be either stationing format or decimal format REQUIRED NOTE If the station value
216. field blank if no footer is needed on the reports The default is blank no footer entered PL The page length data tag controls the intervals at which the printer is to start a new page Enter the number of lines per page standard spacing is 6 lines per inch The default is 60 lines Set this field to 8 if the PC or data collector screen display PD CON is used as the print device PW The page width data tag tells SDMS Collector how wide to print the reports and files Enter the number of characters per line The default is 80 characters Set this field between 10 and 40 if the data collector or FC screen display PD CON is used as the printer PG This data tag turns automatic page numbering on or off Yes turns the toggle on No turns it off The default is No TS This data tag turns automatic time stamping on or off for printed reports Yes turns this toggle on No turns it off The default is No DT This data tag turns automatic date stamping on or off for printed reports Yes turns this toggle on No turns it off The default is No The Project Configuration PROJECT CFG The project configuration can be edited only when the configurations are accessed from the main menu That is once in project mode data collection the user cannot change the project configuration until the project is ended and SDMS Collector returns to the main menu Note SDMS Collector automatically inserts certain information from the
217. fined by the any of the taping activity scenarios supported by SDMS will be similar to the sample shown above Therefore sample PAC files will not be listed for each of the sections that follow Closing a Taped Object The procedures described above will create duplicate points of the occupied station OS point and the back sight BS point used at the beginning of a taping activity PN 9 and PN 10 Since the taped measurements and vertical differences are not intended to be a the same precision as those shot with the total station the closing points may miss the intended location desired A better method would be to use either the Origin Destination OD data item or add C to the last angle distance list to tell the post processing software to close the figure on a specified point Project file Closing AC TA with Origin Destination OD Using the same example shown in Figure 6 4 and the OD tag to tell the post processing software to close the figure on a specified point the data will be collected in the project file as bas AC SS ae PINES oe FE HOUSE 4 SHS E HZ 1 9 35388 ES VT 90 3045 abe EISE Se AC SS OF PN 10 IOM FE HOUSE thal SIS E EAS O TOR VT 90 3006 14 DS 180 94 LS AC TA Les OSEA Point Number of the point to be used as the occupied station This is the second point in the chain being defined within the taping activity er BSI Point Number of the point to be used as the
218. g conventions e An overview of the SDMS Collector menus SDMS Data Structure The SDMS data structure forms the foundation of the SDMS system It is defined in the AASHTO SDMS Technical Data Guide 2000 SDMS is defined specifically for Tasks Activities and Data Tags used in design and land surveys Enhancements being considered by the AASHTO SDMS Product Task Force would expand SDMS to include tasks activities and data tags for other types of surveys done in support of transportation system development and maintenance These might include construction traffic maintenance inventory soil exploration etc For design surveys the Tasks supported are Traverse Radial Topography Single Wire Leveling Three Wire Leveling and Cross Sectioning There are also subsets and combinations of some of these basic tasks such as Combined which is a combination of Traverse and Radial Topography and Profile and Line Topography which are really subsets of Cross Sectioning There are also ways of using a task for a specific structure of collection such as using Radial Topography to collect cross sections Projects and Tasks In SDMS a survey job is called a Project Within a project there are different types of tasks that the surveyor carries out such as traverse radial topography cross section etc For a given survey project there may be multiple tasks done but each SDMS electronic file may contain only one Task Therefore a survey projec
219. g on the period and the insert toggle is turned on as indicated by Ins in the upper right corner of the screen The path displayed will be the path stored in the I O Configuration file as the PP The I O Configuration file is described in Chapter 8 Type a project name change the path if necessary and press lt ENTER gt Open a New Project If a project name that does not exist is entered SDMS Collector will start a new project The first thing SDMS Collector does is to prompt the user for the task type of the new project as shown in Figure 4 2 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 1 Data Collection New Project Enter Task Figure 4 2 Open a new project SDMS defines the task by using three letter task identifiers Task Type Task Identifier After the user enters the task type SDMS Collector will prompt the tags that form the project header The Default Project Header SDMS Collector provides a default sequence in the file named NEWPR SEQ for opening new projects This sequence contains the following data tags AERCH Description ww Project Identification OO nM Name sate taken from system date O we Weather o Weather Barometric pressure Instrument type names the total station device driver Instrument serial number OB opene Recorder The user can add or delete tags to customize it as needed If the user does not want to use NEWPR SEQ when opening a new project
220. g taping activity would be vo oO JO 0 GA b i PeREeeRPRPRR oU s GA AO ds KSR TOF 20 2a 22 Ao ZAT 257 AC PN EEs SH HZ YES DS AC PN WIE SIS HZ WOES DS AC OSR BSk PNS EEs DEZ ED AD AD AD AD ss 9 HOUSE 5 19 3538 90 3045 254 93 ss 10 HOUSE 5 0 90 3006 180 94 TA 10 9 100 HOUSE 5 OUR HOUSE 90 34 R 60 3 2 bp S050 R 44 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Point Number of the point to be used as the occupied station This is the second point in the chain being defined within the taping activity Point Number of the point to be used ae ene pack Signe This is Tiree point in the chain being defined within the taping activity Beginning point number to be used for the points computed within the taping activity Feature to be used for the new chain Figure Code to be used for the chain Chain Description 90 Horizontal Right 34 feet use the same elevation as PN 10 90 HZ Right 60 feet Add 3 2 feet to the elevation of the preceding point 90 HZ Left 38 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point 90 HZ Right 44 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point 12 72 Appendix Zo PGR I eee SUP CHE Rigne Gi feet Subtract 2 2 feet from the elevation of the preceding point CAS AD R 104 90 HZ Right 104 feet Elevation the same as the preceding point 28 CP 09 18 1
221. ger to view a directory and do common operations such as selecting copying renaming or deleting files Also included are instructions for sending and receiving files via an RS 232 interface Chapter 9 Customizing SDMS Collector Configurations shape the personality of the system This chapter explains how to edit the system project file I O and tolerance configuration files and how to change default task activity and prompt definitions Chapter 10 Getting Help and Using Macros This chapter details the structure of the SDMS Collector help files and provides guidelines for editing them with a generic ASCII editor It also explains how to create and use keyboard macros to shorten keystroke intensive commands to just a few keystrokes Chapter 11 Examples This chapter has several sample projects to practice using SDMS Collector Chapter 12 Appendix This appendix contains lists of SDMS Collector file naming conventions program files task activity and prompt default definitions configuration and help file defaults and instrument driver configuration requirements The SDMS Data Structure Technical Guide is also included Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 1 5 Introduction How to Use This Manual This manual is not a tutorial It explains features by grouping similar features into chapters For example while the editor is active at many different points in the program editing procedures are explained only in Ch
222. gin and end a chain would be listed in the SDMS Points and Chain file PAC as KO FCO IFAI SACAN PPP PP PEE OIAHORWNHEO SNS o DIAS E gt VO AC PN EES AA SO ZZ 236 005 5 WES ID AC PN 8 8 XX NAGS 507 5401 HZ YES DS AC PN EK XX HZ ZZ ss 10 EP 9480 1798 10561 1445 504 8596 87 2649 109 0900 ss 11 BP 9479 8421 10645 4492 EE 87 4540 UZ s S300 ss 12 EP 9478 1080 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 95 ZE E 24 ZZ Zor HZ AS VAES SC DSE SE AC Zoe PN BOs FR Sle YOKE 32s Keel SN ZZ 34 HZ 33e IES 36 DOE ST AC oon PN OF FE 40 XX 41 Za 42 SS 43 HZ 44 Wie 45 DS 46 AC 47 PN 48 FE 49 XX Sor aves E ZZ 525 HZ Da WAS 54 DSE 55 AC DO PN BY FE 58r ORB Sos AYES 60 ZZ Gules BAS C2 WAIES 63 BS 64 AC GE PN 66 FE Os XX 68 YOR Son ZZ TOR BE Tilo Wig ees Se See BG 74 AC TD FE TC EGS Wiis PL KE AC noe FE a EG Sule BAS E EG 83 CP OM ONS LOST Se 250 2943 87 5554 338 4300 ss E EP 9471 8457 0853 0941 SES 249 1628 88 0814 400 2300 ss 4 EP 9500 9082 056223545 S SOS 22S THs 266 1432 STARLA 114 8700 SS AS BER 9501 4436 10644 9117 507 8418 LISIS 87 4154 195 2400 ss 16 EP SS dE EE Ee 254 1241 ST s SOZ 341 6900 ss Ei EP 9496 3387 10866 5262 SS OZ ADA SUD oA IST 414 9400 BEGIN CHAIN LIST CH TEE 309
223. gt Disk to copy rename or delete files or to view a directory e lt F7 gt Configurations to view and edit configuration files e lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt or lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to record a macro e lt Esc gt to return to DOS Note lt Alt gt lt F10 gt records a macro as it executes it lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt records the macro keystrokes but does not execute it For details see Chapter 10 Getting Help and Using Macros The Project Mode Menus The project mode is accessed from the main menu by pressing lt F1 gt Project Project mode has three menus e Project mode in an activity e Project mode in a sequence Project mode at MIOC MIOC is short for More Input or Command Project Mode in an Activity The project mode menu displayed during an activity is shown in Figure 2 3 VT 89 5915 DS 132 3431 AC BS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 14 SDMS Collector System Basics Figure 2 3 Project Mode in an Activity Functions available from the project mode menu in an activity include lt F1 gt Measure 1 or lt F2 gt Measure 2 to record data from a connected total station when prompted for information that the total station can measure Fl is used to measure the horizontal angle vertical angle and slope distance F2 is used to measure the horizontal and vertical angles only lt F4 gt Get to get a point from a control file and enter the data into the project file Type a new data item to add to the pro
224. h entered here is used as a default only and is suggested by SDMS Collector for a file location This default may be overridden or changed anytime PP The project path tells SDMS Collector where to store and recall project files The path entered here is used as a default only and is suggested by SDMS Collector for file selection This default may be overridden or changed anytime QP The sequence path tells SDMS Collector where to store and recall sequence files The path entered here is used as a default only and is suggested by SDMS Collector for file selection This default may be overridden or changed anytime TP The temporary path tells SDMS Collector where to place temporary files during computations On a data collector or laptop this might be set to an available RAM disk SP The screen pause controls how long the screen pauses when files or reports are printed to the screen Enter the pause in 1 18 seconds 18 1 second The default is 18 I O Communication Devices CD The communication send receive device names the port to use when communicating between SDMS Collector and total stations The default is COM1 RS 232 communications UO Communication Parameters The following I O configuration data tags control communication parameters between SDMS Collector and other peripheral devices Both the computer and the device must use the correct corresponding parameters for successful data transfer The default com
225. h side shot activity AC SS that will be part of the figure in the project file A feature code data item FE is recommended for each chain point but it is not required The feature code used does not have to be the same for every point The points do not have to be sequential in the project data file that is measured one after the other but they must be within the project file for the chain being defined The post processing software will use the feature code of the first point encountered with an OD data item in the project file for a particular figure and assign that feature to the chain to be created If no feature code FE is recorded for that chain point in the project file the processing software being used should assign a user defined or default feature code for the chain created The post processing software will also assign a figure code number FG to identify the figure Normally the value assigned will be in a range that would not be assigned in the field or is set by the user in the post processing software Most post processing software will make a series of two point chains when this technique is used The figure created will appear in the chain list at the bottom of the calculated file or points and chain file Figure 6 2 shows a sample data set for which chains were defined with the Origin Destination method The labels on each point give the point number and Origin Destination data item The point number corresponds to the
226. hain For intersection angles greater than 180 it is necessary to compute temporary points as shown in Figure 6 12 Point collected in field Temporary point at OF Field collected chain Figure 6 12 Points computed parallel to an irregular shaped figure with angles greater than 180 The temporary points are then used to compute the intersect point that will actually be created and stored for defining the parallel figure This point should be on the bisect of the angle between the two temporary points as shown in Figure 6 13 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 100 Appendix O Point collected in field Temporary point at OF A Point computed and stored in CAL or PAC file Field collected chain Parallel chain Figure 6 13 Location of the point to be stored The actual point and figure that will be stored is shown in Figure 6 14 i Point collected in field 90 OF 5 A A Point computed and 90 stored in CAL or PAC i file Field collected chain Parallel chain Figure 6 14 Actual points and chain computed parallel to an irregular shaped chain with angles greater than 180 NOTE The temporary points do not need to be stored in the CAL or PAC file Another scenario to consider is parallel offsets to a figure formed with angles less than 180 The temporary points are computed in the same manner as for a two point chain But in this case the temporary points w
227. hat point or for all the points in a file if recorded in the project header Examples AH A could be equivalent to NGS Order A of 0 1 PPM AH F could be equivalent to NGS First Order of 10 0 PPM Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 5 Appendix Data Tag Description AR Area defines the known or designed area of a closed chain or figure AS config Auto Save when used in the SYS CFG file Yes indicates that files will be automatically saved No indicates that the user will prompted whether or not to save files AV Accuracy Vertical used in a project file to designate the vertical precision of a point if recorded with that point or for all the points in a file if recorded in the project header Examples AV Fl could be equivalent to NGS First Order Class 1 AV T could be equivalent to NGS Third Order AZ Azimuth used to record an azimuth from the current station to either a backsight or foresight point B1 config Baud Rate when used in the IO CFG file designates the communications device baud rate B1 9600 9600 baud Does not apply to the measuring device BG Begin Group Used in the SDMS points and chain PAC file to indicate the beginning of the list of chains generated by SDMS Processor from the shot attribute information listed in that file BP Barometric Pressure used to record the barometric pressure in the units designated by the UP data item BR Bearing used to reco
228. hat exceed the difference will be omitted from final computations HD Horizontal Datum records the user specified name of the horizontal datum such as NAD27 or NAD83 This information can be used by the post processing software for conversions between X Y and Latitude Longitude SDMS will accept any response be sure that the name you use is compatible with the post processing software HE Height Ellipsoid used to record the distance measured along the normal to the ellipsoid between a point on the ground and the surface of the ellipsoid as defined in geodesy and wed with the Global Positioning System GPS Also known as ellipsoid height and height above the ellipsoid HG Height Geoid used to record the distance between the geoid and ellipsoid at a given point as defined in geodesy and used with the Global Positioning System GPS The geoid can be above or below the ellipsoid defined HH Horizontal Angle Computed computes the average Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 9 Appendix Data Tag Description horizontal angle from repeated observations to a point from the same station HT Height records the user specified height of a surveyed object such as a tree or fence HY Highway used to record the name of a highway or road HZ Horizontal Angle used to record a horizontal angle measurement The format used is DDD MMSSS I0 19 Information Field 0 through Information Field 9 used to r
229. he A in AC and type ST but do not press lt ENTER gt ST 11 00 Type 11 39 press lt ENTER gt AC SS Type UE over SS to select the utility elevation po TA PN 201 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point A PD SANITARY Type 24 VCP NW A iveeain utility elevation AC UE Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested utility AONE Diese a deeper pipe PN 202 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point A E ee FE SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested feature PD 24 VCP NW Type 36 RCP Type 14 84 RR O o close on known elevation PN 3 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point S os Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 23 Displayed Examples Instructions and Comments FE SS Type BM PD 36 IN RCP Type DOT 8242 PRR Type 4 15 AC FS Manually select the elevation Z coordinate data tag to enter known closing elevation Back up to the A in AC and type ZC but do not press lt ENTER gt The Cross Section Example Project PRJ File d PR XSEEXAM PRJ 2a TK XSE 3 AC 0S 4 NS Ll Si FE BM 6 PD DOT 8241 DEE EG E AC BS os RR 8 41 LO STs AOR OC LE ACS SS IER EROS ES KS OF 20 ER RR 6 4 LS ACESS ES ERASE Ka ORAS Be EE Qe ACESS 20 FE XSE Sab OE SO wes RR 6 0 DS ASS 24 FE XSE Deve EE 210r BRAINS 2 ACESS Zoe FE XSE GE KEE e RR 8 1 Sa ST 10 41 S2 CM C L 20 ENT LT eax AC SS 34
230. he check activity is used in various situations to allow interaction by the user Primarily it is used to interrupt a sequence so that the user can work interactively with SDMS without having to exit from the sequence The check activity is not saved to the project file The default check activity uses only the AC CK data item Data Tag Description of Data Tag AC CK Check Activity Figure Activity The figure activity is designed to store information needed to draw some standard figure such as a drop inlet based on certain critical points The use of this activity and the critical points that are used must be done in a way that is compatible with the software system used to process the SDMS data The basic idea is to provide the description and measurement items needed to feed a post processing system the information required for a macro to draw standard items like curb and gutter sections culverts inlets The default figure activity is made up of five data items The AC FG data item is always the first entry of a figure activity but the other items may be entered in any order Data Tag Description of Data Tag AC FG Figure activity FE Feature FG Figure Code PL List of critical points TY Type Macro name that will be used Note SDMS Collector and SDMS Processor pass this as information only The responses to the data items will depend on the CADD system used To date no CADD system has elected to use this activity Therefor
231. he current project file is edited from project mode the edit screen contains the current project file and the cursor is at the bottom of the file How to Create a New File If an edit file that does not exist is named SDMS Collector responds NOT FOUND OKAY TO CREATE YES NO as shown in Figure 7 3 C SDMS PRJ NEW PRJ Not Found Ok to Create Mes o Figure 7 3 Create a new file Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 7 2 The Edit Screen Editing Files The Editor e TypeaY to create the file and begin editing e TypeanW to exit editing The edit screen as shown in Figure 7 4 has three main parts e The status line line 1 e The data lines lines 2 through 7 e The editing special function keys line 8 Edit PR TEST CC TK RTO AC 0S YC 121352 293 KC 338667 375 Figure 7 4 The edit screen The first line of the edit screen line is the status line It lists e The name of the edit file e The editing mode either Edit or Edit gt Search e The line number of the edit file on which the cursor is sitting e The status of the insert toggle when Ins appears the insert toggle is turned on The next six lines act as a window to edit the file The bottom line of the edit screen labels the active special function keys for the current editing mode Keys Used in Editing The SDMS Collector editor has various shortcut editing keys available These shortcut keys are listed below Note
232. he end SC of a spiral curve S3 Connecting Spiral Length used with a horizontal alignment to record the spiral length to use between compound circular curves SB Station Back used to indicate the stationing to be used for an alignment HA amp VA from a specific SI back along the alignment SD Station Direction used to indicate whether shots are currently being taken looking up station SD UP increasing stations or down station SD DOWN decreasing stations This is normally used only in tunneling operations SD config Nominal Station Deviation when used in the TOL CFG file defines the station deviation tolerance value SE Set Number used to identify a point as part of a set of repeated measurements to a point from the same station Sets are used to calculate averaged distances and angles Each shot in the set must contain both the SE and FC data items SF config Superelevation File Name used to specify the name of the file where the cross slopes for the sub grade or pavement based on the horizontal alignment specified are defined SH Staff Height used to record the height of the staff target rod or prism on a shot Sr Shot Identification identifies a point as being of certain type Refer to section 5 of the SDMS Technical Data Guide 2000 for detailed information about allowable responses SN Serial Number used to record the serial number of the instrument being used SP Susp
233. he foresight is then the next occupied station in the traverse This pattern may be repeated as many times as desired throughout the traverse Note The computations within SDMS Collector REQUIRE the last foresighted point from an occupied station be the next point used as an occupied station in a traverse Most post processing software use the point numbers assigned and will automatically build the traverse links The traverse task is comprised of set ups A set up consists of the occupied point a reference backsight or station resection and a foresight The set up may contain any number of other allowed horizontal task activities There are three types of set ups beginning intermediate and ending Each type of set up has different activity and data item requirements The Beginning Set Up The activities used in the beginning set up are listed in the following table Activity Data Items The project header activity is defined for all tasks It is not a shot It is used to enter descriptive data about the project and initializes certain computational constants It may be entered AC PR anywhere in a project file although is must Project Header commonly entered immediately after the task data item The data items in the project header activity will be those tags listed in the NEWPR sequence being used These tags normally are barometric pressure BP curvature and refraction CR date DT project identification ID instrument type
234. he highest point number the user used so far was 19 Press lt ENTER gt on the suggested point number to accept and use it Or manually type over the suggestion with a different number and then press lt ENTER gt The user can use this procedure for figure numbers FG as well Intelligent Point Numbering SDMS Collector prompts for default point numbers Suggested point numbers are for convenience only and may be overridden at any time E Default Beginning Point Number Occupied Station 2 Backsight Shot Foresight Shot Sideshot The pattern repeats for each set up e The occupied station point number is that of the last foresight e The backsight point number is that of the previous occupied station e The foresight point number is one greater than the current occupied station point number or is incremented by the data item coding set for point numbers Intelligent point numbering also applied to OD values SDMS will automatically suggest the OD value as the PN value the increment value for PN Correcting Errors There are three ways to correct data entry errors in the project mode e Delete the shot or occupied station that contains the error e Edit the file with the editor e Reenter the correct data before beginning the next activity Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 11 Data Collection Deleting a Shot or Station If the wrong activity is chosen or a serious data entry error is made for a sho
235. he measurement information When the point is staked out the user can use the lt F5 gt Save key to save the coordinate data for that point in the write control file The screen values for all the data items displayed can be saved to the record file REC by pressing lt F6 gt Rec Once the user is satisfied or has completed the required functions for the current point pressing lt F2 gt NewP will clear all data fields so the data for the next point can be entered When this key is pressed all the fields in the current screen are cleared and their values are removed from the program memory Therefore be sure to save any desired data before using this function The staff height SH will redisplay the values from the Orientation screen Summary of the Slope Stakeout Screen The function keys on the Slope Stakeout screen Figure 615 perform the following lt Fl gt Shot Brings up the Slope Stake Shot screen lt F2 gt NewP Clear the current values to input new point data lt F5 gt Save Saves the data displayed or entered for the BS PN FE XC YC ZC to the Write Control WC file The data will be appended to the bottom of the file Checks for duplicate point numbers will be made lt F6 gt Rec Saves records the entire screen data as displayed to the Record REC file lt F8 gt 0R_ Return user to Orientation screen lt Esc gt Backs up one screen Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 19 C
236. his value for other shots in the project Whenever a new SH item is entered it is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen When SH is not entered for a given shot SDMS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 2 SDMS Tasks and Activities Activity Data Items Collector assumes it remains the same as the last time it was entered The station resection activity is an optional activity and in the traverse task it is used exclusively with the beginning occupied station It is used to AC SR compute occupied station coordinates if the user is Station Resection unable to set up on a known station and needs to solve unknown station coordinates This activity is used after the occupied station activity SH YC XC ZC and HZ are required for three point resections SH YC XC ZC HZ VT and DS are required for two point resections AC FS The foresight activity records SH HZ VT and Foresight DS to the next point to be occupied The Intermediate Set Up The required activities in an intermediate set up are listed in the following table Activity Data Items The intermediate occupied station receives coordinates from the foresight point established from the previous set up These are computed values and should not be entered by the surveyor Traverse computations in SDMS Collector always assume that the previous foresight is being i occupied In addition to the point number and AC OS point descrip
237. horizontal slope ratio to be used at any given station along the roadway being defined The file is structured to indicate the station number and slope ratio to the left and right of centerline SUP is used as the file extension for Superelevation files This information is used in stake out to determine the left and right side slopes of the roadway surface at any station along the alignment Transition sections are computed based on interpolation between the stations listed in the file Data Item Description AC PR All data before the first activity other than a project header activity is ignored The project header information is for documentation only However systems that read and write this file may need to know some of the information such as the metadata items for units datum coordinate systems combination factors etc Ultimately such information should be checked against the similar settings in the system reading this data and provide warnings or conversions as needed Any valid SDMS descriptive tags can be used under this activity OPTIONAL AC EQ Station Equations are optional in the superelevation fle Equations if listed must be the same equations listed in the horizontal alignment file All equations must be listed in the order they appear in the alignment and cannot be located on a curve or spiral element EQ Equation number is used to indicate the number of the equation in the alignment and can be used as the ID o
238. ia wires The constant relates to the cross hairs on the level instrument being used If it is a FULL STADIA instrument then the difference between the top and bottom wire readings will be 1 foot at a distance of 100 feet when using a foot rod If it is a ONE THIRD STADIA instrument then the difference between the top and bottom wire readings will be 1 foot at a distance of 333 feet when using a foot rod The same ratio rules apply when using YARD and METER RODS When using a FULL Stadia instrument with a METER ROD the difference between the top and bottom wire readings will be 1 meter at a distance of 100 meters See note in second paragraph of this section above When defining prompt or user shot sequences for the three wire level task it is only necessary to enter the rod reading RR data tag one time per shot SDMS Collector automatically converts this data tag to R1 R2 and R3 during data collection Note If there is no elevation ZC provided with an occupied station AC OS but elevations ZC are provided on one or all the foresights that follow that AC OS the post processing software should compute the file from the point where the first ZC is encountered to the end of the file or until another AC OS is encountered Note Multiple loops can be collected in the same project file Each loop should start with AC OS This tells the post processing software the intent is to start a new loop from that point to the end of the file o
239. ical Alignment files User shot sequence files Superelevation files Default prompt sequence Temporary files The SDMS Collector Program Files SDMS Collector program files include the executable file the configuration files the help files and the default prompt sequence file TASK TGS All of these files must be located in the same directory named as the default DP in the I O configuration file File Name Purpose Edit in SDMS CNTL CFG Names control and alignment files Yes or use DOS editor CNTL HLP Control file configuration help No use DOS editor HALIGN TMP Temporary file used to compile current No use DOS horizontal alignment file editor 10 CFG Names I O devices and default paths Yes or use DOS editor IO HLP T O configuration help No use DOS editor NEWPR SEQ Default sequence for opening new jobs Yes PROJECT CFG Sets controls in the project configuration Yes or use DOS editor PROJECT HLP Project configuration help No use DOS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 2 Tasks Activities File Name SYS CFG SYS HLP SDMS EXE TAGS HLP TASK TGS TOL CFG TOL HLP Purpose Appendix Edit in SDMS editor Sets options in the system configuration Yes or use DOS editor System configuration help No use DOS editor Runs the SDMS program No Lists data tags and allowed responses No use DOS editor Defines activities and data items by task Yes Sets survey collection Tolerance help tolerances fo
240. ile But the stationing used for the vertical alignment control points must be within the stationing limits defined in the associated horizontal alignment file NOTE If the station value could occur at two or more locations the format n is used n is a positive integer value used to indicate the section of the alignment in which the equation is located n 1 meaning between the beginning of the alignment and the first station equation n 2 second section etc If n is not given the first section of the alignment is assumed In other words there are no station equations involved The X coordinate for the beginning point of the vertical alignment based on the stationing of the horizontal alignment being used REQUIRED The Y coordinate for the beginning point of the vertical alignment based on the stationing of the horizontal alignment being used REQUIRED The elevation of the beginning point of the vertical alignment REQUIRED VPI for the point at the beginning and end of the vertical alignment and where two vertical slope lines meet REQUIRED Defines the length of vertical curve from the VPC to the VPI along the station axis REQUIRED Defines the length of vertical curve from the VPI to the VPT along the station axis This value will equal L1 for symmetrical curves but must be listed REQUIRED The description of the next segment begins here Use any activity data item except AC PR or EQ REQ
241. ill automatically adjusts the traverse using the Compass Rule If the closures are not within tolerances the user will be asked if they still want to proceed with the adjustment If not SDMS Collector will just put the unadjusted coordinates in the CTL file Note SDMS Collector will also compute trigonometric elevations but it will not adjust them to intermediate known elevations and it will not use distance reductions to backsight shots for the closure or adjustment computations Combined Task TK COM SDMS Collector will first compute and adjust the traverse portion It will then use the adjusted traverse points to compute all sideshots multistub shots intersects etc Any sideshots are computed from these adjusted shot elevations If the traverse is not complete SDMS Collector will proceed as if it were a Radial Topography task Radial Topography Task TK RTO SDMS Collector will first compute any resections Then it will compute sideshots multi stub shots intersects etc If there is an active horizontal alignment then SDMS Collector will project the shot positions onto the alignment to compute the station and offset for each shot Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 27 Computations Vertical Tasks Single Wire Level Task TK LEV SDMS Collector will compute the error in vertical closure and if within tolerance will then adjust the shot elevations by the error of closure divided by the number of turning points
242. ill fall beyond the actual point and parallel chain location as shown in Figure 6 15 should be placed in the same way as the closed figure ast O Point collected in field 22 Temporary point at OF Field collected chain Parallel chain Figure 6 15 Points computed parallel to an irregular shaped figure with angles less than 180 This point should be on the bisector of the angle between the two temporary points as shown in Figure 6 16 The new point is generated at the intersection of the parallel chain if they were extended to the temporary points Point collected in field Temporary point at OF Point computed and stored in CAL or PAC file Field collected chain Parallel chain Figure 6 16 Temporary points will overlap for angles less than 180 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 101 Appendix The actual point and figure that will be stored is shown in Figure 6 17 Point collected in field Point computed and stored in CAL or PAC file Field collected chain Parallel chain Figure 6 17 Actual points and chain stored parallel to an irregular shaped figure with angles less than 180 Creating Points and Chains Parallel to Closed Figures Points and chains can be computed parallel to the outside and inside of a closed figure Temporary points must be computed to generate the required points for the parallel chain A parallel chain outside the closed figure will generate the
243. in the I O configuration If this toggle is turned off no automatic printer logging occurs during data collection Yes turns this toggle on No turns it off The default is No Note If the computer on which SDMS Collector is running is connected to a total station and the PD is COM1 logging to the printer cannot occur and is automatically turned off AD This data item controls the automatic date and time stamping feature The default is OFF The choices are e PROJ The system date and time are stamped at the beginning of each project e STAT The system date and time are stamped at the beginning of each occupied station activity immediately following the AC OS data item e SHOT The system date and time are stamped at the beginning of each activity immediately following the AC XX data item e OFF No automatic date time entries are made Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 9 5 Customizing SDMS Collector OP If the overwrite protection toggle is turned on a source file cannot be overwritten with an edited file Edits must be saved in a new file If this toggle is turned off a source file may be overwritten with an edited file Yes turns this toggle on No turns it off The default is No RP If the file removal protection lock is turned on files cannot be deleted using the SDMS Collector file deletion feature If this lock is turned off files can be deleted within SDMS Collector Yes turns this toggle on No turns it of
244. ind the requested point it returns to the point number field Note To facilitate stakeout name the control file of the coordinates to be staked as the primary staking control file S1 If the user has both the known control points and the points to be staked in the same control file it is okay to name the same file in the L1 and the S1 control files SDMS Collector is not limited to searching the control files mentioned above The user may pull data from any control file named in the CNTL CFG file by simply typing the desired point number a comma and the control file data tag in which the point is located For example e Point number 103 in the write control file is represented as 103 WC e Point number 502 in the secondary staking control file is represented as 302 52 Data based on Horizontal Alignment Profile and Superelevation The second level of computations is based on using a control file with no ST or OF stored in the file and the named horizontal alignment h this case all computations for station offset will be based on the horizontal alignment named The elevation stored in the control file will be used in this case A control file and horizontal alignment file must be named in the control configuration file CNTL CFG for computations to function in this manner It is important to remember the control file cannot contain ST or OF The third level of computations is based again on using a control file with no ST
245. ine reads that the ROADS sequence is active at level one and that there are four shots activities remaining in the sequence The level of a sequence will be discussed later in the chapter When a sequence with tags only is used the sequence message line reads Level x Tags Only Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 5 5 User Shot Sequences Skipping or Repeating Shots in a Sequence To skip over a shot in a sequence press lt PgDn gt when SDMS Collector displays MIOC This advances the user to the next shot in the sequence Pressing lt PgDn gt on the last shot in the sequence produces a harmless No More Shots in File message To repeat a shot in the current sequence press lt PgUp gt when SDMS Collector displays MIOC This lets the user repeat the most recently completed shot in the sequence It does not replace the first execution of that activity it just lets the user repeat the series of prompts for the activity Pressing lt PgUp gt on the first shot in the sequence produces a harmless At Top of File message Escaping from a Sequence Anytime SDMS Collector displays MIOC the user can exit sequences entirely Simply press lt Esc gt to return to standard data collection If two or more levels of sequences are active press lt Esc gt one time for each level to exit Escaping from an Activity in a Sequence To escape from the middle of an activity in a sequence without canceling the entire sequence just enter th
246. int Description lt ENTER gt OAK Oak Tree POPLAR Poplar Tree H Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 10 3 Getting Help and Using Macros The items OAK and POPLAR have been added as optional valid responses for PD While the system will accept this the proper use of these added responses depends on the software that processes the data files In addition certain tags such as AC have a set list of responses that will cause problems and should not be changed or added to by the user For many descriptive tags however adding items to the list can save a lot of typing for the user in the field How to Edit Help Files How to Get Help Help files cannot be edited within SDMS Collector An ASCII editor must be used instead Be sure to maintain the help file structure and format Rules and guidelines for editing help files are as follows e Before editing a help file make a backup copy of the default help file If a serious editing error is made the default backup file can be copied back to the system e Keep backup copies of any help files to edit e Never delete or add data tags e Never delete or add responses to the Activity AC and Task TK tags e Never change the order of the data tags in the listing Changing the order of the tags results in a system error and causes SDMS Collector to get lost e The user may change the order of the suggested responses in to the response list of a data tag The only placeme
247. ion purposes only DC Degree of Curvature used in the Horizontal Alignment file to define a curve s degree of curvature It may also be used in a project file to document a degree of curvature for a curve DD Distance Computed where multiple observations are made of a point from the same station this data item records the averaged distance DH Distance Horizontal used to record a measured horizontal distance DI Diameter records the diameter of a surveyed object such as a culvert pipe or a tree DL Delete Shot Station used to delete a single shot DL SH or delete a station and all of its related shots DL ST Deleted items are not actually removed from the project file only marked as deleted DO Direction of Offset used to record whether offsets to the prism in an activity are horizontal DO H or vertical DO V DP Depth used to record the depth of cover of a surveyed object DP config Data Path when used in the IO CFG file it designates the default directory path for SDMS project files DS Distance Slope used to record a slope distance measurement Usually used in conjunction with a vertical Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 7 Appendix Data Tag Description angle VT and horizontal angle HZ data item DS config Distance Tolerance Sets When used in the TOL CFG file to specify the standard deviation of a measured distance from the mean DT Date reco
248. is incremented from the new number entered Point Numbering Hierarchy Point numbering schemes raise some interesting possibilities not usually found in a data collector Examine these sequence files assume that all necessary measurement or coordinate items are present but not shown SS SEQ FS SEQ BS SEQ OS SEQ AC SS AC FS AC BS AC OS PN 100 PN 500 PN 999 PN blank Notice that the first three sequences have a value entered in the point number field of the sequence PN 100 PN 500 and PN 999 respectively SDMS Collector automatically increments these numbers when the sequence is used The fourth file OS SEQ has no data entered in the point number field When this sequence is called SDMS Collector uses the next available point number from the main level of project mode The point number is not impacted by numbering schemes from any other sequence Suppose sequence OS SEQ is called immediately after a new project is created Intelligent point numbering suggests a default of 2 in the point number field because no numbering scheme was entered in this sequence When sequence BS SEQ is called SDMS Collector suggests the point number 998 as the default But if a backsight is selected manually by typing in AC BS using the standard activity definition the suggested default PN 1 is displayed in the point number field It would not be 1000 because 1000 pertains only to backsights in the sequence BS SEQ Note While these discussions
249. istance used to record the standard deviation in the mean of multiple distance measurements EG End Group List Used in the SDMS points and chains PAC file to indicate the end of the list of chains generated by SDMS Processor from the shot attribute information listed in that file EH Error Horizontal Angle used to record the standard deviation from the mean of multiple horizontal angle measurements EQ Equation Number used to the point number of a station equation in an alignment ER config Error Radial Topography Radius when used in the TOL CFG file defines the radial topography error radius tolerance value ES Ending Station identifies the ending station of a survey loop EV Error Vertical Angle used to record the standard deviation in the mean of multiple vertical angle measurements EX External Distance Horizontal Curve used with a horizontal alignment PI Definition to record the distance Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 8 Appendix Data Tag Description from the PI to the midpoint of the arc defined between the PC and PT to the PI FC Face Number used to record which face of the instrument was used for each shot when recording a set of repeated shots to a point from the same station FC 1 indicates direct FC 2 indicates reverse This must always be used in conjunction with the set SE data item FE Feature Code used to record an alpha numeric or alpha nu
250. its of pressure data item documents in which units barometric pressure data items are recorded Choose B millibars or I inches The default is I OS This is the old project opening sequence file that SDMS Collector automatically calls when a suspended or closed project file is reopened Any sequence file can be named here The default is blank no opening sequence for old projects NS This is the new project opening sequence file that SDMS Collector automatically calls when a new project is opened Any sequence file can be used here The default is NEWPR SEQ supplied with the program The extension SEQ is not required in the project configuration file RT The rod type data item specifies the type of rod used during a three wire leveling task If a yard rod is specified readings are reduced to feet If a foot or meter rod is specified no conversion is made Choose from F foot Y yard or M meter The default is F MM The minimum memory data item specifies the value at which SDMS Collector will automatically notify the user at every AC OS that the remaining available memory is getting low This value is given in bytes with each byte being approximately equal to one keystroke The default is 1000 bytes The System Configuration SYS CFG LP If the log to printer toggle is turned on all entered data is automatically logged to the named connected print device the device named under the PD data tag
251. ivities include elevation control control check sideshot intersect utility elevation and project header The technical specifications for all but the sideshot and utility elevation are the same as shown in the traverse task Activities H Data Items Sideshot The data items that must me included in a sideshot are the SH HZ VT and DS measurements These define the AC SS relationship between this point and the associated OS and BS Remember that if the SH is not included SDMS Collector will assume it is the same as the last time it was entered in the project file Typically the next most important data item in a side shot activity is the PN data item since it is used by the processing system to determine if there are 2 or more sideshots with the same point number This creates a multi stub SS The rest of the descriptive data items further define the attributes of the side shot point such as FE TY and PD or the Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 6 SDMS Tasks and Activities Activities Data Items relationship it has with other side shot points such as OD or FG to define which points get connected on a plan drawing Utility The utility elevation activity is used to determine the Elevation elevation of an underground utility A sideshot is taken to a point directly above the underground utility The utility AC UE elevation activity records the rod reading of a rod dropped down to the utility itsel
252. izontal Alignment File ALI with Spirals and Equations Pl Definition dk AC ae PR Ee NM 4 EMS Se eik io Et Po VD om HDS CR ZN 10 RE del DT 12 RE LS Ty 14 AC TUS EQ TG SB E SI 18 AC 19 EQ 207 SB vale SE SE AC SR SI 24 EE 25 XC 26 AC Bi S 28 KAS 29 XC 30 Sil eal 52 32 RA 3S AC 34 SUL 35 YE oo XC SE Sil 28 S2 39 RA 40 AC 41 Sit 42 KAS 43 XC 44 RA 45 AC 46 SI 47 YG 48 XG 49 RA 50 AC Sl Si 52 YE 53 XC 54 RA 55 AC 56 Si S YE 38 XC 59 R1 60 R2 61 gt gt 62 AC EE SI 64 YC 65 XC PR STHG STATE HWY A HWY B DESIGN HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT 03 26 1998 M3 NGVD 29 NAD 83 1991 4802 GENO 03 26 1998 GENO SSES SEO SNA SS 11 400 000 0 K2 SLL AST 2 140 000 808 Oto 3 696 12063 70 369000 DITS S a 1 S100 305 BAD 206859 002023 759712 393480 30 000000 30 000000 435 000000 205 SPT EE E EE 50 000000 50 000000 O DO SOS AR 207200 163795 759447 697336 435 000000 305 SRL 207594 266000 113593242 394000 EE 105 SES EE EE 480 000000 OS Sab 208076 928466 759174 304456 300 000000 400 000000 150 000000 705 PAD 208605 886025 ST S9ES EOI SS7 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 All equations listed immediately following AC PR Be gina AB soe ES PAE ul Spiral Simple Simple Simple Curve Spiral Curve SpLralj Curve
253. izontal alignment file name E cont all Alignment File H enter VA vertical alignment file name sr 12 0 Superelevation File G enter SF superelevation file name The I O SES File 1O CFG AS A S SA 00 JO UG GA b k OC DP C SDMS PRJ PP C SDMS PRJ QP C SDMS SEQ 3 TP C SDMS TEMP ERR ACOM 9600 NONE NONE LS sl SES BEGIN END 200 80 No No No Q DOS Oaam ta D y Ed tae dao et qu ep 10 tye foe Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 22 Appendix The I O Configuration Help File 1O HLP el 5 D AIA Gs GA b RA Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 S7 O iewe bath DH enter new default data path PP 37 0 Project Path enter new default project path P 37 0 Sequence Path Os gt r enter new default sequence path TP 37 0 Temp Path DH enter new temporary work path SP 3 1 Screen Pause in 1 18 sec 18 d 18 default screen pause page 1 sec CD 5 0 Communication Send Receive Device COM1 COM1 COM1 device COM2 COM2 device B1 5 1 Baud Rate 9600 300 300 baud 1200 1200 baud 2400 2400 baud 4800 4800 baud 79600 9600 baud P1 4 0 Parity NONE ODD odd parity checking EVEN even parity checking NONE no parity checking PR 8 0 Protocol NONE NONE NO PROTOCOL XON XOFF XON XOFF PROTOCOL DL dd Data Baltes D 7 7 data bits 8 8 data bits il 1 T SEOS ere
254. izontal distance DH and the Delta Z DZ will also be computed and displayed based on the occupied station point data entered on the Orientation screen and the point data entered on the Slope Stakeout screen The instrument is then turned until the horizontal angle reading on the instrument display equals the HZ value The horizontal distance DH is used to tell how far the desired point will be from the instrument location The staff height SH entered on the Orientation screen will also be displayed This value can be changed as needed as shots are taken If the staff height needs to be changed for a particular shot or shots it can be done at this screen These values will be used to compute the length offset LO and the Delta Z DZ for that particular point When the prism is set in that direction the user can use the lt Fl gt Meas key to measure the actual values for the horizontal angle HZ slope distance DS and vertical angle VT to the prism This data can be entered manually when no instrument is active by using the HVD Data Entry screen Figure 6 9 The data can be reviewed on the HDV data screen as shown in Figure 6 17 The data on this screen is described in detail in the section discussing Alignment Control Stakeout HVD 14429 5905 S 6096 2684 BR N29 5905E 00 25 5807 22 77 4972 HZ 30 VT 150 DZ 2 5028 DS 200 DH 100 Lal Ell E Rec OR Figure 6 17 HVD Data Screen for Slope Stake
255. ject file lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt or lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to record a macro Project Mode in a User Shot Sequence The project mode menu displayed when a sequence file is used during data collection is shown in Figure 2 4 AC SS PN 100 SI PD TOP OF CURB Vom TC SH 5 AS Sec Sm SE Level 1 Shot 4 Get o AC S PN 100 SH 5 PD TOP OF CURB aa TC SH 5 ez Seg CS SE Level 1 Shot 4 Sia Figure 2 4 Project Mode Menu in a User Shot Sequence The line above the function keys displays information related to a shot sequence Details on this information can be found in Chapter 5 User Shot Sequence Functions available from the project mode menu during a user shot sequence include Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 lt F1 gt Measure 1 or lt F2 gt Measure 2 as defined to record data from a connected total station when prompted for information that the total station can measure lt F3 gt Save Sequence to update a constant in the sequence lt F4 gt Get to get a point from a control file and enter the data into the project file Type a response to a data tag or insert a new data item to add to the project file lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt or lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to record a macro 2 15 SDMS Collector System Basics Project Mode at MIOC More Input or Command The project mode menu at MIOC is shown in Figure 2 5 FE FE PD 8 SPIKE HZ 6 6066 UT 91 2345 DS 466 32
256. k This description including BM elevation can also be coded into the preceding AC OS The foresight activity is used to carry elevations forward from the instrument set up to a point used as a turning point or to the closing point of the level run The foresight activity contains the three wire rod readings and can also include a known closing elevation Generally the description of the turning points are coded the first time the point is measured to An AC CC is a control check which would involve the software doing a comparison of the AC CC point elevation against the computation of that point from the current PRJ file This would thus involve the SDMS Collector computations showing the delta Z DZ at this point The AC CC will only compute and display the difference and will continue with the project values for elevation AC EC is a way to establish the correct elevation for the current setup Thus while it would do the same computation as the AC CC to establish the difference in elevation at that point it would then use the elevation value as established by the AC EC to continue on with the level loop The turning point rod reading is taken from an instrument set up The instrument is then moved to a new set up and the turning point is again shot form the 3 9 SDMS Tasks and Activities Activities Data Items AC TP new set up as a backsight It is processed as for the Turning point turning point activity in the cross sec
257. k and ahead distances To nullify the affect of instrument miss adjustment the user Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 1 Computations should attempt to adjust their sight lengths such that this running imbalance stays close to zero As discussed in a previous chapter the W3 constant depends on the telescope of the level being used If it is a full stadia telescope then a difference of one unit between R1 and R3 translates to 100 times that unit for the distance the level is from the rod In this case W3 is set to 100 units In other words if R1 R3 is 1 meter and the instrument has a full stadia telescope then the distance to the rod is 100 meters For a one third height stadia instrument W3 would be 333 units per unit of R1 R3 Resection Tolerance For two 2 point station resection SDMS Collector first computes the results of the coordinates of the occupied station for each possible combination of the measurements for a 2 point resection in which all distances and angles are measured there would be 4 possible solutions then computes the mean and standard deviation of these results If the standard deviation is greater than the resection tolerance SDMS Collector will display the information as shown in Figure 6 2 and the user has the option to accept or reject the computation If the standard deviation is less than the default tolerance the computation will be completed without user interaction Computed Re
258. ksight lt F2 gt Stak Brings up the Stakeout Alignment Control screen lt F3 gt Slop Brings up the Slope Stakeout screen lt F6 gt Rec Saves records the entire screen data as displayed to the Record REC file Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 11 Computations lt F7 gt Func Brings up the Project Function menu lt F8 gt 0R_ Return user to Orientation screen lt Esc gt Backs up one screen The data displayed on the Shot Inverse screen is as follows AZ The computed value of the azimuth between the occupied station point and the backsight point BR The computed value of the bearing between the occupied station point and the backsight point DD The computed horizontal distance from inverse occupied station point and the backsight point DZ The computed value of the elevation difference algebraic between the known elevation of the backsight point known minus the elevation based on the measurement DH The horizontal distance based on the slope distance DS and vertical angle VT measured HZ The horizontal angle measured from occupied station to the backsight or input by user CF The combination factor from Project Configuration file Project cfg or input by user Summary of the HVD Data Entry Screen The function keys on the HVD Data screen Figure 6 9 perform the following lt Fl gt Save Allows manual entered HZ VT and DS to be used to
259. l tasks and in activities such as utility elevation AC UE in horizontal tasks In vertical tasks all rod readings are positive unless the rod is inverted In horizontal tasks positive readings are used to record depth values RS Ring Style special data tag for tunneling operations that indicates the type of ring being observed RS CIRC RS BOX and RS ARCH indicate circular rectangular or arched ring styles respectively Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 13 Appendix Data Tag Description RT Rod Type used to specify the units of graduation of the rod being used Valid responses are YARD FOOT and METER Yard measurements are automatically converted into feet RT config Resection Tolerance when used in the TOL CFG file defines the resection tolerance value in UL S1 config Stop Bit Length when used in the IO CFG file designates the number of stop bits for serial communications 1 or 2 Staking 1 Control File Name used in CNTL CFG to name the primary staking point file This file defines coordinates for points to be staked out in the field S1 Entry Spiral Length used with a horizontal alignment to record the spiral length to use at the beginning TS of a spiral curve S2 config Staking 2 Control File Name used in CNTL CFG to name the secondary staking point file S2 Exit Spiral Length used with a horizontal alignment to record the spiral length to use at t
260. llector automatically stores project specific data in a separate file This file is given the same file name as the project file with the extension SP It contains e The status of intelligent point numbering e The maximum point number used in the project e The maximum figure number used in the project e The value of the IT instrument type data tag so it is not necessary to rename an instrument unless the instrument originally being used has been changed Closing a Project When the project is closed all the project specific data such as instrument type IT is lost This data must be reentered when the project is reopened Details for reopening an existing project can be found in this chapter Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 13 User Shot Sequences Chapter 5 User Shot Sequences This chapter describes e The purpose and benefits of sequences e Data required in sequences e The default project header sequence NEWPR SEQ e How to create and edit sequences with tips and shortcuts using sequences as building blocks inserting standard shots automatically jumping to another sequence and inserting user help messages e How to use a simple sequence in data collection including skipping or repeating shots and escaping from a sequence How to use up to six levels of sequences Special handling of constant descriptive items How to insert a standard default shot in a sequence Point numbering schemes How t
261. losed Reopen Viez do Figure 4 3 Open an existing project Default Sequence for Reopening Projects The user can specify a default start up sequence for a reopened project then continue data collection as usual See chapter 9 Customizing SDMS Collector for information on setting the Default Sequence Old Job OS in the system configuration Using a Total Station If the computer running SDMS Collector is connected properly with a total station the user can get the measurements from the total station and SDMS Collector writes the data directly to the project file SDMS Collector identifies the total stations using the driver names of instruments supported by SDMS Naming a Total Station Before using a total station to do the data collection the user needs to tell SDMS Collector which total station will be used Each supported total station has a unique device driver name The user specifies the selected total station by using the instrument type data tag IT How to Name the Total Station Use the instrument type data tag IT to name the total station Enter this data tag into the project file like any other data tag The IT data tag is in the default new project sequence NEWPR SEQ When a new project is started the user is prompted for the total station to be used The user answers this prompt with one of the driver names in the table above The instrument type can be accessed from the help file by pres sing whe
262. lowing table Activities I Data Items The project header activity is defined for all tasks It is not a shot It is used to enter descriptive data about the project and initializes certain computational constants It may be entered anywhere in a project file although is AC PR must commonly entered immediately after the task data Project Header item The data items in the project header activity will be those tags listed in the NEWPR sequence being used These tags normally are barometric pressure BP curvature and refraction CR date DT project identification ID instrument type IT name NM observer OB recorder RE instrument serial number SN temperature TE time TM weather WE The calculated file CAL will list the same data tags but will also include many of the configuration parameters listed in the configuration files This includes combination factor CF first location control file L1 second location control file L2 rod type RT first staking file S1 second staking file S2 units of angles UA units of length UL units of pressure UP units of temperature UT and version of data Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 8 Activities SDMS Tasks and Activities Data Items collector software VR AC OS Occupied Station AC BS Backsight AC FS Foresight AC CC Control Check AC EC Elevation Control Survey Data Management System
263. lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point description CTRL PT HZ Type 181 5540 Type 90 3020 Type 835 533 The staff height has changed again so a new SH value must be entered Move to the A in AC and type SH but do not press lt ENTER gt yet SDMS Collector suggests the last entered staff height Change it to 5 The azimuth data tag must be added manually to enter known closing azimuth Move to the A in AC and type AZ but do not press lt ENTER gt yet Type 91 3352 AC FS Press lt Esc gt to leave data collection Close or Suspend Type a C to close the project Choose a SDMS Collector returns to the main menu Command Note Remember sequences can be used to set up the prompts for all the tags used in an activity This eliminates the need to overwrite the tags during data collection The Traverse Example Project PRJ File PR TRAEXAM TK TRA AC 0S BNE IID BIC AREY SE WEL eZ EE SR SAO 9p EE KOS ZC 448 225 a AC BS Is PN 26 LS ADS CAUSE SE 14 HZ 0 foo iron Sq HSS OA AA Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 12 Examples 15 VESO EE 16 DSE ONE ISA L7 YO Peo Sa XC 853960 738 noe ING SIMS 20 PN 101 21 PD TRAV IET ees HZ 54 4048 Ka VES SO ZISA 24 DSS OSOS De EE 26 AC 0S GH PN 101 28 PD TRAV PT 29 THRA SIS EE Sil AC BS 224 PN 27 Ber PICIRI EE 34 HZ 0 Sor VT 87 3846 Sion D st SS AC FS Boe PNLOZ Sere PPETRAV PT
264. lt tasks and activities conform to The AASHTO SDMS Data Structure Technical Guide 2000 Currently SDMS Collector has ten tasks Horizontal Tasks TK Vertical Tasks TK Combined COM Cross section XSE Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 9 8 Customizing SDMS Collector Horizontal Tasks TK Vertical Tasks TK Control network CON Level run LEV Photo control PHO Profile PRO Radial topography RTO Three wire level 3WR Terrain model TMO IN Only the activities defined for the current task are available during data collection this also applies to user shot sequences For example assume the default task and activity definitions for a traverse project If the user attempts a sideshot SDMS Collector warns AC not valid for this task Either select another activity or modify the default definitions to include the activity How to Change Task and Activity Definitions The default task activity definition file is named TASK TGS Each task has a set of predefined activities and data tags see the Appendix for a list of these defaults Note The TASK TGS file must be stored in the program directory the same directory as the SDMS EXE file From the main menu press lt F2 gt Edit Or during data collection press lt F7 gt Functions then lt F2 gt Edit When asked for the file to edit name the SDMS Collector program path and the file TASK TGS then press lt RETURN gt Note If the task
265. me extensions Extension File Type CFG EDI MAC oa PRO Vertical AlignmentFile TMP Note Never change or alter program file names or extensions The SDMS Collector Menus SDMS Collector uses a function key driven menu system An SDMS Collector menu is a text display on the screen with some Special Function Keys SFK on the bottom Ine Beginning at the left most SFK they are referred to as lt F1 gt through lt F8 gt The user controls the program by using these function keys Some SDMS Collector menus can be accessed from only one place in the program while others are available in several places The Esc key is used to exit from the current menu to the previous menu Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 13 The Main Menu SDMS Collector System Basics The main menu shown in Figure 2 2 displays e The Choose a Command prompt e The main menu keys e The SDMS Collector version number and release date e The system date time and available disk space Ver 3 5 8 Maio H Date B6 14 20B2 Tinc 09 03 46 Disk Space fAvail 1823932928 Choose a Command PD P2 F3 F4 FS F6 F F8 Figure 2 2 The main menu Functions available from the main menu include e lt Fl gt Projectto open a new or reopen an existing project e lt F2 gt Edit to edit a data or sequence file e lt F3 gt Computations to process data files in batch mode e lt F4 gt I 0 to send receive or print files via RS 232 port e lt F5
266. meric feature code for a point or chain FG Figure Code used to assign a common figure number to all points that are part of the same figure or chain Points with the same figure number should be connected together by the post processing software in the order recorded to form a chain FP config Format Path when used in the IO CFG file designates the default directory path for predefined output formats GM Geometry Type used to tag the geometric type of a point in a chain For example if GMC curve is used the chain should have a smooth curve going through the point If GM P Point is used the chain should have a straight line between points Verify how these data items are used by the post processing software to define chains GR Group used to group sets of surveyed object together in the post processing software database Items with the same group tag should be placed on the same level layer zone etc H1 Help displays on line help text during data collection Does not record any information to the project file HA Horizontal Alignment File Name gives the name of the file that defines the geometry of the horizontal alignment The alignment geometry is used for station offset calculations HA config Horizontal Angle Set Difference used in TOL CFG to set the tolerance allowed between an individual horizontal angle measured in sets and the mean horizontal angle computed from the sets Horizontal angles t
267. mpares tolerances in the TOL CFG file with results during computations Each data tag in this file is described in TOL HLP file The user can access this file to define tolerances using the lt F7 gt Tol key on the configurations menu Some tolerances are checked as data is collected while others are checked during batch computations In either case if a result exceeds a tolerance SDMS Collector displays a waming message but usually allows the user to continue computing if they want to Three Wire Tolerance Stadia Imbalance During data collection using the three wire level task SDMS Collector computes the differences between R1 and R2 and between R2 and R3 and then checks the difference in these differences against the default tolerance If the difference is out of the tolerance SDMS Collector displays a warning message as shown in Figure 6 1 Figure 6 1 Warning Message for Out of Three Wire Tolerance This message is displayed for a few seconds and then SDMS Collector returns to the R1 prompt and the user must re observe the three rod readings Another check provided by SDMS Collector during a three wire leveling task is referred to as the stadia imbalance Using the R1 and R3 rod readings along with the stadia constant defined as W3 in the PROJECT CFG file SDMS can compute the distances to the backsight and foresight or turning points SDMS Collector then displays a running total of the imbalance between these bac
268. mputed Three Wire Level Example Saved As A Control CTL File SE ACIER Zas PR JOB TRAVEXAM So NM STATE HWY 1136 4 CM CONTROL FILE De DT 03 26 1998 Ge HD NAD 83 1996 Any SDMS compliant data E VD NAVD 88 tags may follow the AC PR Sio UL M3 oS ZN 4802 TOF PANG ll als ASS TAS JS PD USCGS 3005A LS AC FS 14 EE Sa ACs LOLS SO LS PD USCGS 3005B Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 46 Cross Section Task TK XSE Project PRJ File ke ER 2n TR SES AC 4 ID Gite JEJE 6 SN Ts NM 8 TE 9 BP 10 OB del RE E DT ES WE 14 CR 15 CF 16 UL EY UA 18 UT 19 UP 20 VR 2 AC 22 PN 23 PD 24 ZC 25 AC 26 RR 27 AC 28 SF 29 AC 30 OF Sch RR SE AC SS OF 34 RR 35 AC 36 OF Sy RR 38 AC 39 OF 40 RR 41 AC 42 OF 43 RR 44 AC 45 sur 46 CM 47 AC 48 OF 49 RR 50 PD SCH AC 527 OF SES RR 54 PD 55 AC 56 OF S RR 58 PD 597 AC 60 OF 61 RR 625 PD 635 AC 64 SE gor AC ral Wey deal SL SDMS Collector 3 4 0 OS ek DOT 8241 t1292 226 BS 8 41 SST 10 00 SS 10 6 4 SS ZO ae gis SE GES SS 225 ee SS 50 SCH SST le SC SEL OEN EE SS 20 al SE SS LES 5 4 S N SS AS O C L ENT SS GE 6 4 END ENT SST EEN SS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 XSEEXAM BASI TER HWY 136 SOKKIA Bl 276428 PROJECTE 62 123 SS LEE K ADAMS K ADAMS SES Et CLEAR SH LT Appendix 12 47 66
269. munication parameters are for an IBM PC Note that all communication parameters related to the total station are hard coded with the instrument driver IT and do not utilize these settings UO Printing Controls Bl This tag sets the baud rate Choose from 300 1200 2400 4800 or 9600 The default is 9600 Pl This tag sets the parity Choose from ODD EVEN or NONE The default is NONE PR This tag sets the data transfer protocol Choose XON XOFF or NONE The default is NONE D1 This tag sets the data bits Choose 7 or 8 The default is 8 Sl This tag sets the stop bits Choose 1 or 2 The default is 1 The following I O data tags control printing conditions Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 9 3 Customizing SDMS Collector PD Print device names the printer connected to SDMS Collector The default is LPT1 The possible choices are Port Name The Port COM1 Serial printer on the COM serial port COM2 Serial printer on the COM2 serial port LPT1 Parallel printer on the first parallel port LPT2 Parallel printer on the second parallel port Screen display console PH The print header data tag lets the user enter a 37 character or less alphanumeric page header for reports Leave this field blank if no header is needed on the reports The default is blank no header entered PF The print footer data tag lets the user enter a 37 character or less alphanumeric page footer for reports Leave this
270. n SDMS Collector displays the constant clear the line with lt Ctrl gt L or lt spacebar gt When the line is clear press lt F3 gt Save Sequence The next time this data item is used SDMS Collector presents a blank data field if this data tag has not been used elsewhere in the project If the data tag has been used somewhere in the project SDMS Collector presents that value in place of the constant Inserting a Standard Shot in a Sequence At times the user may want to include a shot using the standard activity definition within a user shot sequence but does not know ahead of time where this will be needed e g take a topo shot in a cross section task Instead of interrupting or canceling the sequence to take a standard shot follow these steps 1 When prompted for the next activity in the user shot sequence at MIOC type the activity for the shot to be inserted over the suggested activity but do not press lt ENTER gt 2 Press lt Ins gt SDMS Collector prompts for each data item in the standard definition for the activity as defined in the TASK TGS file Answer each prompt normally 3 When the standard shot is finished SDMS Collector returns to the user shot sequence and prompts for next activity in the sequence Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 5 8 User Shot Sequences How to Quickly Repeat a Sequence The user can quickly repeat the most recent sequence When SDMS Collector displays MIOC press lt F3 gt
271. n alignment Hinge Point PN Hinge Point PN 3 Manual Entry to get new OF based on VH and ZC of Catch Point Hinge Point PN vaese o OoOO oS Note Numbers 1 5 can come from the CTL originally 4 Manual Entry to get new ZC based on VH and OF of Catch Point Hinge Point PN Hinge Point PN ST E 1 ST Equal Hinge Point 2 OF E 3 OF E 6 ZC E 4 VH ES pe Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 23 Computations Note This scenario Number 4 would only work if the Hinge Point OF and ZC have been CLEARED by the user Blank spaces ARE NOT 0 Then the desired Hinge Point OF would be entered to compute the Hinge Point ZC Batch Computations SDMS Collector batch computations processes a project file by reducing the raw angular and measurement data to produce a coordinate control file To prepare for computations 1 Edit the project file if necessary 2 Name the appropriate control files in the CNTL CFG file 3 Check the tolerances set in the TOL CFG file Starting Batch Computations To start batch computations from the main menu press lt F3 gt Comp To start batch computations from the project mode at any MIOC prompt press lt F7 gt Func then lt F3 gt Comp SDMS Collector asks the user to name the file to compute If the user is accessing computations from the project mode the current project file name is suggested This file can be accepted by pressing lt ENTER gt or a differ
272. n created will be listed at the bottom of the calculated file as PEE O Cpr RE EG End Chain List EE T BG Begin Chain List Bc AC CH he FE FENCE 4 CD OUR FENCE LINE O HERIO Ss TE GE dE Sry ids gilts Creating A Closed Chain With Chain Activity The chain can be closed by adding the first point in the point list to the end of the point list For example AC CH FE FENCE CD OUR FENCE LINE FG 10 E Ge 2 PL 21 24 6 DONA will close the figure as shown in Figure 6 8 Creating A Closed Chain Using The Chain Activity Point number indicates the survey shot sequence PN 8 Figure 6 8 Creating A Closed Chain PN 15 The chain created will be listed at the bottom of the calculated file as E BG Begin Chain List Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 89 Appendix AC CH FE FENCE CD OUR FENCE LINE FG 10 EE E EG End Chain List EE Chain CH Data Item The CH data item not to be confused with the Chain Activity AC CH can be used to include the points in a previously defined chain For example the sequence ACHCH FE EPL CD LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE ENTIRE PROJECT e EE ee CHEAN E 0 JO U AWD J On OD BWNHE Defines a chain with feature code EPL that connects points 1 2 and 3 to the points already listed for the chain stored as Figure 10 FG 10 then connects to points 31 and 32 This chain is stored as Figure 11 FG 11 Multiple CH data items may also be used in the
273. n one of the named Location Control Files coordinate information will be displayed in the corresponding fields for that point If the user wishes to stake points at the correct elevation the instrument height IH and staff height SH should be entered on this screen NOTE If no value is entered for SH and IH SDMS Collector will use the default values and display 5 with no tenths hundredths UL F or 1 5 with no millimeters UL M M2 or M3 The response field will be blank on all the stakeout screens to indicate the user has not entered a true value In this case the computed values may only be valid for the azimuth bearing and horizontal distance to the point Orientation AC 0S PN 768 AC BS PN FE YC 582341 5453 YC 582286 758 2C 191976B6 2223 8C 1919736 6625 ZC 251 7623 ZC 249 6681 SES SEN Figure 6 7 The Orientation Screen To complete the orientation of the instrument press lt F1 gt Shot This will bring up the Shot Inverse screen shown in Figure 6 8 The functions available from the Shot Inverse screen are covered in that section Once the instrument orientation is complete the use has a number of options available Pressing lt F2 gt Stak will bring up the Alignment Control Stakeout screen Pressing lt F3 gt Slop will bring up the Slope Stakeout screens These screens allow the user numerous stakeout options that are described in detail in the sections related to those options If no measurements are taken
274. n parameters are currently hard coded into the SDMS program based on manufacturer default settings when each model was first added to SDMS support Since then some manufactures have changed the defaults on newer instruments The communication parameters for all the supported total stations are as follows Driver Baud Data Parity Stop Bit Bit GEODIMETER System 4800 H Odd 1 400 500 600 LIECA T1010 amp 1610 2400 il Even 1 LIECA TCR303 9600 7 Even 1 LEICA TCA1103 9600 7 Even 1 LIETZ SET 3 amp 3B 1200 8 None 1 NIKON DTM Series 400 500 700 1200 8 None 1 800 PENTAX PTSIII 1200 8 None 1 SOKKIA SET Series 2 2B 3 3B 1200 8 None 1 XL amp 100 Series TOPCON Coarse and Fine Modes 1200 7 Even 1 GTS Series 4 amp 300 500 700 GTS AF Series 601 603 605 GPT Series 1001 1002 1003 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 1 Appendix Driver Baud Data Parity Stop Bit Bit TRIMBLE TTS 300 and 500 38400 8 none 1 WILD T2000 8 T2002 2400 7 Even 1 ZEISS Elta Series 3 amp 4D 1200 7 Odd 2 SDMS Collector File Naming Conventions The name for SDMS files must observe DOS file naming conventions The SDMS file name extensions conventions are listed below File Extension ALI CAL CFG CTL EDI EXE HLP MAC PRJ PRO SEQ SUP TGS TMP File Description Horizontal Alignment files Calculated files Configuration files Control files Edited files Executable program files Help files Macro files Project files Vert
275. n point This procedure can be used to verify that a set up has not been disturbed The default control check activity is made up of nine data items The AC CC data item is always the first entry of a control check activity but the other item s may be entered in any order The data items are point number PN point description PD horizontal coordinate XC Northing coordinate YC elevation ZC horizontal angle HZ vertical angle VT distance DS The sideshot intersect activity is used to locate a point that is not accessible with a prism The remote point is shot from two or more stations AC SI with the sideshot intersect activity Only the Sideshot Intersect horizontal angle and optionally the vertical angle are recorded The same point number must be used each time the point is shot The default sideshot intersect activity is made up of four data items The AC SI data item is always the first entry of a sideshot intersect activity but the other items may be entered in any order The data items Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 5 SDMS Tasks and Activities Activity Data Items are point number PN point description PD horizontal angle HZ and optionally the vertical angle VT if elevation on the remote point are desired When running a control survey the tie sequence activity is used when there is a possibility that an existing occupied point may be removed or otherwise not available fo
276. n the cursor is located to the right of the colon of IT A list of the supported total stations will be displayed as shown Figure 4 4 Move the cursor to the appropriate instrument using the arrow up or down keys Press lt ENTER gt on the total Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 4 Data Collection station desired The instrument type will be added automatically after the IT tag GEODIMETER TIT oi ole AE EI LEICA See Docs for Model Ss MANUAL data entered by hand NIKON_DTM See Docs for Model s PENTAX_PTSIII PTS III SOKKIA LIETZ See Docs for Model s Press Esc to return Figure 4 4 The list of valid total stations If the user does not use the opening sequence or the sequence is edited so that the IT data tag is removed the IT data item with the total station driver name must be entered manually using the procedure explained above before any attempt is made to collect data from the total station If this is not done the data collector will not communicate with the total station If the data will be collected manually enter data without connecting to a total station enter IT MANUAL How to Automatically Name the Total Station To automatically name the total station when a new project is created the driver name needs to be put in the IT data item in the opening sequence NEWPR SEQ This data item eg IT GEODIMETER is then entered automatically every time anew project file is opened Changing
277. n the cursor on the line above which to insert a blank line Use the lt Ctrl gt N NEW LINE command to create a blank line 3 Type the appropriate information on the blank line and press lt ENTER gt This enters the new data and creates a new blank line for more additions 4 Enter more information or press lt ENTER gt on the blank line to close it N Clearing a Line Note Clearing a line is not the same as deleting it To delete the line and place it in the recall buffer use the lt Ctrl gt D DELETE LINE command 1 Position the cursor at the beginning of the line to be cleared 2 Use the lt Ctrl gt LCLEAR LINE command to clear the line for new information Cleared lines are not placed in the recall buffer Deleting a Line jas Place the cursor on the line to be deleted Use the lt Ctrl gt D DELETE LINE command to delete the line 3 SDMS Collector puts the deleted line in the recall buffer See The Recall Buffer section Inserting Characters 1 Move the cursor to the spot where the information is to be added with the lt l gt lt P gt lt gt or lt gt gt keys When the insert toggle is on and the user types new characters existing information is pushed ahead of the new input 2 Turn the insert toggle off by pressing lt Ins gt N Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 7 4 The Editor Deleting Characters There are several ways to delete characters e Position the cursor on the cha
278. n to the original menu Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 19 SDMS Collector System Basics The Disk Operations Menu The disk operations menu Figure 2 12 is accessed from The main menu by pressing lt F5 gt Disk Project mode at MIOC by pressing lt F7 gt Functions then lt F5 gt Disk Disk operations are explained in detail in Chapter 8 Disk Management and Communication ME Disk Operations Pick a Disk Command Dir Copy Bengel Date 04 16 96 Time 09 43 18 Disk Space Avail 306413568 Figure 2 12 The Disk Operations Menu Functions available from the disk operations menu include lt F1 gt Directory to see a directory or sub directory lt F2 gt Copy to copy files lt F3 gt Rename to rename files lt F4 gt Delete to delete files not available if the removal protection toggle is turned on in the system configuration lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt or lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to record a macro lt Esc gt to return to the original menu The Configurations Menu The configurations menu Figure 2 14 is accessed from The main menu by pressing lt F7 gt Configurations Project mode at MIOC by pressing lt F7 gt Functions then lt F7 gt Configurations Configurations are explained in detail in Chapter 9 Customizing SDMS Collector MA Configurations WEIRIG HIE AH RRE A Pick a Configuration to Change Figure 2 14 The Configurations Menu Functions available
279. n use the lt F5 gt Save key to save the coordinate data for that point in the write control file The screen values for all the data items displayed can be saved to the record file REC by pressing lt F6 gt Rec Once the user is satisfied or has completed the required functions for the current point pressing lt F2 gt NewP will clear all data fields so the data for the next point can be entered When this key is pressed all the fields in the current screen are cleared and their values are removed from the program memory Therefore be sure to save any desired data before using this function The staff height SH will redisplay the values from the Orientation screen Summary of Alignment Control Stakeout Screen Functions and Displays The function keys on the Alignment Control Stakeout screen Figure 610 perform the following lt Fl gt Meas Activates the instrument to measure If IT MANUAL then goes to HVD data entry screen for manual input of HZ VT DS values lt F2 gt NewP This clears the screen values retains last SH set lt F3 gt X_Y_ Toggle for Station Offset StOf and coordinate display lt F4 gt Data Brings up the HVD data screen lt F5 gt Save Saves the data displayed or entered for the BS PN FE XC YC ZC to the Write Control WC file The data will be appended to Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 15 Computations the bottom of the file Checks for duplicate point numbers will be
280. nate Elevation Known 4 1 Datum Projection Zone 10 1 Z Coordinate Elevation Computed 0 0 Wild Card Insert a Standard Shot 12 0 Nested Sequence Insert a Sequence Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 30 Appendix Sample SDMS Files Combined Task TK COM Project PRJ File E PRIPOSTAS Los TK COM Si AC PR 4 ID HWY 136 Dee IT GEO440 6 SN 76428 des NM PROJECT 89 123 GE TE 28 OF BRE ZO mS WO OB K ADAMS IRPA RE K ADAMS E DT 06 14 1999 isi WE CLEAR 14 CRY 1S Cita Les UL F lo UA D ioe EECH Sr WERE 207 VR SDMS Collector 3 4 0 SE AC 0S PIA PD TRAV PT SAMSON E BNE 2 24 THONS Dave SH 6 Zoe EIER KEE 27E O En Zee AC BS 2S 6 ENGEN BOR PD TRAV POINT DAVID Sie H2 134 2514 By VETS 9050 397 DS 734 048 34 YC 6258 469 SS AOS 6 S107 36 AGISS Se PN 100 Soe PD R W MON B 26 Bor HZ 96 1640 40 VT 88 5242 41 DS o4 17 42 ACSS 43 PN 101 44 PD R W MON B 45 45 HZ 228 3749 46 VT 87 5846 47 DSS HEL OSO 48 AC SI 49 PN 102 50 PD WDGY TOWER SOL ENEE Bs WAR ES a SS BSE AC FS 54 PINES EE PD TRAV PT 563 HZ 134 5308 Sr WES SOL ES 585 Dori SO 59 AC 0S 60 BNES Sils TH 5 40 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 31 136 ER AC PNS AZ WAFS DS AC PN PHS HZ PD DS PD PD plies DS AE AC RN POS AZ YES DSi AC ENE AC BN HZ Me DS AC BN TRAV PT JOSHUA BS YES
281. nd assign the Task e Enter the project header data e Close or suspend the project Open an Existing Project When arriving at the site since all preliminary data has been recorded the user can reopen the project and immediately start data collection How to Reopen an Existing Project From the main menu press lt F1 gt Project When SDMS Collector asks for a project name type the name of the file that is to be reopened and press lt ENTER gt The user can use lt F1 gt Directory to display a list of the project files and select the one to be worked on See Chapter 2 SDMS Collector System Basics for detailed instructions on using lt F1 gt Directory Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 3 Data Collection An existing project can be either suspended or closed If the project was suspended SDMS Collector simply reopens the project SDMS Collector displays the last six lines of the project file The project is ready to accept new data If the project was closed SDMS displays the file name and the last five lines of the project file SDMS Collector prompts File Closed Reopen Yes No as shown Figure 4 3 To continue e TypeaY to reopen the file The user can continue the project e Type an J to return to the file name prompt e The user can select another project or go back to the main menu C SDMS PRJ WIDOT MARK PRJ HZ 89 0000 VT 90 0 DS 1760 0 PD CTL207 CP 04 17 96 09 35 17 K File C
282. ng lt PgDn gt places the user at the first shot in the Level 2 sequence To repeat a shot in the current sequence press lt PgUp gt when SDMS Collector displays MIOC This lets the user repeat the prompt sequence for the previous most recently completed shot in the sequence It does not replace the first execution of that activity it just allows repeating the series of prompts for the activity Press lt PgUp gt once for each activity to back up If the user is on the first shot in a Level 2 or deeper sequence pressing lt PgUp gt places the user at the last executed shot in the previous sequence SDMS Collector displays two messages At Top of File and Moving Back to Previous Level If the user is in any sequence and the previous shot is an automatic call for another sequence a file name seq entry pressing lt PgUp gt places the user at the first shot in file name SEQ sequence SDMS Collector displays two messages At Top of File and Moving Back to Previous Level Updating Constants The user can change the constants in the sequence file during data collection without editing the sequence When SDMS Collector prompts the data item with the constant that needs to be changed enter a new value in the data field and press lt F3 gt Save Sequence instead of lt ENTER gt This updates the constant in the sequence file Removing Constants Constants can also be removed from a sequence with lt F3 gt Save Sequence Whe
283. ning H and M3 same as M UP Units of Pressure specifies the units used for recording barometric pressure with the BP data item UT Units of Temperature specifies the units used for recording temperature Allowable responses are F Fahrenheit and C Celsius VA Vertical Alignment File Name specifies the name of the file where the control vertical alignment geometry is defined VA config Vertical Angle Sets Difference maximum deviation allowed between and individual vertical angle measured in sets and the mean vertical angle computed form sets Vertical angles that exceed the difference will not be used in final computations VD Vertical Datum records the user defined name of the vertical datum being used VD NGVD29 or VD NAVD88 for example VE Vertical Index Error used to record the angular vertical collimation error as determined by the surveyor when testing the collimation of the instrument VH Vertical Horizontal Ratio Used in stake out to specify the slope of a line between two points expressed as decimal equivalent meter meter foot foot or a percent EG VH 0 02 VI config Vertical Intersects Tolerance when used in the TOL gt CFG file defines the tolerance allowed when Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 16 Appendix Data Tag Description comparing computed elevations for a point shot from various occupied stations during a sideshot intersection activity AC SD
284. nt requirement is for the any response which is a semicolon with no response following it The semicolon functions as the help file wildcard and must appear as the first line of a response list added below a data tag The user can use the on line help key when the meaning of the displayed data tag or what kind of information is allowed for the data tag is not known The response will be displayed when the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt question mark keys are pressed simultaneously The lt gt key works in either project or edit mode The user can use the help function to e Find the meaning of the currently displayed data tag e Find the allowed responses for the displayed data tag e Display an alphabetical list of available tags e Automatically select a data tag e Automatically select information to enter certain tags only How to Use Help on Data Tags When help is needed for a data tag that is displayed put the cursor on the data tag and press the question mark key lt SHIFT gt lt gt SDMS Collector immediately displays the meaning of the data tag For example assume that SDMS Collector is displaying the DO data tag Move the cursor to the data tag the left side of the colon and press is SDMS Collector displays an alphabetical list of available data tags beginning with the displayed data tag as shown in Figure 10 1 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 10 4 Getting Help and Using Macros PN 2
285. ntain location control coordinates such as adjusted traverse points and horizontal alignment points Typically these would be points the user expects to occupy and or sight to orient the instrument Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 8 Control File Format Data Collection e The primary and secondary staking control files typically contain coordinates for points the user plans to stake out in the field e The write control file is where coordinates are logged during batch computations and during the use of the SAVE function related to live computations The control files store the coordinates of points Every point record in the control file is started by an activity data item it does not matter which activity identifier is used and identified by the point number The coordinate data items are required Other data items are optional Data items can be listed in any order after the PN tag So the default point record in a control file looks like AC OS PN PD XC YC ZC PD Get Coordinates from a Control File During data collection the user can pull the coordinates of a point from a named control file and enter them into the current project file When prompted for the point number or any other data item in the control file press the lt F4 gt Get Point key SDMS Collector prompts Get PN as shown Figure 4 5 HZ 89 0000 Figure 4 5 Get a point Note It works best to use the lt F4 gt
286. o quickly repeat a sequence How to cancel a sequence How to delete stations or shots in a sequence About Shot Sequences A prompt sequence is list of one or more data items It can form the skeleton for a shot a series of shots or even an entire project The user prepares the outline ahead of time and fills it in during data collection SDMS Collector provides the user with a TASK TGS file which contains the default task and activity definitions also called standard prompt sequences The users can modify the standard prompt sequence or create a user shot sequence or shot sequence A user shot sequence has at minimum one activity The user shot sequences are stored in the sequence files with the extension SEQ Why Use a Sequence Sequences link data items together in a way that the user feels is most convenient to use Most users tend to think in patterns of information such as horizontal vertical distance SDMS Collector is designed to make it convenient to be prompted for survey data in a pattern that matches the way the user thinks This also allows several activities to be linked together to make a shot sequence For instance if data for a given task is collected in a predictable way a sequence can be set up to automatically prompt for all of the data items and activities needed to repeat the predictable pattern The Benefits of Using Sequences e Fewer keystrokes are required which means the user can enter data faster
287. oes not require using the figure code FG data tag to asign a figure number to the chain created This is normally done by the post processing software Some post processing software will also assign point numbers to the points shot eliminating the need to add them in the data collection file Be sure to determine the capabilities of the post processing Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 90 Appendix software being used before eliminating the figure codes and point numbers in the field generated data collection files Each procedure will be defined in detail But the examples will display the results in only one format The example for unique feature codes will show the results in the calculated file CAL format The shot identification example will show the results in the Points and Chain PAC file format Point Numbers will be used in the examples Unique Feature Codes For Each Chain Individual chains can be created by assigning unique alpha or alphanumeric feature codes to distinguish between each chain For example the points on one edge of pavement chain may be given feature code EP1 as shown in Figure 6 9 Points on some other edge of pavement may be assigned EP2 and so on Connectivity Using The Feature Code Method Point number indicates the survey shot sequence A vi Figure 6 9 Connectivity by Unique Feature Code The resulting project file is shown below e ASS GE ENEO Se FE EP1 4 HZ 256 0033
288. of a surveyed object Used with a horizontal alignment PI Definition to record the length of a circular curve LO Length Offset used when the target can not be placed directly on the point being measured but is placed in front or in back of the point A negative value is used if the target is in front of the point LP config Log to Printer when used in the SYS CFG file Yes or No indicates whether or not to log any screen reports to the printer automatically ES Length of Spiral used to specify the length of a spiral in the PC PT defined horizontal alignment file LT Latitude records the latitude of a point MM config Memory Cache when used in the PROJECT CFG file designates the amount of hard disk space below which the Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 10 Appendix Data Tag Description user is warned MO Mid Ordinate Circular Curve used with a horizontal alignment PI Definition to record the distance from the center of a curve to the midpoint of the long chord for that curve MP config Macro Pause when used in the SYS CFG file designates the step delay time for macro execution in 1 18th second increments MP 2 designates 2 18th seconds pause time MS config Multi Stub when used in the TOL CFG file defines the error radius allowed on multi stub intersections NM Name used as a general purpose Name field It could be used to record project names point and chain names
289. offset data item VO The default is zero 0 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 14 Computations Pressing lt F4 gt Data brings up the HVD screen shown in Figure 614 This allows viewing of the azimuth and bearing to the point entered on the Alignment Control Stakeout screen l AZ 6778 6328 BR N37 1042E 00 32 1761 22 23 7233 HZ 337 103 VT 89 553 e 256 DS 781 5 H 781 4993 TT Figure 6 14 The HVD Data Screen The HVD Data screen is also used to display information related to the actual point shot The lower left side below the space displays the horizontal angle HZ vertical angle VT and slope distance DS measured by the instrument or manually entered on the Enter HVD Data screen The right side the screen displays the computed station SS and computed offset OO if a horizontal alignment is active The computed elevation ZZ and the Delta Z DZ of the point shot and the horizontal distance DH to that point is also displayed The DZ displayed is the same as shown on the Alignment Control Stakeout screen At times it may not be possible to actually stake the point desired or the point shot may need to be saved for future use Pressing lt F4 gt Updt will compute the values for the current shot then automatically return to the Stakeout Alignment Control screen and change the values of the data items displayed based on the measurement information When the point is staked out the user ca
290. omputations The data displayed on the Slope Stakeout screen is as follows Hinge PN input by user ST from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user OF from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user FE from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user ZC from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user VH design slope calculated from hinge point to catch point or input by user Catch PN input by user ST from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user OF from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user FE from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user ZC from CNTL cfg based on PN or input by user VO input by user default 0 This value is added to or subtracted from to SH to compute for shot point elevation Summary of the Slope Stake Shot Screen The function keys on the Slope Stake Shot screen Figure 6 16 perform the following lt Fl gt Meas This activates the instrument to measure If IT MANUAL then goes to the HVD screen for manual entry of HZ VT DS values lt F2 gt Prev Returns to the Slope Stakeout screen to continue or enter a new point lt F4 gt Data Brings up the HVD screen This screen displays the AZ and BR of the point entered on the Alig Cntl Stakeout screen The HZ VT and DS measured or input manually and the SS OO ZZ DZ and DH for the measured shot will also be displayed lt F6 gt Rec_ Records the entire screen data as displayed to the Record
291. on when used in the SYS CFG file YES designates protection is on files may not be overwritten OS Occupied Station Point Number used with the Taping Activity AC TA to list the point number to use as the occupied station to initiate the taping routine OS config Old Project Sequence when used in the PROJECT CFG file designates the name of the sequence file to execute when starting SDMS to continue with an existing project OW Owner used to record the name of an owner of some object defined by the survey For example it may be used to specify the owner of a parcel defined by a chain or of a utility feature defined by a point Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 11 Appendix Data Tag Description P1 config Parity when used in the IO CFG file designates the type of parity used for serial communications NONE ODD or EVEN PC Prism Correction used to correct the measured slope distance for the difference between the optical center of the prism and the axis of the prism housing Entered as a length value in the project units PD Point Description used to record point description information It may also be used to record descriptive information for a chain or other objects PD config Print Device when used in the IO CFG file designates the name of the printer device port LPT1 LPT2 COM1 COM2 or CON PF config Print Footer when used in the IO CFG file defines a line of tex
292. on SDMS Collector provides several choices a Press lt F7 gt Previous to search backward for data matching the search expression Press lt F7 gt Previous as many times as necessary b Press lt F8 gt Next to search forward for data matching the search expression Press lt F8 gt Next as many times as necessary Press lt F2 gt New to enter a new search expression Press lt F3 gt Recall to recall a deleted line Press lt F4 gt Print to print the file Press lt F5 gt File to select file operations Press lt F6 gt Undo to undo an edit Perform normal editing functions Press lt Esc gt to return to edit mode rig rho Bo Ending Editing Once editing is complete the data can be saved by pressing lt F5 gt File SDMS Collector provides the following options e lz Read Insert a new file at the cursor e lt F2 gt Write Save the file to a new file name and resume editing e lt F3 gt Save Save the file to the same file name and resume editing e lt F4 gt Exit Save the file to the same file name and quit editing e lt F5 gt Quit Lose edits and quit editing The user may also exit editing by pressing lt Esc gt SDMS Collector asks OK to Lose Edits Yes No e Typea Y to lose edits and return to the starting point either the main menu or project mode If the changes have already been saved then answering Y to this question WILL NOT lose the edits e Type anJ or press lt Esc gt to continue editing
293. on any previously established point by point number the data may be collected in that manner Basically the rules implemented by the processing software determine how the data should be collected SDMS Processor allows occupation of subsequent foresight points in any order Foresight The intermediate foresight activities are the same AC FS as for the beginning set up Note The station resection activity should not be used in the intermediate set ups in the traverse task The Ending Set Up The ending set up closes the traverse loop It is used to establish known ending coordinates for traverse closure and adjustment SDMS Collector recognizes an ending station in one of four ways 1 If the end of file sequence is encountered the current occupied station is assumed to be the ending station 2 If there are coordinates XC YC in the last occupied station it is assumed to be an ending station 3 Ifa set up does not contain a foresight it is assumed to be an ending station 4 If an occupied station contains either the ES Y or ES YES data item it is assumed to be an ending station A set up following an ending set up will be considered the beginning station of a new traverse The activities used in the ending set up are listed in the following table Activities Data Items The ending occupied station is required for the ending set up The data items in the ending occupied station may include the IH XC YC and ZC
294. on of eaves on the building number 1005 BLDG Press lt ENTER gt on the blank field to skip this ee AC UE Move to the A in AC and type VT to select the vertical angle data tag but do not press lt ENTER gt yet Type 61 4352 AC UE Press lt Esc gt to leave data collection Close or Suspend Type a C to close the project Choose a SDMS Collector returns to the main menu Command Note Most CADD systems need a feature code FE to plot points with the correct symbol Since the feature code is user defined based on the CADD system used it is not included in the example files Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 5 The Radial Topography Example Project PRJ File ly PR 23 TRK an AC 4 PN ie ISS es Bie FS YOR Gi EE Kai EIS KOR AC T PN Ee PD RE VER 14 XER LS EK os WARS Le DSF La AC Ue PN 20 BDE Sal AGS Zoe HZ ZAS IS 24 DS 2 AC 267 PN Cade EG oe HZ Does WANG 30 DS Bs LO es AC 337 PN 34 DE SE HZ SE WAS Se DS 38 AC oo PN 40 PD 41 RR 42 AC 43 PN 44 PD 45 HZ 46 vt 47 DS 48 SH 49 AC Sor PN Sa PD 52 HZ 554 VT 54 DS o SH 56 AC 57 PN ger BD Som VT 60 CP RTOTEST PRJI RITO OS e LS Dato 5 0 JL 473128 36 CTRL MON BS 216 CTRL MON 2244 08 AVTESK SV Io DA 0 89 5930 LO USZ EG Sy TBM 448 391 9 4530 89 2244 838 541 SS 1000 24 MAPLE 16 3741 902550 75097899 Sch SS 1001 SAN
295. ontal and vertical task for data with X Y and Z components A radial topography task usually consists of an occupied station a backsight and sideshots Backsight PN 216 PD CTRL MON YC 2244 08 XC 473879 91 PN 57 PN 1004 PD TBM PD N E COR BLDG ZC 448 391 PN 1005 PD N E COR ROOF PN 1004 PD 24 MAPLE PN 1003 PD S E COR BLDG i PN 1001 Occupied Station PD SAN MH PN 215 PN 1002 PD CTRL MON PD 8 VCP YC 1527 85 XC 473128 36 Displayed Instructions and Comments Choose a From the main menu press lt F1 gt Project to Command open a project Project Name gt Type the project name RTOEXAM lt ENTER gt PRJ Capathl prj New Project Type RTO lt ENTER gt to select the radial Enter Task topography task This is the first prompt of NEWPR SEQ Either press lt Esc gt to exit the sequence or enter the project header information When NEWPR SEQ is complete SDMS Collector automatically suggests an occupied station activity Press lt ENTER gt to accept it Type point number 2 5 over the suggested point Type the point description CTRL MON and lt ENTER gt Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 2 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments Type the staff height 6 0 and press lt ENTER gt Type the Y coordinate value 1527 85 and press press lt ENTER gt Press lt ENTER gt to leave data field blank when the elevation of the occupied station is unknown
296. or and the elevation factor It is a ratio that needs to be applied to distances to convert them from ground measured distances to state plane grid distances and visa versa Field measurements are always made at the ground surface but the control coordinates being used may be based on the state plane grid Therefore to make the distance compatible with these coordinates computations must adjust the distances by the combination factor This means that when collecting measurements to compute grid coordinates SDMS Collector must multiply any measured distance by the active CF as part of the coordinate computations Ground Distance x CF Grid Distance Likewise when grid coordinates are used to determine a distance to be staked out SDMS Collector must divide each computed distance by the CF Grid Distance CF Ground Distance before displaying the distance to be staked out The default CF is defined in the PROJECT CFG file but the user can change that in the project file SDMS Collector uses the CF in the project header if it exists SDMS Collector also displays the active CF in the 2D 3D Stakeout screen when the user is using that for computing inverses or determining coordinates for station and offsets to an active horizontal alignment Live Computations In addition to the live tolerance checks described earlier in this chapter SDMS Collector enables the user to compute coordinates in the middle of data collection Such computations do
297. or every point in the point list and for every point making up a chain in the chain list CH The chain that is created will be FG 12 The post processing software generates points to represent the new positions defined by the offsets The chain generated will be listed at the bottom of the calculated file with any other chains that are defined in the project file Note PN may or may not be required depending on the post processing software used Consult the user guide for that software to determine the actual requirements Using this method the post processing software would include the additional points generated by the offsets and would list the information in the SDMS calculated file as shown in the example that follows de AC SS 2 ENE 3 FE CURB 4 SIENTO So HZ 45 2354 6 VT 90 3045 7 DS 100 44 8 XX ES YY 10 EE dE PA SS dE PN 2 ECH FE CURB 14 SHE US BASI AID Le VT 90 3006 LT DS 180 94 ER XX Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 97 Appendix 19 YY 20 ZZ dE Si ACISI 227 PN 31 SE FE CURB 24 SES 25 ebe DOS ZOS AS 6 VT 90 3006 Ge DS 190 94 28 XX H 29 YY 30 EE dE EE B25 PN 32 38 FE CURB 34 SHE St Ee 36 VT 90 3006 Sue DS 195 94 See XX 39 YY Hit 40 EE dE AN ACSS 423 PN 40 43 FE EPL 44 SH 5 45 E 46 VT 90 3006 47 DS 180 94 48 XX 49 YY Hit 50 EE dE Sit ee EK PN 41 53 FE EPL 54 SHEL Doe AE SS ADS Se
298. order indicated AC SS PN 1003 PD IRON PIN deleted 2 PD IRON PIN USGS 1477 HZ 176 003 VT 89 404 DS 848 76 CM OBSERVED 8 88 deleted 277 CM NSP lt deleted 1 The recall buffer holds these deleted lines in this order CM OBSERVED8 88 lt last in first out PD IRONPIN lt recalled next CM NSP first in last out To Recall Deleted Lines 1 Position the cursor where to insert the recalled line 2 Press lt F3 gt Recall to recall the line most recently placed in the recall buffer Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 7 5 The Editor 3 One line is recalled each time lt F3 gt Recall is pressed Once a line is recalled it is no longer in the recall buffer unless it is deleted again SDMS Collector clears the recall buffer when the current editing session is closed The Search Function The user can search for information in many different ways The wildcards and can be used to specify the search expression Enter this To find this i PN 100 Point number 100 PN 39 Point numbers beginning with 39 and ending in any single character one or more characters To search in the file 1 From edit mode press lt F2 gt Search SDMS Collector prompts for a search expression Enter an expression using the conventions listed above and press lt ENTER gt 2 The search menu appears and the function key line changes to show the search mode function keys After the user enters the search expressi
299. ordinate 2a ACSS IBEA PN 14 4 5 6 EOOD TO OT S GOb r FE EPL FG 1 Ge SHES e E oe VIE OVS OO brs DS 180 94 207 EE d St YY 22 LZ tttt EE ASS 24 PN 21 Get EE 267 Meal Zales SHES 28 VAS D5 A055 29 VT 90 3006 305 DS 180 94 eo dle OD 10 32 XX HTH 233R YY FEFE 34 ZZ EEE So go ETOS Bor CP 09 18 1999 18 46 43 Sa BG Begin Chain List SE AC CH 397 FG 1 40 FE EPL 41 CD LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE 42 Pb ke tlh 2 100 43 EG End Chain List 44 POZOS SSI Closed Chains using the Chain Activity AC CH Figures can also be closed using the Chain Activity This method is explained in the discussion of the Chain Activity later in this section Creating Gaps in Chains A gap can be created in a chain by adding G after the Figure Code FG G This tells the post processing software to create a chain with the Figure Code and feature assigned and to place a gap in the chain between the point where the G appears and the next point in that chain The gap created will be shown in the PL Point List field of a calculated file as two commas in a row between the points where the gap is to occur A gap can also be created by manually Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 65 Appendix entering an extra comma between points in a PL field in an AC CH as explained in the discussion of the Chain Activity later in this section Figure 6 3 Creating a gap in a survey chain
300. orizontal alignment The elevation ZC will be the value in the named control file The slope ratio VH will be computed based on the algebraic difference between the offsets and elevations displayed Note The station for the hinge point and catch point must be the same Data can also be entered manually for the hinge point and catch point In this case the data is not dependent on a particular control file Therefore the ST OF and ZC must be entered for both If the point to be set needs to be offset vertically above or below the design point elevation enter a value for the vertical offset data item VO The default value is zero 0 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 17 Computations After a combination of these values is entered press the lt F1 gt Shot key This brings up the Slope Stake Shot screen shown in Figure 6 16 an Stake Shot Sage 1 00 000 LO 5 OF 2 RO FE MS Ketti DZ SH 5 8 HZ 29 5904 VH 0 23999998 DH 103 769 Meas Prev data fRec_ for FIGURE 6 16 The Slope Stake Shot Screen The left side of the screen will display the same values for the catch point that are on the Slope Stakeout screen The staff height SH and vertical horizontal slope ratio VH will also be displayed from that screen The lower right side of the screen displays the computed values for the data needed for stakeout based on the hinge point and catch point data The horizontal angle HZ hor
301. ory for the SDMS data files Use the above steps to create other directories or sub directories Note All of the configuration files file name extension CFG help files file name extension HLP and the TASK TGS file must be located in the same directory as the executable program file SDMS EXE How to Start and Exit SDMS Collector 1 Log into the directory containing SDMS Collector 2 Type SDMS and press lt ENTER gt 3 When the Main Menu appears press the appropriate function key to start see Chapter 2 4 To exit SDMS press lt Esc gt at the Main Menu and when asked if you want to Exit to DOS press the Y key Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 1 6 Introduction General Rules of SDMS Tasks and Activities There are a number of Rules that must be followed when using the SDMS Collector software These rules pertain to how configuration and help files must be maintained what data is required for data collection and processing and how duplicate data items are processed The basic rules that are emp loyed by SDMS Collector in data collection and processing are listed in the Appendix Details regarding these rules can be found in the appropriate sections of this User Guide including the Appendix Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 1 7 SDMS Collector System Basics Chapter 2 SDMS Collector System Basics Chapter 2 contains e SDMS data structure e SDMS file types and formats e SDMS file namin
302. osed Chains Using OI Closed Chains using the Chain Activity AC CH Le CRRATINGDARSINCHAINS edd SEENEN AiE A EENS CONNECTIVITY BY TANGA Laia Direction Options for the Taping Activity sieran na n i E a E Ai E a a ia EAE Closing a Taped ODJET ka r A EEN Ending in a Figure Using the Taping Activity CHAIN ACTIVITY AND CHAIN DATA TEM Chain Aert eege EENEG 1 Chain IIS AAA A CONNECTIVITY BY FEATURE CODE eiii dni ataai Unique Feature Codes For Each OChoain EEN Beginning and Ending Chains Using Common Feature Codes and Shot Identification GENERATING CHAINS AND POINTS PARALLEL TO A PREVIOUSLY DEFINED CHAIN How Points Are Created for a Parallel Chan GENERAL RULES OF SDMS TASKS AND ACTIVITIES Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter contains e An introduction to SDMS e A list of the documentation needed to use SDMS Collector e An overview of how this manual is organized e Suggestions on how to use the manual e System Requirements for SDMS Collector How to install SDMS Collector Welcome to SDMS Welcome to the AASHTO Survey Data Management System SDMS This software is the basis of a comprehensive survey data processing and stake out system It uses the AASHTO SDMS data structure that is defined published and maintained by AASHTO SDMS Collector supports data collection for commonly used horizontal and vertical surveying tasks It also collects a large variety of data types making it
303. oto Control Task PHO sixtieth Settee hse ck ia ele a an es Terrain Model Task TMO E IELA eene EE A E EA A E EA E ET Three Wire Level Task 3 WR aiii Cross Section Task XSE D THE DEFAULT CONFIGURATION AND HELP LES 12 22 Control Configurations geto aoa ii 12 22 NO CONPIS UIA ON AA A E OEN ai 12 22 Ee EE id ida 12 24 System Configuration Tolerance Definition Tags Hein ve SAMPLE SDMS HLES 0 deCEE R Combined Task TE e OM EE Radial Topography Task TK RTO NN Computed Radial Topography Example Saved As A Control CTL File Radial Cross Section Example Using The Radial Topography Task TK RTO ii Traverse Task TK TRA Eemere ii Level Run Task LR LEV grinn ane a RR ER EE E E E E E E Three Wire Level Task TK 3WR r a a E a a a E aS Cross Section Task TREXSE Js ia Profile Task TEPRO as Sample COMA la iaa Sample Horizontal Alignment File ALI with Spirals and Equations PI Definition Sample Horizontal Alignment File ALI with Spirals and Equations PI Definition in Report Format 12 54 Sample Superelevation File SUP PI Defintftion rre rro rnnnno DEFINING CONNECTIVITY INTHE SDMS PROJECT FILE 7 DEFINING CONNECTIVITY IN THE SDMS CALCULATED FILE CONNECTIVITY BY FIGURE CODE CONNECTIVITY BY ORIGIN DESTINATION csssssssscsscescsscsscesecsecsecsscsseseeseeseesessssssssseseeseecnscescnsenaesaecaesaecaseaeeaesnensenseass 12 60 CREATING CLOSED CHAINS Closed Chains Using FG A C Cl
304. ous point type a minus sign over the plus sign and press lt ENTER gt If this is the first time the lt F4 gt Get Point key is used in this project SDMS automatically goes to the Ll file otherwise SDMS searches the most recently used control file When SDMS finds a point it reads the control point information and automatically assigns the data fields to the data tags requested by the prompt sequence In the following example the sequence is not asking for the ZC so even though there is a ZC value for the control point it is not written to the project file Troni Control File Data Resulting Project File equence see DO JE CIA AC OS AC SS AC OS meoo Yc 1000 XC 1500 YC 1000 eo qa les Clees Pulling Selected Data Items from a Control Point The user can pull a single data item from a control file point such as the Z coordinate ZC When SDMS Collector is at MIOC and prompting for a new activity manually type the data tag for the single item wanted from the control file For example type ZC If the Z coordinate is available from a Get PN in this shot SDMS Collector automatically inserts it Switching Control Files Mid Project The user can name new control files any time during a project This lets the user switch between control files without leaving the project mode However remember that even if only one new control file is named during a project SDMS Collector resets all control file pointers to th
305. oved toward or away from the instrument and left of right of the current shot position to attempt to reach the catch point If the shot is still not within tolerance the design slope ratio VH can be changed on the slope stakeout screen to bring that point within tolerance The computed slope ratio VH does not equal the design slope ratio The vertical cut fill distance Delta Z DZ is not equal to zero The computed offset OO is not equal to the design offset These values are not within the tolerance allowed If the user cannot use the data computed because of obstructions etc the prism can be moved the instrument re sighted and a new measurement taken If the staff height SH is changed the vertical cut fill distance Delta Z DZ and the horizontal distance DH will be updated accordingly Changing the horizontal angle HZ will change the right angle offset RO accordingly The Delta Z DZ will be the difference between the known the Z coordinate ZC computed from the hinge point Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 21 Computations Vertical Horizontal ratio VH The length of offset LO will show the distance plus or minus from the instrument based on the stationing ST e Ifthe measurement data displayed on the HVD Data screen are the values that will be used instead of that computed from the entered hinge point and catch point the user presses lt F4 gt Updt The Slope Stakeout
306. ow that of the point sideshot A negative reading RR indicates that the elevation of the utility will be above that of the point sideshot AC UE RR The X and Y coordinates of the utility will be the same as the sideshot immediately preceding the utility elevation activity The elevation of the utility is computed by adding algebraically based on the sign the rod reading recorded in the AC UE to the elevation value computed for the previous sideshot All utility elevations must be entered after a leading sideshot and before any other activities Multiple utility elevation activities can use the same leading sideshot activity Remote Elevations The remote elevation is a special case of the utility elevation activity It is used to determine the elevation of an object above or below the level of the sideshot using a vertical angle VT to the point rather than using a rod reading to indicate depth or height The field procedure is as follows 1 Take a sideshot to a ground point immediately above or below the elevated object as shown in Figure 3 4 AC SS PN FE PD HZ VT Figure 3 4 Remote Elevation 2 Use utility elevation activity to record the vertical angle the desired object AC UE VT Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 18 Sets Text Activity SDMS Tasks and Activities The Northing and Easting coordinates of the remote point will be those of the leading sideshot but the elevation coo
307. p Dr aa Ee E Figure 2 16 Viewing a Directory Specifying File Subsets The user may enter a file specification for viewing a certain subset of files in a directory Wild card characters or specific characters or extensions in addition to the path may also be included For example Enter this To view CASDMS All files in the SDMS directory on drive E CASDMSDATAW PRJ All files in the SDMSDATA directory on drive C with the file name extension PRJ AAPR8909 7 All files on the A drive beginning with the letters PR8909 with any file name extension AVIS All files on the A drive with a two letter file name with a file name extension starting with an S followed by any or no characters Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 22 SDMS Tasks and Activities Chapter 3 SDMS Tasks and Activities This chapter contains detailed definitions of SDMS tasks and activities as well as several activities that are combined to complete a survey measurement Note that all SDMS Collector Project files must begin with PR followed by TK and their associated responses Thereafter the following descriptions define what is required and what is optional for each type of task Horizontal Tasks The Traverse Task TK TRA The traverse task is a horizontal task that allows control traversing and trigonometric leveling A traverse task starts at an initial occupied station followed by a backsight then a foresight to another point T
308. project configuration file directly into the project file see Chapter 4 Data Collection CR The curvature and refraction indicates with a Yes or No whether the project data should be corrected for earth curvature and atmospheric refraction The default is Yes This tells the post processing software to apply a correction to the slope distance DS when computing the horizontal distance DH W3 The three wire stadia constant is used to record the 3 wire stadia constant value This value should be consistent with the selected instrument type The default is 333 3333 CF The combination factor constant is used to reduce ground distances to grid distances and vice versa The default is 1 00 no adjustment Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 9 4 Customizing SDMS Collector UL The units of length data item documents in which units length data items are recorded Choose F feet M meters M2 for 100 meter stationing and M3 for kilometer stationing The default is F UA The units of angle data item documents in which units angular data items are recorded Choose D degrees R rads or G gons The default is D The FORMAT for angles in SDMS is DDD MMSSS and this is not decimal degrees This is what SDMS Collector is using in computations UT The units of temperature data item documents in which units temperature data items are recorded Choose P Fahrenheit or C Celsius The default is F UP The un
309. puted through the survey The default value is 0 1 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 9 7 Customizing SDMS Collector SD The deviation from nominal stationing tolerance specifies for cross section tasks the difference between nominal stationing and the stationing as computed through the survey The default value is 5 RT The resection tolerance specifies in feet the maximum standard deviation of the computed coordinates The default value is 0 3 ER The radial topography error radius tolerance specifies the radial distance of standard deviation of Northing and Easting for sideshot intersects located from three or more occupied stations e default value is 0 25 MS The double multi stub tolerance specifies the maximum allowable radial difference between coordinates computed for a point from two or more occupied stations The default value is 0 25 VI The vertical intersects tolerance specifies the standard deviation of elevations computed for sideshot intersects The default value is 0 25 RP The ratio of precision tolerance specifies the ratio of closing error to the length of the traverse The value entered is the whole number to the right of the colon when the precision is expressed as a ration of precision 1 For example a ratio of 1 20000 would be recorded as RP 20000 The default value is 10000 TT Maximum number of occupied stations in a traverse task It specifies the maximum number of o
310. quential shots It does allow any number of chains to be in progress simultaneously The field crew must keep track of the Figure Codes used for each chain The other chain attributes such as the feature code are usually defined as data items on the first point of each chain The Calculated File for Connectivity by Figure Code The shot sequence used in the Project File for Connectivity by Figure Code section would be listed in the SDMS calculated file CAL as dl AC SS GE PN 10 dk FG 1 4 Mays EPL Bis CD LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE Gg SHRI e HZ 45 2354 Ss VT 90 3045 ES DS 100 44 d r Et d Calculated X coordinate DI YY Calculated Y coordinate PE EE Calculated Z coordinate L57 ACIOS Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 59 Appendix 14 PN 14 LS Gals 16 EEE i Yo SHG Ss II EES Se ESO OS 0016 220R DS 180 94 SZT XX HtH 22 y YY 2B ZZ FEEF 24 AC SS 257 PN al AS EG edhe Peer dy 2 SHO E II GE BOF VT 90 3006 Sc EIERE Sze XX FEH Je YY 34 Et Add Bion oo O 56 CP 09 18 1999 18 46 43 27E BG Begin Chain List SS AC CH ISo KENA 40 EN 41 CD LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE 42 LS TO a 43 ACA 44 EG End Chain List 45 EE Connectivity by Origin Destination Connectivity using origin destination OD is designed to let each point on a chain indicate the point number of the next point on that chain This method does not require the FG data item be included with eac
311. r until another AC OS is encountered that signifies the start of another loop Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 10 SDMS Tasks and Activities The Level Run Task TK LEV The level run task is a differential leveling task in which one the middle wire cross hair is used It performs basically the same function as a three wire level task but with a lesser degree of precision The level run task is processed by SDMS Collector much like the three wire level task except that the three rod readings are replaced by a single rod reading represented by the rod reading RR data tag All of the notes related to beginning AC OS descriptive data and AC FS versus AC TP made above for the Three Wire Level Task also apply to this single wire level task called TK LEV Note If there is no elevation ZC provided with an occupied station AC OS but elevations ZC are provided on one or all the foresights that follow that AC OS the post processing software should compute the file from the point where the first ZC is encountered to the end of the file or until another AC OS is encountered Note Multiple loops can be collected in the same project file Each loop should start with AC OS This tells the post processing software the intent is to start a new loop from that point to the end of the file or until another AC OS is encountered that signifies the start of another loop The Cross Section Task The cross section task collects s
312. r data Yes or use DOS editor No use DOS editor Tasks appear in the project file with the task data tag TK Tasks are always three letter combinations The following table shows the horizontal tasks with its data item Horizontal Task Combined Control network Photo control Radial topography Terrain model Traverse Task ID COM CON PHO RTO TMO TRA Description To combine one or more single thread traverses and _ radial topography measurements in one project To establish a control network of traverses This allows least squares adjustment of the traverses by the post processing software Sideshots are not allowed To establish photo control points To be used for radial topography measurements both for data collection and stakeout Terrain model measurements One or more single thread traverses Sideshots are not allowed The following table shows the vertical tasks with its data item Vertical Task Cross section Level run Profile Three wire level Task ID XSE LEV PRO 3WR Description Cross section measurements done with a level single wire level run To measure points along a profile Three wire leveling run Activities appear in the project file with the activity data tag AC The following table shows each activity with its data item Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 3 Appendix Activity Activity ID Description Backsight BS Backsight sho
313. r future surveys Tie AC TS sequence shots are taken collecting the azimuth Tie Sequence and the distance to two or more tie points from the original occupied point The azimuth is an approximate azimuth from the original point to the tie point The taped distance is the actual taped distance from the original point to the tie point The azimuths and distances of the tie points can be used to relocate the original occupied point in the future if necessary Three to four tie sequence shots should yield the strongest results but only two are required The default tie sequence activity is made up of five data items The AC TS data item is always the first entry of a tie sequence activity but the other items may be entered in any order The data items are point number PN azimuth AZ distance DS point description PD The Radial Topography Task TK RTO A radial topography task allows one or more radial sideshots to be taken from one or more occupied stations To establish orientation a backsight or station resection must be taken for each occupied station No foresight is collected so the surveyor may not move up and occupy a point shot in the field as in the traverse or combined tasks The required activities include occupied station backsight or station resection if no backsight and sideshot The technical specifications for occupied stationed backsight are the same as shown in the traverse task The optional act
314. r must be sure the points being used in the manually created chain activities are in the calculated file NOTE The chain list at the bottom of the file will always be preceded by the Close Project CP data item If the project file being processed has the Suspend Project SP data item or no data item indicating the end of the project file then the Close Project CP data item must be added by the post processing software to separate the chain list generated from the field generated shot data Connectivity by Figure Code The Figure data item FG offers a simple way of defining connectivity In this method each chain is assigned a unique figure code and every measured point that is part of a chain is tagged with the figure code of that chain The survey of a roadway is an example The left edge of pavement is designated as Figure 1 FG 1 and the right edge of pavement as Figure 2 FG 2 Every point measured on the left pavement edge must include the data item FG 1 and every point on the right edge must include FG 2 The post processing software should then form a chain for the left edge by connecting all of the points tagged with FG 1 Depending on the algorithm used by the post processor system connecting of points with common FG numbers can either be in shot order or by point number Likewise the post processing software should form a chain for the right edge by connecting all points tagged with FG 2 Connectivity Using The Figure Cod
315. racter to be deleted and press lt Del gt e Position the cursor one character to the right of the character to be deleted and press lt backspace gt e Use the lt Ctrl gt L CLEAR LINE command to clear all characters from the cursor position to the end of the line e When the Ins toggle is turned off position the cursor on the character to be deleted and press the lt spacebar gt to type over the character with a space Or type over the character with another character Using lt F6 gt Undo If an edit has been made but it needs to be changed press the lt F6 gt Undo key before pressing lt ENTER gt lt gt or lt J gt lt F6 gt Undo restores the original information Note The lt F6 gt Undo key does not undelete a line Deleted lines must be recalled from the recall buffer Recording the Edit The user must move off an edited line with lt ENTER gt lt P gt or lt y gt before saving the file for the edit to take effect otherwise changes to that line are not recorded in the saved file The Recall Buffer Each time a line is deleted with the lt Ctrl gt D DELETE LINE command SDMS Collector puts the deleted line in the recall buffer The recall buffer holds a maximum of 50 lines The recall buffer fills with the most recently deleted line at the top When the recall buffer becomes full it makes room for new lines by deleting the oldest lines first Suppose the user deleted the following lines in the
316. ration file The information displayed in the traverse adjustment screens is stored in file REPORT TMP in the temporary directory These files can be printed from DOS or Windows on a PC The temporary files are overwritten with the most recent data each time batch computations are performed Note SDMS Collector will report if any points are out of specified tolerances The Finished Write Control File When SDMS Collector finishes the computations and reports it writes the coordinates to the write control file These results are written in control file format If the named WC file contains data SDMS Collector overwrites the existing data If there are missing values SDMS Collector writes in 999999 000 Two points in an SDMS control file might look like AC OS PN 2 YC 14812 479 XC 553 715 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 26 Computations ZC 83 771 PD CNTRL PT AC OS PN 3 YC 999999 000 XC 999999 000 ZC 83 771 PD BENCH MARK Basic Rules of Batch Computations Horizontal Tasks Traverse Task TK TRA How batch computations function depends on the task being used The information that follows explains how the computations are performed SDMS Collector will first reduce any set measurements in the project file Then compute the raw error of position closure and the azimuth closure will be computed It will also compute the azimuth adjusted position closure If these closures are within tolerances SDMS Collector w
317. ration of the chain or points being paralleled The examples that follow indicate what points need to be stored in the actual SDMS Calculated file CAL and or Points and Chain file PAC for export to a CADD or for archive purposes Chains Consisting of Two Points Points are created perpendicular and at the offset distance specified to the right or left of the points in the points or chain being paralleled Figure 6 11 shows the chain and two of the points that would be created using part of the information from the example above on o O Point collected in field r 90 90 OF 0 5 A Point computed and stored in CAL or PAC file Field collected chain Parallel chain Figure 6 11 Points and chain computed parallel to a two point figure Chains Consisting of More Than Two Points The majority of chains collected will consist of more than two points and will be an irregular shape with intersecting angles less than or greater than 180 Therefore the points that are created for the parallel figure and stored in the SDMS calculated file CAL and or Points and Chain file PAC are not actually perpendicular to the points in the chain being paralleled Since these points actually lie on the bisector of the angle they will not be at the offset distance specified in the chain activity containing that data This requires two temporary points be computed by the post processing software on each end of the line as is done for a two point c
318. rd or display the bearing measured or computed between two points The format is V or S DD MMSSS E or W BS Backsight Point Number used with the Taping Activity AC TA to list the point number to use as the back sight to initiate the taping routine CD Chain Description used to record descriptive information for a survey or geometry chain figure This data item will normally be used with AC SS and AC CH CD config Communication Device when used in the IO CFG file designates the name of the serial communications device port COM1 COM2 etc CE Collimation Error used to record the angular horizontal collimation error as determined by the surveyor when testing the collimation of the instrument CF Combination Factor used to specify the combination factor used in converting between grid and ground distances CH Chain Number used in the chain activity AC CH to include a list of previously defined chains in the chain being defined CI City used to record the city where the survey took place CL Class used to record a classification code of some sort Some post processing and CADD systems interpret this as a topography attribute tag while other post processing and CADD may interpret it as a soil classifications CM Comment used to record a comment about a point or observation CN Condition used to record the condition of surveyed objects such as inlets pipes bridges etc This data item is
319. rdinate 853432 237 and press lt ENTER gt AC BS Back up to the A in AC and type ZC to manually Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 8 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments select the elevation Z coordinate data item but don t press lt ENTER gt yet Type in the elevation Z coordinate 448 225 and press lt ENTER gt Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested backsight activity AC BS Type point number 26 over the suggested point number 1 and press lt ENTER gt Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point description CTRL PT Type the staff height 5 7 and press lt ENTER gt Type 0 to zero the backsight and press lt ENTER gt Type the measured vertical zenith angle 97 0200 and press lt ENTER gt Type the measured slope distance 558 181 and press lt ENTER gt SDMS Collector again suggests a backsight activity But before continuing the coordinates of the backsight must be entered Back up to the A in AC and type YC but do not press lt ENTER gt yet Type the Northing coordinate 80101 427 and press lt ENTER gt Back up to the A in AC and type XC but do not press lt ENTER gt yet lt ENTER gt AC BS Type FS over the displayed BS to select the foresight TT ees PO Type point number 0 over the suggested point number 3 and press lt ENTER gt Note From here on the user will not be told to press lt ENTER gt to enter values that have been typed into the da
320. rdinate is adjusted using the vertical angle in the utility elevation activity During data collection measurements of angles may be repeated two or more times to increase precision eliminate certain instrumental errors and prevent mistakes from going undetected SDMS supports this activity with sets A set consists of measuring the same point in two orientations of the measuring instrument e Face 1 direct face of the instrument telescope e Face 2 reverse or inverted face of the instrument telescope The set is denoted by the data tag SE The face of the set is denoted by the data tag FC A shot can be either Face 1 FC 1 or Face 2 FC 2 of the telescope Therefore only one SE tag and one FC tag can be included in an activity However the Face 1 FC 1 or Face 2 FC 2 of the same set are not necessarily in consecutive activities The user can shoot up to 99 sets on the same point All descriptive data for a shot including coordinates staff height or other required data must always be given the first time the point is recorded After that it is acceptable to simply enter SE FC PN and measurement data items Sets can be collected only related to a given occupied station Any time the user occupies a new Station set values start over The text activity AC TX is used to define a text block which will allow multiple point description data items PD or comment data items CM within the activity The difference betw
321. rds the date DT config Date Stamp when used in the IO CFG file Yes or No indicates whether or not to stamp the date on each page of SDMS reports and printouts DV Distance Vertical used to record or display the vertical distance between two known or comptted points DX Delta X used in live and batch computations to record the algebraic difference between the known X Coordinate XC of a point and the computed X Coordinate XX of a point based on the shots taken to that point in a project file DY Delta Y used in live and batch computations to record the algebraic difference between the known Y Coordinate YC of a point and the computed Y Coordinate YY of a point based on the shots taken to that point in a project file DZ Delta Z used in live and batch computations to record the algebraic difference between the known Z Coordinate ZC of a point and the computed Z Coordinate ZZ of a point based on the shots taken to that point in a project file El Left Side Slope used in the superelevation file SUP for the stake out functions to define the left side slope rate at a transition station This slope is expressed in feet feet meter meter or percent E g 0 02 E2 Right Side Slope used in the superelevation file SUP for the stake out functions to define the tight side slope rate at a transition station This slope is expressed in feet feet meter meter or percent E g 0 02 ED Error D
322. rectory to view a directory before entering a file name User also may select a file from the displayed directory 4 SDMS Collector prints the file and returns to the starting point How to Print from Edit Mode 1 Position the cursor at the point in the file where to begin printing 2 Press lt F4 gt Print 3 SDMS Collector prints the file being edited from the cursor to the end of the file then returns to edit mode Special Considerations Disk Operations e The removal protection toggle must be turned off in the system configuration RP No in order to delete files See Chapter 9 Customizing SDMS Collector for more information e When copying files by name both the source file name and the destination file name must be specified The user can keep the same file name for both the source and destination files e H the destination file exists and the overwrite protection toggle is turned on in the system configuration OP Yes SDMS Collector warns that the destination file exists and asks the user to verify the overwrite before copying over the existing file e When specifying destination file names can be used to keep the same name as the source file Communications SDMS Collector provides RS 232 transfer communications for sending and receiving files to and from other computers The 1 O configuration defines these communications parameters Specific instructions for editing the I O configuration are found in Chapter 9 C
323. require that the project file contains the Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 3 Computations necessary measurements and known coordinates required to compute the specified point coordinates The live computations can be accessed only when SDMS Collector is in Project Mode To start live computations press lt F6 gt Comp whenever SDMS Collector is displaying the MIOC prompt The screen shown in Figure 6 4 lists the options that are available Live Comps Press F1 for Current Occupied Station Press F2 for Last Measured Shot Press F3 to Enter Point Number Figure 6 4 Live Computation Options The user chooses the point to compute by pressing the associated function key If the user is on an Occupied Station activity and presses the lt F1 gt key the known or computed coordinates of that setup point will be displayed Subsequently pressing lt ESC gt will return the user to he project file in collection mode Suppose the user is doing an elevation control in the middle of a traverse Pressing lt F1 gt after taking the elevation control shot will compute the elevation of the current occupied station Note The coordinates displayed for the point are not adjusted After the computations are completed SDMS Collector will display the computed coordinates as shown in Figure 6 5 PN 100 KX 1004 A7 YY 1007 874 22 100 000 Press Esc to return Save Figure 6 5 Live computation results
324. roll through the list from the top looking for the correct response can be time consuming To speed up the process the user can enter the first letter of what the response may be The help file will start at the corresponding letter of the alphabet Keyboard Macros Keyboard macros are powerful tools that allow the user to set up commands or repeated entries using single keys instead of having to type in the entire field For example the user can create a macro to copy project files to another disk or directory open projects and configure the system Note As with any powerful tool use a macro with caution A macro created at the main menu may produce quite unexpected results if accidentally used from Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 10 6 Building Macros Getting Help and Using Macros another menu SDMS Collector cannot determine which is the current menu when the macro is recorded Macros record only keystrokes not program levels There are two ways to create a macro Record and execute the macro simultaneously with lt Alt gt lt F10 gt Record the macro without executing it with lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt Record and Execute a Macro Simultaneously l Press lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to begin recording a macro SDMS Collector briefly displays the message Collecting Keys for Macro as shown in Figure 10 6 When using lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to define the macro the user also executes the function of the macro for
325. rsion 3 5 3 11 SDMS Tasks and Activities Activity Data Items AC OS The occupied station activity is a required Occupied Station activity It is explained in detail in the Three Wire Level Task The backsight activity is used after an occupied AC BS station activity to establish the elevation of the Backsight first instrument set up Subsequent backsights are shot from each instrument set up to the previous turning point or foresight activity point The default data item in the backsight activity is RR It represents the rod reading when the rod is read while occupying the backsight point The stationing activity establishes the stationing value for each cross section taken from the setup The stationing activity should AC ST be the first activity for each cross section This Stationing nominal stationing value becomes the default for each subsequent sideshot on the cross section and need not be re entered for each sideshot The default data item in the stationing activity is ST which represents the station value along the alignment in either stationing format 10 00 or decimal format 1000 When the plus sign is not used SDMS Collector places it 2 places left of the decimal if the UL is set to F or M2 in the PROJECT CFG file If UL is set to M or M3 then SDMS Collector assumes the station plus sign is 3 places left of the decimal The foresight activity is used to carry elevations forward from the instrument set up Foresight to
326. ructure file format definitions and file naming conventions It also provides an overview of the SDMS Collector menus Chapter 3 SDMS Tasks and Activities This chapter contains detailed definitions of SDMS tasks and activities as well as several activities that are combined to complete a survey measurement Chapter 4 Data Collection This chapter explains how to use SDMS Collector It explains how to open a new or existing project how to manually enter data and electronically transfer from a total station how to access data in control files how to delete shots or stations and how to correct data entry Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 1 4 Introduction errors It also discusses the intelligent point numbering feature and provides instructions for using the on line help system Chapter 5 User Shot Sequences This chapter explains how to create and use user shot sequences Chapter 6 Computations This chapter explains how to use computation functions of SDMS Collector during data collection Computations include batch computations live computations and 2D and 3D computations and stakeout functions Chapter 7 The Editor This chapter explains how to edit files within SDMS Collector and its functions apply equally to configuration files and data files Chapter 8 Disk Management and Communication This chapter talks about the disk operation functions of SDMS Collector It explains how to use the built in file mana
327. s All of the editing tools are available for editing a configuration file or the task activity definition file This chapter does not cover how to use the editor Before editing files the user should be familiar with the editing procedures in Chapter 7 The Editor The Order of Items in a Configuration File The order in which data items appear in a configuration file is not important Feel free to rearrange any configuration file Remember if two of the same configuration data items are entered in a configuration file SDMS Collector uses the last one it finds This is the same rule used in data collection and computations Editing and Saving a Configuration Use the rules outlined in Chapter 7 The Editor when editing a configuration file However the save file options as shown in Figure 92 are slightly different Edits to Configuration files are saved by pressing lt Fl gt A configuration file can be exited without saving any edits that may have been made by pressing the ESC key Press Esc to return to edit Press F1 to save the file Figure 9 2 File save options for configuration files Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 9 2 Customizing SDMS Collector The I O Configuration 10 CFG The I O configuration controls the flow of data and how SDMS Collector interacts with other devices DP The data path tells SDMS Collector where to store and recall alignment superelevation and control files The pat
328. s or conversions as needed Any valid SDMS descriptive tags can be used under this activity OPTIONAL TY PI Indicates the PI Definition is to be used REQUIRED AC EQ The Station Equation Activity is required to define the location of station equation points if the alignment contains station equations All equations must be listed in the order they appear in the alignment and cannot be located on a curve or spiral element EQ Equation number is used to indicate the number of the equation in the alignment and can be used as the identifier of the station equation point as needed by other software interpreting the alignment OPTIONAL IER Defines the station back of the equation REQUIRED ST HEHE Defines the station ahead of the equation REQUIRED PD CM FE All other tags listed with the activity are ignored in computations but may be included for documentation Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 5 AC xx PN nnn ST H HH XC XXXXXX XXX YC XXXXXX XXX ZC XXXXXX XXX SI PI AC xx PN nnn ST H HH XC XXXXXX XXX YC XXXXXX XXX ZC XXXXXX XXX RA nnn PD CM TL nnn Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 SDMS Collector System Basics purposes The alignment description begins here Use any activity data item except AC PR or EQ REQUIRED NOTE The alignment must start at a PI with no curve or spiral data It must be a point on the tangent before the first curve or spiral point in
329. section 0 0245 Resection Tolerance 0 0200 Accept the Resection Anyway Mes No Figure 6 2 Computed Resection Out of Tolerance Note In some cases the geometry of the triangle formed by two station resections and an occupied station creates angles close to 0 degrees or close to 180 degrees In these special situations SDMS Collector will automatically eliminate the solutions that are too sensitive to these severe angles and base the solution on the measured distances If only the horizontal angle is measured to one or more of the station resection points SDMS Collector will compute the station resections as if only the horizontal angles were measured SDMS computes the diameter of the circle through the three solutions to compare with the resection tolerance set SDMS Collector does not compute resections for more than two successive station resections In cases where more than three are recorded SDMS Collector will use the last two for computations Using Control Files with Computations All current SDMS tasks require coordinates for some known points in order to compute the coordinates for other points that have been tied in a project file The coordinates can be combinations of the X Coordinate XC Y Coordinate YC Elevation ZC the X Coordinate XC and Y Coordinate YC or the Elevation ZC only depending on the results required The basic rule followed when computations are requested by the user is SDMS
330. sed for configuration file data items are marked with the word config underneath Data Tag Description Standard Shot used in building sequences to indicate that you want to use the standard prompts for an activity Place the data tag immediately following the activity data item Hp Nested Sequence used to nest one user defined sequence inside of another If file name is found in a sequence the sequence in the given file is invoked Once the nested sequence is completed the original sequence continues AO A9 Attribute fields 0 through 9 Used to record special attribute data for which there is not already a data tag For example a street address may be recorded using these data items AA Area Computed used to record the computed area of a stored figure No user response required AC Activity begins a new activity The activity name must be one of the two character codes listed in section 8 3 AD Angle Distance List used to record a list of angles and horizontal and vertical distances measured by tape in the taping activity AC TA AD config Auto Date Time Stamp when used in the SYS CFG file design ates when or if to automatically date and time stamp the project file Responses include OFF PROJ in project header only STAT at each OS activity and SHOT at each activity AH Accuracy Horizontal used in a project file to designate the horizontal precision of a point if recorded with t
331. ss section task TK XSE is a vertical differential leveling task All sideshots are assumed to be ground shots unless a point description is entered NZ See hand level detai FE TBM PD SPK IN PP RR 2 18 FS ST 10 80 OF 62 RR 6 87 BS O lt PN 200 ST 11 39 _ OF 69 y RR 6 83 A PN 201 381710480 RE SS GE PD 24 VCP NW e 73 Setup ye pane ae HI 1305 42 PN 202 FE SS PD FL 36 RCP RR 14 84 7 2 Displayed Instructions and Comments Choose a Command From the main menu press lt F1 gt Project to open a project Project Name gt PRJ Type the project name XSEEXAM lt ENTER gt Type XSE and press lt ENTER gt to select the Enter Task TK traverse task AC OS Press lt ENTER gt to begin the suggested occupied A tracy o MEP BE EE et PN 1 Press lt ENTER gt to begin the suggested point Type BM and press lt ENTER gt PD TypeDOT824landpress lt ENTER gt Type 1292 316 and press lt ENTER gt activity FR Type 8 41 amdpress lt ENTER gt stationing activity for the first cross section Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 19 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments FE BM Type XSE cross section feature and press lt ENTER gt PD DOT 8241 Press lt Ctrl gt lt L gt to clear the line then press lt ENTER gt Type 0 for sideshot on centerline Type 6 4 AC SS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested sideshot activity PD Press lt ENTER gt toac
332. ssed from e The edit menu by pressing lt F5 gt File e The search menu by pressing lt F5 gt File e The file save options are explained in detail in Chapter 7 The Editor C SDHS PRJNWIDOT MARK PRJ KC 538667 375 2C 199 410 PD CTL201 AC BS PN 1 AZ 0 0 Read Writl Save Exit Quit Figure 2 10 The File Save Menu Functions available from the file save menu include e lt FI gt Read to insert a file into the edit file at the current cursor location e lt F2 gt Write to write the edit file to a new file e lt F3 gt Save to save the edit file and resume editing e lt F4 gt Exit to save the edit file and exit e lt F5 gt Quit to abandon edits and exit editing The I O menu Figure 2 11 is accessed from e The main menu by pressing lt F4 gt I O e Project mode at MIOC by pressing lt F7 gt Functions then lt F4 gt O e The I O operations are explained in detail in Chapter 8 Disk Management and Communication ME 1 0 Operations II Pick An 1 0 Command Recv Send Prnt Figure 2 11 The I O Menu Functions available from the I O menu include e lt Fl gt Receive to receive a file through the serial port not available from the functions menu e lt F3 gt Send to send a file through the serial port not available from the functions menu e lt F5 gt Print to print a file e lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt or lt Alt gt lt F10 gt to record a macro e lt Esc gt to retur
333. station equation point on the horizontal alignment The equations cannot be related to the vertical alignment itself All equations must be listed in the order they appear in the horizontal alignment and cannot be located on a curve or spiral element EQ Equation number is used to indicate the number of the equation in the alignment and can be used as the ID of the station equation point as needed by other software interpreting the alignment OPTIONAL IER Defines the station back of the equation REQUIRED ST HEHE Defines the station ahead of the equation REQUIRED PD CM FE All other tags in the shot are ignored but may be include for documentation purposes AC xx The alignment description begins here Use any activity data item except AC PR or EQ Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 9 PN nnn ST n XC XXXXXX XXX YC XXXXXX XXX ZC XXXXXX XXX SI VPI L1 xxxx L2 xxxx AC xx PN nnn ST n XC XXXXXX XXX YC XXXXXX XXX SDMS Collector System Basics The point number correlates the PI point with the point in the project control file OPTIONAL This is the stationing value at the beginning of the vertical alignment VPI The value may be either stationing format or decimal format If no station is defined the default value is zero REQUIRED NOTE The vertical alignment control points VPT VPI VPT do not have to correspond to control points in the associated horizontal alignment f
334. stem Version 3 5 2 16 SDMS Collector System Basics The 2D and 3D Stakeout Menu The 2D and 3D stakeout functions are accessed from the project mode menu at MIOC by pressing lt F8 gt Stak which is shown in Figure 2 5 SDMS Collector has a number of 2D and 3D computation and stakeout functions available while in the project data collection mode The computation functions provided are e Calculate the azimuth bearing and horizontal distance between two points e Locate a point at a given azimuth bearing distance and elevation from a known point e Calculate X Y and Z coordinates and station offset values relative to the active horizontal alignment vertical alignment and specified superelevation This can be done by using point numbers station and offset or station and feature from a control file or by manually entering the required data e Set slope stakes based on a known or computed hinge point and catch point e Set points based on a slope ratio The stakeout functions enable the user to perform stakeout operations based on point data and roadway design information Therefore based on the files named in control configuration CNTL CFG SDMS Collector will verify the information required to perform the stakeout functions is present When SDMS Collector is started the system will e Check to make sure the control files that are named exist e Read the geometric definition of the horizontal alignment based on the
335. stimate X Coordinate SY 6 0 Standard Error Estimate Y Coordinate SZ 6 0 Standard Error Estimate Z Coordinate TD 8 0 Tunnel Direction INBOUND OUTBOUND TE 3 1 Temperature T T8 0 Tunnel ID TRESTON SKI COM Combined 7CON Control Network LEV Level Run PHO Photo Control PRO Profiling RTO Radial Topography 3WR Three Wire Level TMO Terrain Model TRA Traverse XSE Cross Section TL 10 1 Tangent Length TM 8 0 Time TN 2 1 Traverse Number INES O ua UA 1 0 Units of Angles UL 2 0 Units of Length F Feet or English M Metric Kilometer ST M2 Metric 100 Meter ST M3 Metric Kilometer ST UP 1 0 Units of Pressure B Millibars I Inches of Mercury UT 1 0 Units of Temperature F Farenheit C Celsius VA 12 0 Vertical Alignment File Name VD 7 0 Vertical Datum VE 10 1 Vertical Index Error VH 6 0 Vertical to Horizontal Ratio vo 12 1 Vertical Offset VR 25 0 Version Number VT 9 1 Vertical Zenith Angle VV 8 1 Vertical Angle Computed W3 8 1 Three Wire Stadia Constant WC 12 0 Write Control File Name WD 6 0 Width WE 10 0 Weather Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix 12 29 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 2907 ABIL BSA WI XE XX YE YY ZC ZN ZZ 25 25 25 25 25 10 PRPRPREFRO NK KK D Appendix Witness Description Coordinate Known Coordinate Computed Coordinate Known Coordinate Computed Coordi
336. sual manner Do not enter any YC XC or ZC coordinates 2 Choose two known points to use as resection points and shoot them as station resection activities Sets of angles may be used Northing YC and Easting XC coordinate values must be entered for each resection point If ZC is also available on these known points SDMS Collector will compute a 3D resection Note Remember to take all angle measurements as horizontal angles right HZ from the initial point 3 Enter the station resection activity by typing SR in the activity data item AC SR Record available data on the resection points 4 When SDMS Collector computes the file the occupied station coordinates will be calculated using the data from the station resection activities SDMS Collector will use the first AC SR as the AC BS from the AC OS it computes to compute other points in the PRJ file 5 When computing a resection occupied station SDMS Collector will compare the range of the results with the Resection Tolerance value in the TOL CFG file If the measurement data is outside of tolerance the user will be shown the computed RT and the default RT and allowed to accept or reject the resection If acceptable SDMS Collector will proceed as if the computation had been within the tolerance If unacceptable and SDMS Collector is in Live Computation mode it will return to collection mode so the resection can then be repeated and recomputed If unacceptable and S
337. surements from an occupied station to two or more different known points will allow the occupied station coordinates to be computed Sideshot SS Used to make a sideshot from the current station Stationing ST Used to define a station on a baseline or alignment for cross sectioning Taping TA Used to define a chain by collecting taped measurements along figures such as a building perimeter Tie sequence TS Used to reference a control point using azimuths and distances Turning point TP Used for a turning point foresight in the level or 3 wire level task Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 4 Appendix Activity Activity ID Description Text TX Used to define a text block which allows multi line comments or point descriptions Utility elevation UE Used to measure an elevation on a utility point above or below the level of the sideshot Data Tags Data tags identify pieces of data Data tags have two alphanumeric characters and acolon The table below describes the SDMS data tags The data tags are listed alphabetically and may not be in the same order as found in the TAGS HLP file Note A number of the tags in the list are either used only in the various configuration files or have a completely different definition in a configuration file than the same tag name does in an SDMS project file In the latter case the tag name is defined in the list twice an example of this is the AD data tag Tags that are u
338. switch more easily between metric and English the user may want to establish a TOLE CFG for English projects and a TOLM CFG for metric projects and then activate the appropriate one by copying it to TOL CFG VT This data tag is the maximum occupied station tolerance for vertical tasks It specifies the maximum number of occupied stations allowed per loop during processing The default is 25 W1 This data tag is the single wire level closure tolerance It specifies for vertical tasks the difference between the given elevation and the elevation as computed for the survey The default is 0 05 ST This data tag is the three wire stadia difference tolerance It specifies the maximum difference between the upper and lower stadia intervals The default value for this data tag is 0 011 feet The tolerance is computed as The value of the top R1 rod reading plus the value of the bottom R3 rod reading less twice the value of the middle R2 rod reading or RI R3 2 x R2 three wire stadia difference The default value is 0 011 W 3 This data tag is the three wire level closure tolerance It specifies for three wire level tasks the maximum the difference between the given elevation and the elevation as computed for the survey The default value is 0 03 XC The profile cross section closure tolerance specifies for vertical tasks the difference between the given elevation of the closing point and the elevation as com
339. t SDMS Collector asks for a letter to name the macro as shown in Figure 10 8 Choose letter for Macro CM TEST Figure 10 8 Choose letter for a macro The user can type any of the 26 alpha keys to associate with the macro When a letter is typed SDMS Collector returns to normal operating mode If the character of an existing macro is typed SDMS Collector will display the message shown in Figure 10 9 Choose letter for Macro T CM TEST T MAC Already Exists OWrite it Y ENS Figure 10 9 Overwrite a macro The user has the option to overwrite the macro already using the desired alpha key by responding Yes If the response is No SDMS Collector will return to the previous screen to allow entry of a new entry Note The user can overwrite existing macros even if overwrite protection is turned on in the system configuration a If the user types an N SDMS Collector returns to the Choose letter for Macro prompt Enter another letter or press lt Esc gt to exit macro definition b If the user types a Y SDMS Collector overwrites the existing macro and returns to normal operating mode Aborting a Macro Definition To abort a macro that has been defined without saving it press lt Alt gt lt F10 gt When SDMS Collector prompts to enter a comment press lt Esc gt Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 10 8 Using Macros Getting Help and Using Macros To execute a macro press the lt Alt gt
340. t a shot by re entering a data item in the next shot Use the editor to back up and make the change Computations reflect the corrected or last entered data item When corrections are made to the project file using this method SDMS Collector immediately records all edits in the project file Reentering Data to Correct Errors Another way to correct a mistake is to call the data item again and enter the correct value before beginning the next activity Computations always reflect the last entered data item This is called reentering data and does not involve the editor The last entry of any data item in any one shot is always the one used in calculations There are some exceptions to this rule including CM PD AD and PL data tags These tags can be entered as many times as desired to add comments descriptions Angle Distance lists and Point Lists when these items will exceed the 25 character limit set for data tags Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 4 12 Data Collection Ending Data Collection When data collection is completed press lt Esc gt at MIOC SDMS Collector asks Close or Suspend as shown in Figure 4 6 CTL CONTROL POINT 38 3595 93 3843 7343 83 or Suspend Figure 4 6 Close or suspend a project e Type a Cto close the project and return to the main menu e Type an S to suspend the project and return to the main menu Suspending a Project When the user suspends a project SDMS Co
341. t or station the user can use data tag DL to delete the shot or station before beginning a new activity e Enter DL SH and press lt ENTER gt before beginning the next shot the current activity is deleted and SDMS returns to MIOC e Enter DL ST and press lt ENTER gt all the shots for the current occupied station including the occupied station itself are deleted and SDMS returns to MIOC e Enter DL SH to delete a shot or DL ST to delete an occupied station and its related shots Data is not actually removed from the file Instead the DL data tag marks the data to be disregarded during processing Note Use the editor to insert the DL data tag in a previous shot if a new activity has already been started Editing to Correct Data Entry Errors Another way to correct data entry errors is with the editor Access the editor from MIOC by pressing lt F7 gt Functions then lt F2 gt Edit For specific instructions on using the editor see Chapter 7 The Editor Note Turn on overwrite protection in the system configuration to prevent editing the current project file In edit mode find the shot that contains the incorrect data Fix incorrect data items by e Typing new information e Deleting the incorrect entries CTRL D e Inserting new entries CTRL N opens a new line above the cursor line e Inserting a duplicate data item with the correct information after the incorrect data item in the activity Note Never try to correc
342. t required The points can be recorded at any time in the project file but must be recorded before the taping activity in which they will be used The backsight point number data item BS and the occupied station point number data item OS are used with the taping activity to specify the point numbers to be used for the backsight and occupied station respectively Within the taping activity taped measurements begin at the occupied station point number OS The direction of the reference line is from the occupied station point number OS to the backsight point number BS The points assigned to the OS and BS are included as part of the taped figure Note The point number of the first point in the point list created by the taping activity will be the point number used with the BS data item followed by the point number of the OS data item The points created from the data with each AD data item will follow in sequence The default sequence for this activity is db AC TA SCH Ose Point Number of the point to be use as the occupied station The second point of chain created within the taping activity oe BS Point Number of the point to be used as the back sight The first point of chain created within the taping activity 4 PN Beginning Point Number to be used for the points computed within the taping activity De PE Feature Code to be used for the new chain Ge CDE Chain Description to be used for the new chain
343. t the similar settings in the system reading this data and provide warnings or conversions as needed Any valid SDMS descriptive tags can be used under this activity OPTIONAL The AC XX data item separates points in the control file While most often this will be a sideshot activity data item AC SS any activity data item may be used REQUIRED The point number data item immediately follows the activity data item Each set of coordinates in the control file is located using the point number so do not repeat point numbers in any one control file REQUIRED The numeric value of the Y coordinate Northing is entered into the control file using the YC data tag REQUIRED If this coordinate is unknown the YC data item must still be present in each entry Either leave the data field blank or enter a 99999 to represent a missing coordinate The numeric value of the X coordinate Easting is entered into the control file using the XC data tag REQUIRED If this coordinate is unknown the XC data item must still be present in each entry Either leave the data field blank or enter a 99999 to represent a missing coordinate The numeric value of the Z coordinate elevation is entered into the control file using the ZC data tag REQUIRED If this coordinate is unknown the ZC data item must still be present in each entry Either leave the data field blank or enter a 99999 to represent a missing coordinate The point description is en
344. t to a defined point Control check CC Used to shoot from the current station to a point with known X Y Z coordinates as a check on the current position and elevation Chain CH To define a chain by giving a list of previously defined points and chains regardless of any connectivity methods used Check shot CK Used to suspend prompted operations to allow the user to work interactively with SDMS then continue the operation Elevation control EC Used with tasks that use an electronic total station instrument to shoot from the current occupied station to a point with known elevation to compute the elevation of that occupied station Equation Point EQ Used to define a station equation in an alignment file Figure FG Used to record critical points from which standard figures such as an inlet can be extrapolated Foresight FS Used to make a foresight shot from the current station Occupied station OS Used to set up the instrument on a known or previously measured point Project header PR To define the project name the task and global settings for a project Sideshot intersect SI Used to measure a horizontal angle from the current station to a sideshot point A sideshot intersect to the same point from at least two different stations will allow the sideshot point coordinates to be computed Station resection SR Used to measure distances and angles from the current station to points with known coordinates Resection mea
345. t to be used as a footer in SDMS reports and printouts PG config Page Numbering when used in the IO CFG file Yes or No indicates whether or not to number pages in SDMS reports and print outs PH Physical Characteristic used to record encoded physical characteristic information for a point This is used by some post processing software to assign graphical attributes such as level and cell symbol name PH config Print Header when used in the IO CFG file defines a line of text to be used as a header in SDMS reports and printouts PL Point List used in the chain activity AC CH to define a list of point numbers to be included in that chain PL config Page Length when used in the IO CFG file designates the number of lines per page for SDMS reports and printouts PM PPM Factor records a parts per million factor usually associated with total station measuring devices PN Point Number identifies the point number for an activity Depending on which activity it is used in it may be referring to a previously defined point or assigning a point number to a new point For example the backsight activity AC BS must give the number of a previously defined point that is being observed A sideshot activity AC SS assigns a point number to a new point PO Prism Offset used to record the distance from the desired point to a prism placed on the point It is used in conjunction with the offset direction data it
346. t will most likely have multiple project PRJ files with each containing one type of survey or Task Activity During a survey task a surveyor typically sets up at a point shoots other points to get the measurements of angles and distances describes point attributes then moves to the next setup point and repeats the same kind of activities In SDMS a Task consists of a sequence of Activities There are certain SDMS rules that apply as to what activities are allowed and how they are sequenced Each activity begins with the abbreviation AC followed by a colon and the data field tag that defines the survey function being performed These include activities such as e AC OS Occupying a Station e AC BS Taking a Backsight e AC FS Taking a Foresight Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 2 1 Data Item SDMS Collector System Basics e AC CC Making a Control Check etc An Activity is a group of data items that define the measurements location and or descriptive attributes of a survey object When the survey object is a point the activity is called a shot However there are many other types of activities that detail information that is not specific to one point One such non shot activity is the project header activity that defines information about the particular survey project while other activities may define relationships between various survey points In an activity a single piece of data is represented as a dat
347. ta collector But be sure to do so for data to be entered in the project file Type 54 4048 Type 90 2550 Type 610 061 A new staff height value must be entered since the staff height changed Move to the A in AC and type SH but do not press lt ENTER gt yet SH 5 7 Notice that SDMS Collector suggests the last entered staff height Change it to 4 9 At this point the coordinates of the foresight point can be checked To do that press lt F6 gt to get the following options e Press F1 for the last occupied station e Press F2 for the last measured station e Press F3 to enter the point number Press lt F2 gt to get the coordinates of the last foresight point At this point if an error is detected the shots can be edited to rectify it To do that press Esc twice to return to the project Press lt F7 gt to choose the Func menu and press lt F2 gt to edit the project shown Move the cursor to the desired tag for example move the cursor to the VT of the foresight shot and change it to 91 0200 Move the cursor one position down and press lt F5 gt and then N A PD CTRL PT T N Y Ka lt Q gt Q Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 11 9 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments lt F4 gt to save and exit the edit mode Press Esc to return to the project Now press lt F6 gt and lt F2 gt to check the coordinates again This demonstrates the flexibility to collect and correct the data
348. tal distance DH If there is no change in elevation the vertical distance DV can be shown as zero 0 or left blank There is no comma required following the vertical distance DV The direction to each point is indicated by looking from the current occupied point toward the current back sight point and measuring the horizontal angle right to the next point to be taped The direction of the line can be indicated by F Forward 180 B Back 0 L Left 270 R Right 90 HZ Horizontal Angle Right 0 360 The direction in the angle distance lists AD can be listed as e All alpha designated angles F B R L e All numeric angles Horizontal Angles Right HZ e A combination of alpha designated angles F B R L and numeric angles Horizontal Angles Right HZ The following sections give details on the various ways the taping activity information can be recorded m the project file The post processing software uses this data to compute coordinates for these points The points created are shown in the SDMS Calculated CAL file as a traverse around the taped object Each point includes the shot identification data item with the response of TA SI TA to indicate the points were created by taping The chain figure created will be listed at the bottom of the file The points created are shown in the SDMS Points and Chain PAC file as points AC PD and also have the shot identification
349. tation offset and rod reading values for points located along an alignment The task is processed by SDMS Collector to compute station offset and elevation The activities used in the cross section task are listed in the following table Activity Data Items The project header activity is defined for all tasks It is not a shot It is used to enter descriptive data about the project and initializes certain computational constants It may be AC PR entered anywhere in a project file although is Project Header must commonly entered immediately after the task data item The data items in the project header activity will be those tags listed in the NEWPR sequence being used These tags normally are barometric pressure BP curvature and refraction CR date DT project identification ID instrument type IT name NM observer OB recorder RE instrument serial number SN temperature TE time TM weather WE The saved project PRJ file will list the same data tags but will also include many of the configuration parameters listed in the configuration files This includes combination factor CF first location control file L1 second location control file L2 rod type RT first staking file S1 second staking file S2 units of angles UA units of length UL units of pressure UP units of temperature UT and version of data collector software VR Survey Data Management System Ve
350. tch with the PN value to get the coordinate values it needs If there is no active control file or if the PN value is not found SDMS Collector will prompt the user for the needed coordinate values The station resection activity is not used with the ending set up The optional activities that can be used with the traverse task include elevation control control check sideshot intersect tie sequence and project header Activity Data Items The elevation control activity records the elevation and the angle and distance measurements to a point of known elevation such as a benchmark It AC EC is used to establish elevations on all activities back Elevation Control to the occupied station when the elevation of the station is unknown If a valid ZC data item has already been encountered or if this is the second elevation control shot from this occupied station the elevation control activity will be treated as control check activity The default elevation control activity is made up of seven data items The AC EC data item is always the first entry of a elevation control activity but the other items may be entered in any order The data items are point number PN point description PD elevation ZC horizontal angle HZ vertical angle VT distance DS The control check activity is actually a sideshot to a point with known coordinates It is used to AC CC check the accuracy of the survey by checking into Control Check a know
351. tem Version 3 5 Appendix 12 56 Appendix Defining Connectivity in the SDMS Project File Defining connectivity refers to the method used to indicate which surveyed points should be connected together to form linear and curvilinear features such as centerlines edges of pavements break lines fences and so on The word chains will be used to refer to the figures formed by connecting points The definition of chains is vital to producing good maps and accurate digital terrain model surfaces Obtaining accurate measurements is the first priority of a survey crew But just knowing the positions of the points is not very helpful if there is no information related to what the points represent and how they are connected to one another The decision on which connectivity method is used has an enormous impact on the procedures used by the field crew SDMS Collector records data in the same order the measurements were taken in the field It would be fairly easy to define point connectivity if the field crew was forced to collect points along a chain from one end to the other and was not allowed to take other shots that are not part of that chain However this is not always an efficient way to operate A more efficient procedure is to move the instrument along a corridor or to different spots around a site and to take as many measurements from each set up position as possible This method results in a file where the points on any given chain are scatt
352. tered using the PD data tag If the point description is unavailable or not applicable the PD data item must be present but its data field may be left blank REQUIRED Any other descriptive data tag A maximum number of 25 data tags are currently allowed in one activity OPTIONAL Error estimate in the X direction easting of the control point OPTIONAL Error estimate in the Y direction northing of the control point OPTIONAL Error estimate in the Z direction elevation of the control point OPTIONAL Note The first data item of a control point must be the activity data item Other data items can be in any order See Appendix for an example of a control file See the Technical Guide for all the options that are allowed in the control file format Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 SDMS Collector System Basics Horizontal Alignment File with Pl Definition A horizontal alignment file based on the PI definition can be used for all live computations and stakeout functions in SDMS Collector Release 3 4 Previous versions of SDMS Collector used alignments based on a PC PT definition but these alignments were restricted to simple tangents and circular curves The PI defined alignments support angle points with no curve data circular curves spiral curves compound curves and station equations The first and last PI basically POTs listed in the alignment file must not have an associated circular or spiral curve ALI is used
353. th AZ bearing BR and the horizontal distance DH between the two points on the Shot Inverse screen as shown in Figure 6 8 Coordinates Computed from Azimuth and Distance Coordinates for points not included in the control file can be computed and saved by inserting the azimuth bearing and distance measured to that point This function is part of the Alignment Control Stakeout screen shown in Figure 6 10 The azimuth or bearing and distance can be computed from the measurement information to the point shot or entered manually SDMS Collector displays the YC XC and ZC for the desired point The coordinates computed will be based on the occupied station point staff height and instrument height entered on the Orientation screen Press lt F5 gt Save to record the point coordinate data to the Write Control file If no point number has been entered the user will be prompted to assign one Creating Catch Points and Measuring Slopes The user can also create a catch point and measure slopes at any desired position elevation or vertical horizontal ratio based on a hinge point This is done by using one of the following combinations on the Slope Stakeout screens e Compute the Catch Point Offset Enter the hinge point data ST OF ZC a Vertical Horizontal Ratio VH and catch point elevation ZC Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 22 Computations e Compute the Catch Point Elevation Enter the hinge point
354. that alignment The point number correlates the PI point with the point in the project control file OPTIONAL This is the stationing value at the beginning of the alignment Enter the value in either stationing format or in decimal format If omitted the default beginning station will be zero The UL response listed in the PROJECT CFG file will define units and stationing OPTIONAL but RECOMMENDED Defines the X coordinate of the starting point of the alignment REQUIRED Defines the Y coordinate of the starting point of the alignment REQUIRED The Z coordinate elevation OPTIONAL SEPI is the point where two tangent lines meet It defines the circle arc segment A shot identification should be entered for each segment REQUIRED Activity for the next segment in the alignment Use any activity data item except AC PR or EQ REQUIRED The point number correlates the PI point with the point in the project control file OPTIONAL The stationing of each intermediate PI for the horizontal alignment being defined OPTIONAL NOTE ST can be included for informational purposes but should be ignored in computations All data is computed based on the first point station ST value and any station equations defined by AC EQ Defines the X coordinate of the intermediate point of the alignment REQUIRED Defines the Y coordinate of the intermediate point of the alignment REQUIRED The Z coordinate elevation OPTIONAL Defin
355. the OD data item for the last point shot to close that figure Using the previous example to close the figure from PN 21 back to PN 10 the field data in the project file would be as follows AC ER FE Ee PFG Su 45 2354 Wales DS AC PN 124355 PFG SH AS YES DS AC PN 12138 FG Syels Hza wwAlbe DS OD CM Es HZ HZ SS 10 EPL LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE ii 5 90 3045 100 44 ss 14 EPL i 5 90 3006 180 94 SS St EPL 1 5 E E 90 3006 180 94 10 Close the chain created by FG 1 on the AS O Outi AE PEN ELO 09 18 1999 18 46 43 Note that this method of closing a chain does not require the closing point to be the first point collected in a chain which would be required if the C method were used The disadvantage of the Origin Destination method is the user has to remember the point number for the closing point Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 64 Appendix The Calculated File for a Closed Chain using Origin Destination The OD 10 listed with the shot data for PN 21 tells the post processing software to close the chain FG 1 on PN 10 which is the first point in the chain The calculated file will have the computed point information and will show the chain created as AC SS PN 10 FE EPL CD LEFT PAVEMENT EDGE SHES HZ 45 2354 VT 90 3045 DS 100 44 XX Calculated X coordinate 0 YY Calculated Y coordinate yu ZZ Calculated Z co
356. the first time PN 2 IH 5 6 FE CTL PD CONTROL POINT Figure 10 6 Start recording a macro Record a Macro wie Executing It Press lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt to begin recording a macro SDMS Collector briefly displays the message Collecting Keys for Macro lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt defines the macro but only records the keystrokes This does not perform the functions of the macro at the same time To use a macro defined with lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt the user must deliberately call the macro into use see Using Macros Press the first keystroke for the macro Notice that the computer gives a high pitched beep when the user presses a key while recording a macro Putting a Pause in a Macro Naming a Macro 1 To put a pause instruction in the macro use the lt CTRL gt P Pause command This temporarily stops the recording of macro keystrokes The computer sounds a low pitched tone to indicate that the user is typing during a macro pause When typing is finished press lt CTRL gt P Pause to resume recording the macro The computer again gives high pitched beeps for each macro keystroke When the user finishes recording the macro press lt Alt gt lt F10 gt SDMS Collector asks for a comment to describe the macro as shown in Figure 10 7 Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 10 7 Getting Help and Using Macros Enter a Comment Figure 10 7 Enter a comment for macro Type in a comment and press lt ENTER g
357. the message is not written into the project file Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 5 4 User Shot Sequences Descriptive Items in a Sequence as Constants Descriptive items such as point description point number comments etc may be entered in a sequence either as variables or constants If the description is included along with the data tag in the sequence the description remains constant If only the data tag itself is entered the last value entered for that data tag is displayed as the default Using A Sequence A user shot sequence can be invoked by pressing the lt F3 gt Sequence function key when SDMS Collector displays MIOC in the upper right corner of the screen and is going to start a new activity SDMS Collector prompts the user for the name of the sequence to use as shown in Figure 5 1 Enter Seq file name gt zs SEI Figure 5 1 SDMS Collector asks for sequence file name The user can type the file name in the highlighted line or press lt F1 gt Dir function key to browse the SEQ directory and pick up the sequence file to use Sequence Levels and Remaining Shots When a sequence file is being used SDMS Collector displays the sequence status on the line directly above the function key line SH 5 PD TOP OF CURB FE TC FG EN P MA Sed ure SEQ Level 1 Shot 4 SH 5 Gato a EE Figure 5 2 Sequence level and remaining shots For example in Figure 5 2 the sequence message l
358. the printer ON LINE and set it to TOP OF PAGE before executing print commands 2 From edit mode press lt F4 gt Print SDMS Collector prints the file from the cursor position to the end of the file 3 Printing occurs on the print device PD in the I Oconfiguration file The print device choices are 4 Press lt Esc gt to stop printing SDMS Collector asks Are you sure Yes No e Typea Y to stop printing e Type an WN to resume printing Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 7 7 Chapter 8 Disk Management and Communication Disk Management and Communication SDMS Collector lets the user manage files without leaving the program This chapter explains how to use these SDMS Collector file handling and disk management functions e Access the disk operations menu Select files to use with disk operations Use lt F1 gt Directory to view files in any directory on the disk Mark files in a directory for use in a disk operations function Use the SDMS file naming conventions Copy a file or batch of files Delete a file or batch of files e Rename a file or batch of files e Print files e Send files to or receive files from other computers through the RS 232 serial port Disk Management The Disk Operations Menu Selecting Files The disk operations menu shown in the figure 8 1 can be accessed from e The main menu by pressing lt F5 gt Disk e The Project mode by pressing lt F7 gt Functions then lt F5 gt
359. tion data items the data items in the Occupied Station intermediate occupied station should include the IH If the ZC is known for the occupied point it may be entered This will reset the elevation and all subsequent elevations will be computed from this new known elevation The error between the computed elevation and the entered elevation will be adjusted and spread over the previous set ups This adjustment will only be made back to the last known elevation If this known elevation is the very first encountered in the project file the elevations will be pushed back to the beginning of the file and no adjustment will be made Note If post processing software other than SDMS Collector will be used that allows occupation of subsequent foresight points in any order the data may be collected in that manner Basically the rules implemented by the processing software determine how the data should be collected SDMS Processor allows occupation of subsequent foresight points in any order The intermediate backsight activities are used to establish the initial reference angle It is always assumed that the previously occupied point is being backsighted The data items in the backsight AC BS activity include SH HZ VT and DS Backsight Note If post processing software other than SDMS Collector will be used that allows a Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 3 3 SDMS Tasks and Activities Activity Data Items backsight
360. tion task The turning point activity contains the three wire rod readings at the turning point The basic difference between an AC FS and an AC TP is that the fore sight is typically a point for which a description is encoded and for which the elevation is desired for future use while an AC TP is just an intermediate point that is used to move the elevations forward to points of interest and little or no description is coded and the elevation is not needed for future use In the three wire level task whenever SDMS Collector will need a rod reading for computations it automatically prompt the user for the top R1 middle R2 and bottom R3 wire readings When rod readings are outside the tolerance error set SDMS Collector prompts the user for the rod readings again After each shot SDMS Collector displays the accumulated imbalance The user can use this information to balance the foresight and backsight distances to reduce the systematic instrument errors caused by instrument miss adjustment SDMS Collector uses the rod type RT and stadia constant W3 to compute distances and elevations For yard rods distances and elevations are computed in feet while the mean rod reading is shown in yards For foot and meter rods the distances and elevations are in the same units as the rod either feet or meters respectively The Stadia Constant W3 which is located in PROJECT CFG has to do with the separation of the instrument stad
361. uence and prompts for the next activity in the sequence For example to include a standard sideshot two standard utility elevations and a comment in a sequence can be done the long way or the short way REGULAR SHORT CUT METHOD Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 5 3 User Shot Sequences REGULAR SHORT CUT METHOD Inserting Another Sequence in a Sequence One sequence can include another sequence Instead of typing in the entire sequence insert the data tag and the sequence file name to signal an automatic sequence call When SDMS Collector encounters file name in a sequence it behaves as if the next sequence is called with lt F3 gt Sequence function key The following example shows the sequence UE SEQ automatically called from another sequence AC SS PN PD HZ VT DS AUER UE SEQ called automatically When finished original sequence continues AC SS PN PD HZ VT DS Using the Help Data Tag in a Sequence File The help data tag H1 allows the user to enter a help message in a sequence without writing the help message into the project file When a sequence is created or edited the H1 data tag can be included at a spot where it will help the crew on the upcoming shot or sequence When the sequence is used the help message appears at the spot it is inserted in the sequence file After reading the message the user press lt ENTER gt The sequence continues normally but
362. ustomizing SDMS Collector NOTE that these parameters are NOT currently used when communicating between an SDMS Collector hardware platform and a total station Those communication parameters are hard coded into the SDMS Collector program based on the total station default parameters of the instrument manufacturer SDMS Collector uses the instrument type IT response to select the appropriate internal parameters for communicating with a total station The Default PC Communication Parameters The default communications parameters for communicating with a standard IBM DC are Setting J Explanation i Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 8 5 Disk Management and Communication B1 9600 Baud rate 9600 P1 NONE Parity NONE Sending a File to Another Computer Use these steps to send a file from SDMS Collector to another computer 1 2 5 6 T Get the destination computer ready to receive the file Make sure all cables are connected properly and that all devices are powered on Be sure the communication parameters are set correctly in SDMS Collector on both the host and destination computers The program must be running on both the host and the destination computer From the SDMS Collector main menu press lt F4 gt I O SDMS Collector automatically checks to see that the communication device is present On the destination computer enter the SDMS Collector file name that is to receive the data and press lt ENTER gt
363. ute 3 A4 10 0 Attribute 4 NEE oO A6 10 O Attribute 6 A7 10 0 Attribute 7 A8 10 0 Attribute 8 A9 10 O Attribute 9 AA 25 1 Area Computed AC 2 0 Activity BS Backsight CC Control Check CH Chain CK Check Shot EC Elevation Control EQ Equation FG Figure FS Foresight OS Occupied Station PR Project Header SI Sideshot Intersect SR Station Resection SS Sideshot ST Stationing TA Taping TP Turn Point TS Tie Sequence Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 Appendix 12 26 Appendix SOR TX Text Block Sd UE Utility Elevation Sic AD 25 0 Angle Distance List Sor AH 2 0 Accuracy Horizontal 34 AR 25 1 Area 257 AV 2 0 Accuracy Vertical Sr AZ 12 1 Azimuth Sie BG 25 0 Begin Group Seba BP 10 1 Barometric Pressure 39 BR 10 0 Bearing 40 BS 7 3 001 Back Sight Point Number 41 CD 25 0 Chain Description 42 Ga IO L Collimation Error 43 CF 1001 Combination Factor 44 45 1 0 Default 46 CH 6 3 001 Chain Number 47 EL ZS Casey 48 El EE 49 F Feature SOF G Ground Sill CM 25 0 Comment e EN 2 O COMICO 8 4 CO 25 0 County gt 54 CP 25 0 Close Project Sor CR 3 2 Curvature amp Refraction Adjust 56 CS 10 0 Coordinate System SC DA 8 1 Deflection Angle 587 DC 8 1 Degree of Curvature Behe DD 12 1 Distance Computed 60 DH 12 1 Distance Horizontal 61 DI 8 0 Diameter 62 DL 2 0 Delete Shot Station 63 SH shot 64 ST station 65 DO 1
364. veral 3D Stakeout functions including stakeout based on points in a control file stakeout of horizontal alignments and profiles stakeout of cross slopes based on design sections and superelevation and slope staking based on the vertical horizontal ratio from a known point SDMS Processor is a Windows based program that runs on a desktop or lap top computer This program allows the user to post process the data collector project files using least squares computational routines It also provides reports of the results including analysis of errors encountered a robust full screen smart editor a graphic display of the points and chains collected an export option for several file formats including the SDMS calculated file CAL and points and chain file PAC that contains the points collected and the chains that connect some of them Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 1 2 Introduction What Is Needed to Use SDMS Collector SDMS Collector is an MS DOS based program that requires at least an 8 line by 40 column display Itis designed for use on hand held PCs in the field but can also be used on desktop and laptop computers as well as other data recorders that support MS DOS To record information measured by total station instruments there must be an RS232C serial connection between the total station and the data recorder Specific data recorders that meet the SDMS criteria include e Husky Hunter 16 2Mb minimum e Husky ESO 2Mb
365. which are to be used for topography Related to this rule is how the prompting schemes work in SDMS If the user defines a certain activity to prompt for certain data tags every time that activity is used then SDMS will present the prompt with the data field filled in with the entry made the last time that data tag was used This rule is true for most descriptive data tags A few exceptions are those related to Point Numbers PN origin Destination OD Set SE and Face FC The data fields can be defined to increment from the last entry for these data tags 8 If a data tag is being prompted for but no data entry is desired for that particular tag the user can press lt ENTER gt with a blank data field and the software will eliminate that line from the data set as if the prompt had never been made If the user never wants that prompt to appear it can be removed from the definition of that activity within that Task in the TASK TGS file 9 When the post process software encounters a normally required coordinate data tag response field that has no value available 99999 shall be used to fill that field to indicate the value is missing This includes XC YC ZC XX YY and ZZ SDMS files PRJ CAL CTL compiled with SDMS Release 3 2 and earlier may also have a null value for the PD data tag This value is not to be confused with the possibility of negative coordinates being encountered The only exception is the DOS version of SD
366. with the instrument or entered for HZ and VT SDMS Collector will assume HZ 0 and VT 0 These values will be held for all staking until the user returns to this screen to change and re orients to the backsight Pressing lt F5 gt Save will save the coordinate data for both the occupied station point and the backsight point to the named Write Control File If the point already exists in the Write Control file the user will be asked whether to append the point to the bottom of the control file with the same point number or to assign a new point number Pressing lt F6 gt Rec_ will record the information currently displayed on the screen in the Record REC file This is essentially a screen dump that can be used to check or verify what information was used during the orientation process Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 9 Computations Pressing lt F7 gt Func is used to access the control configuration CNTL CFG file to review or change the filenames for the control files the horizontal alignment and vertical alignment files and superelevation file All of the configuration files available during data collection are also available for review and edit Pressing lt F8 gt Proj will return the user to the data collection mode Summary of Orientation Screen Functions and Displays The function keys on the Orientation screen Figure 6 7 perform the following lt F1 gt Shot Brings up the Shot Inverse screen lt F2 gt
367. wn in Figure 6 7 This screen is used to e Input the data necessary to orient the instrument for stake out e Input point numbers or coordinates to compute the inverse horizontal distance and azimuth bearing between two points This screen also provides access to all the computation and stake out functions This includes e lt F1 gt Shot The shot and inverse computation screen e lt F2 gt Stak 2D and 3D stakeout based on control points or horizontal and vertical alignments lt F3 gt Slop Slope staking functions lt F5 gt Save Saving point data to the Write Control File lt F6 gt Rec Recording the screen data in the record file REC lt F7 gt Func Configuration files lt F8 gt Proj Return to the project file These functions will be described in detail in this section Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 6 8 Computations Instrument Orientation Once the instrument has been set up the orientation screen is used to input the coordinate data for the occupied station and the backsight point The left side of the screen labeled OS PN is used to input data for the point number of the occupied station The right side labeled BS PN is used to input data for the backsight point The coordinate data can be entered manually or can be retrieved from the named control file Type in the point number of the control point desired and press Enter If the point number entered in these fields resides i
368. xample Project PRJ File ke PR TRAEXAM 25 TK TRA SC AC PR 4 ID HWY 136 oh IT GEO440 Du SN 76428 thes NM PROJECT 89 123 8 TE 28 S BEEZ OPO 10 OB K ADAMS SE RE K ADAMS 12 EE RE ES WE CLEAR 14 IRENE T5 Chal 16 LOLA S12 EY UA D 18 arse 19 ESA 20 VR SDMS Collector 3 4 0 2a AC 0S 22 P27 ZAS PETRE SE 24 OZ 25 EE 26 EENEG 20 EE 2S7 28 ZC 448 225 29 AC BS 30 PN 26 Sch IID SG ANSE SE 82 HZ 0 38 VAES SME SO 2 00 34 RE oo YOS OKOTE 36 XC88 5296038 gt ACHES 38 PN 101 Sor PD TRAV PT 40 HZ 54 4048 41 VO 251510 42 DS 610 061 43 SH 4 9 44 AC 0S 45 PN 101 46 PD TRAV PT 47 REESEN 48 S949 49 AC BS SOF BIOS Sl PU ETRE St SG HZ 0 597 VT 87 3846 54 DS OM OL Dove ACRES Son Pi Oe 57 SEL Deet TET 58 AS SS IDAS SC VT 87 3846 60 DS 698 496 61 SS 2 AOS 63 PN 102 64 BODA DA Oo TEO de Survey Data Management System Version 3 5 12 42 Appendix 66 SHEERS SS 67 AC BS 68 PN 101 GS PD TRAV PT 70 HZ 0 ES ME 72 DS 698 496 We INC IHS 74 PN 103 A SES IPT GE H2 159 2402 SS ESOS SiS SE DSE TEE TSE Sig Sal 80 ACHOS 81 PN 103 EECH PD TRAV PT SO EE 84 SENO Pl e AC BS 86 PN lt LOZ2 Ee Ee PL 88 HZ 0 89 VT 89 0145 30 DSE VOS STT 91 AC FS SE PN 35 SS PDICITRE SE 94 HZ 133 0802 S ts Sal lt LOALO a Decio ie Oe SH 4 84 Qe ACHOS EES PN 35 100 PD OTRE PT hos TH 4 9 102 SH
369. y Data Management System Version 3 5 11 10 Examples Displayed Instructions and Comments description TRAV PT Type 159 2402 Type 90 5815 Type 793 877 The staff height has changed again so a new SH value must be entered Move to the A in AC and type SH but do not press lt ENTER gt yet SDMS Collector suggests the last entered staff height Change it to 5 1 The instrument has moved to point 103 Type OS over FS to select the occupied station activity Press lt ENTER gt to accept incremented point number 103 PD TRAV PT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point description TRAV PT 1H 5 42 Change the instrument height to 5 45 SH 5 1 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested staff height 5 1 AC BS Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested backsight shot activity PN 102 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point number 102 PD TRAV PT Press lt ENTER gt to accept the suggested point description Type 0 to zero the backsight Type 89 0145 Type 793 877 Type FS over BS to select the foresight activity SDMS Collector suggests the incremented point number 104 Change it to 35 Type CTRL over TRAV Type 133 0802 Type 91 1010 Type 1228 112 The staff height has changed again so a new SH value must be entered Move to the A in AC and type SH but do not press lt ENTER gt yet SDMS Collector suggests the last entered staff height Change it to 4 84 The instrument has moved to point 35
370. yl Sik opmbace pes stop DEES PD 4 0 Print Device LPT1 LPT1 LPT1 device LPT2 LPT2 device COM1 COM1 port COM2 COM2 port CON screen display H 37 0 Print Header Ds se r enter desired page header PF 37 0 Print Footer E enter desired page footer PL 2 1 Page Length in lines 60 y 60 default for printer 8 default for screen PW 2 1 Page Width in chars 80 r 80 default for printer 40 default for screen PG 3 2 Page Numbering No Yes number each page No no page numbering TS 3 2 Time Stamping No Yes put time stamp on each page No no time stamping DT 3 2 Date Stamping No Yes put date stamp on each page No no date stamping 12 23 Project Configuration Appendix The Project Configuration File PROJECT CFG English Unit Project ECONO IO Gal iss Ws NA ECOS Metric Unit Project i KE EE AE EE EE ATEAN UA D DESP EE OSF NS NEWPR RESI MM 1000 CR SS LEE CF 1 00000000 UL M UA D URAC UBB OS NS NEWPR RLM 1 MM 10000 OOO The Project Configuration Help File PROJECT HLP 00 Jo 0 Gs GA b4 CR 3 2 Curvature and Refraction Yes Yes CR adjustments applied during computations No CR adjustments NOT applied during computations W3 8 1 3 Wire Stadia Constant 333 3333 H 7333 3333 default stadia interval CF 8 1 Combination Factor 1 00 r 1 00 default no adjustment UD LO Unites hbenginy E F feet M meters Kilometer stationing M

SDMS User`s Guide Version 3_5

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents